Service Manual: iPF680/670/650 Series

Service Manual
iPF680/670/650 series
iPF671
Dec 17 2014
Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, installation, maintenance, and repair
of products. This manual covers all localities where the products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this
manual that does not apply to your locality.
Corrections
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products. When
changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the need
arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new edition
of this manual.
The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law.
Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies.
Copyright
This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, reproduced or
translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the written consent of Canon Inc.
COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.

Printed in Japan
Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.
Introduction
Symbols Used
This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information:
Symbol Description
Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or Warning.
Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.
Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).
Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.
Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric outlet.
Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the topic in question.
Memo
Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question.

REF.
Provides a description of a service mode.
Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.

Introduction
The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with refer-
ence to the timing of operation.
In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol , the arrow indicates the
direction of the electric signal.
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the front door, and closing the delivery unit door, which results in
supplying the machine with power.
2. In the digital circuits, '1'is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is "High", while '0' is used to indicate "Low".(The voltage value, how-
ever, differs from circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when '0'.
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field. Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors
used in the machines are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of the DC controller PCB and from the output of the
DC controller PCB to the loads.
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product improvement or other purposes, and major changes will be com-
municated in the form of Service Information bulletins.
All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all relevant Service Information bulletins and be
able to identify and isolate faults in the machine."
Contents
Contents
Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

1.1 Product Overview .......................................................................................................................................1- 1
1.1.1 Product Overview .................................................................................................................................................... 1- 1
1.2 Features .....................................................................................................................................................1- 2
1.2.1 Features .................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 2
1.2.2 Printhead ................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 2
1.2.3 Ink Tank................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 2
1.2.4 Cutter....................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 2
1.2.5 Roll Holder............................................................................................................................................................... 1- 2
1.2.6 Stand (ST-26) .......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 4
1.2.7 Stand (ST-27) .......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 6
1.2.8 Consumables........................................................................................................................................................... 1- 9
1.3 Product Specifications ..............................................................................................................................1- 10
1.3.1 Product Specifications ........................................................................................................................................... 1- 10
1.4 Detailed Specifications .............................................................................................................................1- 11
1.4.1 Interface Specifications ......................................................................................................................................... 1- 11
1.5 Names and Functions of Components .....................................................................................................1- 13
1.5.1 Front ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 13
1.5.2 Side ....................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 14
1.5.3 Top Cover (Inside)................................................................................................................................................. 1- 15
1.5.4 Roll Unit Cover (Inside) ......................................................................................................................................... 1- 16
1.5.5 Carriage................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 16
1.5.6 Ink Tank Cover (Inside) ......................................................................................................................................... 1- 17
1.5.7 Stand (ST-26) ........................................................................................................................................................ 1- 18
1.5.8 Stand (ST-27) ........................................................................................................................................................ 1- 19
1.6 Basic Operation ........................................................................................................................................1- 20
1.6.1 Operation Panel..................................................................................................................................................... 1- 20
1.6.2 Display................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 21
1.6.3 Menu...................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 22
1.7 Safety and Precautions ............................................................................................................................1- 42
1.7.1 Safety Precautions ................................................................................................................................................ 1- 42
1.7.1.1 Moving Parts .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 42
1.7.1.2 Adhesion of Ink ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 43
1.7.1.3 Electric Parts.......................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 44
1.7.2 Other Precautions.................................................................................................................................................. 1- 45
1.7.2.1 Printhead................................................................................................................................................................................ 1- 45
1.7.2.2 Ink Tank ................................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 46
1.7.2.3 Handling the Printer ............................................................................................................................................................... 1- 46
1.7.3 Precautions When Servicing Printer...................................................................................................................... 1- 48
1.7.3.1 Notes on the Data Stored in the Printer ................................................................................................................................. 1- 48
1.7.3.2 Confirming the Firmware Version .......................................................................................................................................... 1- 48
1.7.3.3 Precautions against Static Electricity ..................................................................................................................................... 1- 48
1.7.3.4 Precautions for Disassembly/Reassembly............................................................................................................................. 1- 48
1.7.3.5 Self-diagnostic Feature .......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 48
1.7.3.6 Disposing of the Lithium Battery ............................................................................................................................................ 1- 49
Chapter 2 TECHNICAL REFERENCE

2.1 Basic Operation Outline..............................................................................................................................2- 1
2.1.1 Printer Diagram ....................................................................................................................................................... 2- 1
2.1.2 Print Signal Sequence ............................................................................................................................................. 2- 2
Contents
2.1.3 Print Driving .............................................................................................................................................................2- 3

2.2 Firmware .................................................................................................................................................... 2- 5
2.2.1 Operation Sequence at Power-on............................................................................................................................2- 5
2.2.2 Operation Sequence at Power-off............................................................................................................................2- 6
2.2.3 Print Position Adjustment Function ..........................................................................................................................2- 7
2.2.4 Head Management ..................................................................................................................................................2- 7
2.2.5 Printhead Overheating Protection Control ...............................................................................................................2- 7
2.2.6 Pause between Pages .............................................................................................................................................2- 7
2.2.7 White Raster Skip ....................................................................................................................................................2- 7
2.2.8 Sleep Mode..............................................................................................................................................................2- 7
2.2.9 Shut Down Mode .....................................................................................................................................................2- 7
2.3 Printer Mechanical System......................................................................................................................... 2- 8
2.3.1 Outline......................................................................................................................................................................2- 8
2.3.1.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 8
2.3.2 Ink Passage .............................................................................................................................................................2- 9
2.3.2.1 Ink Passage ............................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 9
2.3.2.2 Ink Tank Unit.......................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 10
2.3.2.3 Carriage Unit.......................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 12
2.3.2.4 Printhead................................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 16
2.3.2.5 Purge Unit .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 17
2.3.2.6 Maintenance Cartridge........................................................................................................................................................... 2- 22
2.3.2.7 Air Flow .................................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 23
2.3.3 Paper Path .............................................................................................................................................................2- 25
2.3.3.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 25
2.3.3.2 Paper Path ............................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 26
2.3.3.3 Cutter Unit.............................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 28
2.4 Printer Electrical System .......................................................................................................................... 2- 29
2.4.1 Outline....................................................................................................................................................................2- 29
2.4.1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 29
2.4.2 Main Controller.......................................................................................................................................................2- 31
2.4.2.1 Main controller PCB components .......................................................................................................................................... 2- 31
2.4.2.2 Connectors and Pin Arrangement of Main controller PCB..................................................................................................... 2- 32
2.4.3 Carriage Relay PCB...............................................................................................................................................2- 39
2.4.3.1 Carriage PCB components .................................................................................................................................................... 2- 39
2.4.3.2 Connectors and Pin Arrangement of Carriage PCB .............................................................................................................. 2- 40
2.4.4 Maintenance Cartridge Relay PCB ........................................................................................................................2- 44
2.4.4.1 Maintenance cartridge relay PCB components...................................................................................................................... 2- 44
2.4.5 Power Supply.........................................................................................................................................................2- 45
2.4.5.1 Power supply block diagram .................................................................................................................................................. 2- 45
2.4.5.2 Connectors and Pin Arrangement of Power supply PCB....................................................................................................... 2- 46
2.5 Detection Functions with Sensors ............................................................................................................ 2- 47
2.5.1 Covers....................................................................................................................................................................2- 47
2.5.2 Ink passage system ...............................................................................................................................................2- 48
2.5.3 Carriage system.....................................................................................................................................................2- 51
2.5.4 Paper path system .................................................................................................................................................2- 53
2.5.5 Others ....................................................................................................................................................................2- 55
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION
3.1 Transporting the Printer.............................................................................................................................. 3- 1
3.1.1 Transporting the Printer ...........................................................................................................................................3- 1
3.1.1.1 Transporting the Printer ........................................................................................................................................................... 3- 1
3.1.2 Reinstalling the Printer.............................................................................................................................................3- 4
3.1.2.1 Reinstalling the Printer............................................................................................................................................................. 3- 4
Chapter 4 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
4.1 Service Parts .............................................................................................................................................. 4- 1
Contents
4.1.1 Service Parts ........................................................................................................................................................... 4- 1

4.2 Disassembly/Reassembly...........................................................................................................................4- 2
4.2.1 Disassembly/Reassembly ....................................................................................................................................... 4- 2
4.3 Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly .......................................................................................4- 2
4.3.1 Note: Items that should never be disassembled...................................................................................................... 4- 2
4.3.2 Moving the carriage manually.................................................................................................................................. 4- 2
4.3.3 Units requiring draining of ink .................................................................................................................................. 4- 3
4.3.4 External Covers ....................................................................................................................................................... 4- 4
4.3.5 Drive Unit............................................................................................................................................................... 4- 13
4.3.6 Cutter..................................................................................................................................................................... 4- 17
4.3.7 Carriage Unit ......................................................................................................................................................... 4- 19
4.3.8 Purge Unit.............................................................................................................................................................. 4- 26
4.3.9 Ink Tank Unit ......................................................................................................................................................... 4- 30
4.3.10 Ink Tube Unit ....................................................................................................................................................... 4- 33
4.3.11 Waste Ink Collection Unit..................................................................................................................................... 4- 37
4.3.12 Multi Sensor......................................................................................................................................................... 4- 42
4.3.13 Linear Encoder .................................................................................................................................................... 4- 43
4.3.14 Head Management Sensor.................................................................................................................................. 4- 48
4.3.15 PCBs.................................................................................................................................................................... 4- 49
4.3.16 Opening the Cap/Moving the Wiper Unit ............................................................................................................. 4- 50
4.3.17 Opening/Closing the Ink Supply Valve/Subtank Air Passage Valve.................................................................... 4- 52
4.3.18 Draining the ink.................................................................................................................................................... 4- 53
4.4 Applying the Grease .................................................................................................................................4- 54
4.4.1 Applying the Grease .............................................................................................................................................. 4- 54
4.5 Adjustment and Setup Items ....................................................................................................................4- 58
4.5.1 Adjustment Item List .............................................................................................................................................. 4- 58
4.5.2 Procedure after Replacing the Carriage Unit or Multi Sensor ............................................................................... 4- 58
4.5.3 Procedure after Replacing the Feed Roller or Feed Roller Encoder ..................................................................... 4- 58
4.5.4 Procedure after Replacing the Head Management Sensor................................................................................... 4- 58
Chapter 5 MAINTENANCE
5.1 Periodic Replacement Parts .......................................................................................................................5- 1
5.1.1 Periodic Replacement Parts .................................................................................................................................... 5- 1
5.2 Consumable Parts ......................................................................................................................................5- 1
5.2.1 Consumable Parts ................................................................................................................................................... 5- 1
5.3 Periodic Maintenance .................................................................................................................................5- 3
5.3.1 Periodic Maintenance .............................................................................................................................................. 5- 3
Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING
6.1 Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................................................................6- 1
6.1.1 Outline ..................................................................................................................................................................... 6- 1
6.1.1.1 Outline of Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................................... 6- 1
6.2 Error Code ..................................................................................................................................................6- 2
6.2.1 Outline ..................................................................................................................................................................... 6- 2
6.2.1.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6- 2
6.2.2 Warning/Error/Service Call Error ............................................................................................................................. 6- 3
6.2.2.1 Code Table .............................................................................................................................................................................. 6- 3
6.3 Service Software ......................................................................................................................................6- 35
6.3.1 L Printer Service Tool ............................................................................................................................................ 6- 35
6.4 Firmware Update Tool ..............................................................................................................................6- 39
6.4.1 imagePROGRAF Firmware Update Tool .............................................................................................................. 6- 39
6.5 Service Tools ............................................................................................................................................6- 41
6.5.1 Tool List ................................................................................................................................................................. 6- 41
Contents
Chapter 7 SERVICE MODE

7.1 Service Mode ............................................................................................................................................. 7- 1
7.1.1 Service Mode Operation ..........................................................................................................................................7- 1
7.1.2 Map of the Service Mode .........................................................................................................................................7- 2
7.1.3 Details of Service Mode .........................................................................................................................................7- 10
7.1.4 e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote ....................................................................................................................7- 28
7.1.5 Viewing PRINT INF................................................................................................................................................7- 38
7.2 Special Mode............................................................................................................................................ 7- 53
7.2.1 Special Modes for Servicing ..................................................................................................................................7- 53
Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Contents
Contents
1.1 Product Overview ..........................................................................................................................................................1-1

1.1.1 Product Overview ........................................................................................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2 Features ..........................................................................................................................................................................1-2
1.2.1 Features ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-2
1.2.2 Printhead ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.3 Ink Tank ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.4 Cutter............................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-2
1.2.5 Roll Holder................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.6 Stand (ST-26)............................................................................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.2.7 Stand (ST-27)............................................................................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.2.8 Consumables ................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-9
1.3 Product Specifications..................................................................................................................................................1-10
1.3.1 Product Specifications ............................................................................................................................................................... 1-10
1.4 Detailed Specifications ................................................................................................................................................1-11
1.4.1 Interface Specifications.............................................................................................................................................................. 1-11
1.5 Names and Functions of Components .........................................................................................................................1-13
1.5.1 Front ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-13
1.5.2 Side ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-14
1.5.3 Top Cover (Inside) ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1-15
1.5.4 Roll Unit Cover (Inside) ............................................................................................................................................................ 1-16
1.5.5 Carriage...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-16
1.5.6 Ink Tank Cover (Inside)............................................................................................................................................................. 1-17
1.5.7 Stand (ST-26)............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-18
1.5.8 Stand (ST-27)............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-19
1.6 Basic Operation............................................................................................................................................................1-20
1.6.1 Operation Panel.......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-20
1.6.2 Display ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-21
1.6.3 Menu .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-22
1.7 Safety and Precautions .................................................................................................................................................1-42
1.7.1 Safety Precautions...................................................................................................................................................................... 1-42
1.7.1.1 Moving Parts .................................................................................................................................................................................................1-42
1.7.1.2 Adhesion of Ink.............................................................................................................................................................................................1-43
1.7.1.3 Electric Parts .................................................................................................................................................................................................1-44
1.7.2 Other Precautions....................................................................................................................................................................... 1-45
1.7.2.1 Printhead .......................................................................................................................................................................................................1-45
1.7.2.2 Ink Tank ........................................................................................................................................................................................................1-46
1.7.2.3 Handling the Printer ......................................................................................................................................................................................1-46
1.7.3 Precautions When Servicing Printer .......................................................................................................................................... 1-48
1.7.3.1 Notes on the Data Stored in the Printer.........................................................................................................................................................1-48
1.7.3.2 Confirming the Firmware Version ................................................................................................................................................................1-48
1.7.3.3 Precautions against Static Electricity ............................................................................................................................................................1-48
1.7.3.4 Precautions for Disassembly/Reassembly.....................................................................................................................................................1-48
1.7.3.5 Self-diagnostic Feature..................................................................................................................................................................................1-48
1.7.3.6 Disposing of the Lithium Battery..................................................................................................................................................................1-49
Chapter 1
1.1 Product Overview
1.1.1 Product Overview

0023-5225
This printer is capable of printing on A4- to A1-size cut sheets and its maximum print width is 24 inches. This printer is a desktop large-format printer five-colors
(dye- and pigment-based colors) printer that can be used to print CAD and office documents as well as handy POP and posters.
[3] [14] [15] [1] [2] [3] [4]
[6]
[5]
[13]
[6]
[16]
[7]
[9] [8]
[12] [11] [10]

F-1-1
[1] Roll media cover [9] Maintenance cartridge

[2] Media loading slot [10] Cutter unit
[3] Roll media temporary table [11] Cutter rail
[4] Release lever [12] Paper eject slot
[5] Operation panel [13] Output guide
[6] Ink tank cover [14] Upper cover
[7] Media alignment line [15] Width guide
[8] Maintenance cartridge cover [16] Stand
1-1
Chapter 1
1.2 Features
1.2.1 Features
0028-0098
- High resolutions of 2,400 x 1,200 dpi maximum, coupled with the exceptionally light-fast, water-proof and ozone-proof five-color pigment inks of Y, M, C, PBK
and MBK, deliver high-quality photographic picture quality.
- Black ink suitable for the selected media type is automatically selected from two types of black ink, "black ink" for vivid and glossy printing and "matte black
ink" for matte and high-quality printing.
- A 160-by-128-dot-large LCD
- One-inch wide printhead having 2,560 nozzles per color, which are as many as the those of the existing models. High-density printhead technology "FINE" that
can satisfy both of beautiful and fast printing requirements of a high order is employed for accurate ejection of ultrasmall 4-pl drops of ink to the target positions.
Prints with 2,400 x 1,200 dpi resolution can be made at a high speed.
- Imaging processor "L-COA" incorporated for high-speed image data processing. High-speed processing of 5-color, 12-bit large-size images and printer control
for high-accuracy operation of high-density head can be performed with a single chip.
- Standard support for 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T and USB 2.0 Hi-Speed.
- Borderless printing on and auto cutting of roll media.
- All operations such as loading the roll media and cut sheet and replacing the ink tank can be carried out at the front (top) of the printer.
- The printer can be installed with its back in touch with the wall, requiring no installation space at the back of the printer.
- A subtank mounted at the ink port allows you to replace the ink tank during printing.
- The pressure of suction from the borderless printing ink catch groove changes automatically with the media size, preventing shift of media edges and staining of
the backside of the media.
- A printhead having nozzles (I-shaped nozzle) with a new shape reduces ink mist, ensuring superfine printing.
- Compatibility with e-maintenance/imageWARE Remote allows centralized management of customers' printer information.
- The newly designed operation panel allows you to operate the printer intuitively.
Functional enhancements new to this model include:

- The processing ability of the printed data will enhance by improvement of throughput.
1.2.2 Printhead
0013-2741
The printhead that mounts on the carriage is an integrated six-color disposable printhead.
It has 5,120 nozzles for MBK and 2,560 nozzles for each additional color arranged in a staggered pattern.
If print quality remains unimproved even after a specified cleaning operation, replace the printhead.
F-1-2
1.2.3 Ink Tank

0012-6188
The ink tank is disposable.

There are four dye-based ink colors (black, cyan, magenta, and yellow) and one pigment-based ink color (matte black).
This printer features a mechanism by which only the correct color ink tank will fit in the given slot.
When the message that ink tank is empty is displayed, replace the ink tank with a new one.
F-1-3
1.2.4 Cutter
0023-1309
The cutter attached to the cutter unit is a round cutter.
F-1-4
1-2
Chapter 1
1.2.5 Roll Holder

0023-1308
The roller holder accepts paper tubes having inside diameters of both 2 and 3 inches. It is furnished with attachments for 2- and 3-inch diameter paper tubes.
The roll holder clamps the paper tube of a roll not exceeding 150 mm in outside diameter from the inside.
F-1-5
[2-inch paper tube attachment]
F-1-6
[3-inch paper tube attachment R]
F-1-7
[3-inch paper tube attachment L]
F-1-8
1-3
Chapter 1
1.2.6 Stand (ST-26)

0023-5227
The stand [1] is equipped with casters so that the printer can be easily moved. The output stacker [2] included with stand can use by the two ways of the regular
position or extended position.
[1]
[2]
F-1-9
MEMO:
- When delivering the printing to the output stacker: Use the position [A].
- When not using the output stacker or moving the printer: Use the position [B]. When moving the printer, raise the auxiliary rod to the position of extended position.
The output stacker may touch the floor and be soiled or damaged.
[B]
[A]
F-1-10
[Regular position]
F-1-11
1-4
Chapter 1
[Extended position]
F-1-12
- Changing from the regular position to extended position.
1) Raise the auxiliary rod [1] to the position [A] of the illustration to change to the extended position.
[A]
[1]
F-1-13
2) Pull out the switching stopper [1] when using roll paper that is A1 size or has a width of 24 inches.
[1]
F-1-14
1-5
Chapter 1
1.2.7 Stand (ST-27)

0027-2231
The stand [1] is equipped with casters so that the printer can be easily moved. The output stacker [2] included with stand can use by the three ways of the regular
position or two extended positions.
[1]
[2]
F-1-15
MEMO:
- When delivering the printing to the output stacker: Use the position [A].
- When not using the output stacker or moving the printer: Use the position [B]. When moving the printer, raise the auxiliary rod to the position of extended position.
The output stacker may touch the floor and be soiled or damaged.
[A] [B]
F-1-16
[Regular position]
F-1-17
1-6
Chapter 1
[Extended position A]
F-1-18
- Changing from the regular position to extended position A.
1) Raise the auxiliary rod [1] to the position [A] of the illustration to change to the extended position A.
[A]
[1]
F-1-19
2) Pull out the switching stopper [1] when using roll paper that is A1 size or has a width of 24 inches.
[1]
F-1-20
[Extended position B]
F-1-21
1-7
Chapter 1
- Changing from the regular position to extended position B.
1) Grasp the output stacker handle [1] to set the guide as shown in the following illustration.
[1]
F-1-22
2) Open the output stacker ejection guides [1] toward the front.
[1]
F-1-23
- Changing from the extended position B to regular position.
1) Close the output stacker ejection guides [1] and pull the output stacker release lever [2] forward to release the lock, and then grasp the output stacker handle [3]
to return the guide.
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-1-24
1-8
Chapter 1
1.2.8 Consumables
0023-1261
Printhead
The consumable printhead is the same as that supplied with the printer.
F-1-25
Ink Tanks
The consumable ink tanks are available in five colors (matte black, black, cyan, magenta and yellow). They are the same as those supplied with the printer.
The ink tank that can be used with this printer is labeled "J".
F-1-26
MEMO:
You can also use ink tanks other than magenta ink tank that are simply labeled "A".
Maintenance Cartridge
The consumable maintenance cartridge is the same as that supplied with the printer.
F-1-27
1-9
Chapter 1
1.3 Product Specifications
1.3.1 Product Specifications

0032-0487
Type Bubble jet large-sized paper printer (stand model)

Feeding system Roll media: manual feed from top
Cut sheet: manual feed from top
Feeding capacity - Roll media: 1 roll madia (Outer diameter of roll: 150 mm or less/Inner
diameter of paper tube: 2 or 3 inches)
- Cut sheet: 1 sheet
Delivery method Forward delivery, face up
Sheet delivery capability Stacking to the output stacker of the stand
- 1 sheet: when using in the regular position
- approximate 20 sheets: when using in the extended position (However,
it has the following restrictions.)
when using in the extended position/extended position A: paper length
A0/36"X48" or A1/24"X36" size plain paper or recycled paper
when using in the extended position B: paper length A1/36"X24" or A2/
24"X18" size plain paper or recycled paper
Cutter Automatic cross-cutter (round blade)
Type of media Roll Media:
Plain Paper, Plain Paper (High Quality), Plain Paper (High Grade),
Coated Paper, Heavyweight Coated Paper, Premium Matte Paper,
Premium Glossy Paper 200, Premium Semi-Glossy Paper 200, Premium
Glossy Paper 280, Premium Semi-Glossy Paper 280, Back Light Film,
Economy Bond Paper, Universal Bond Paper, Matte Coated Paper
170gsm, Premium RC Photo Luster, Durable Backlit Film, High
Resolution Coated Paper, Matte Coated Paper 90gsm, Glossy
Photographic Paper 190gsm, Glossy Photographic Paper 240gsm, Satin
Photographic Paper 240gsm, Glossy Photographic Paper 270gsm, Satin
Photographic Paper 270gsm, HW Glossy Photo Paper, HW Satin Photo
Paper, Commercial Proofing Paper, Standard Paper1569B 80g, Standard
Paper1570B 90g, Matt Coated Paper 9171, Matt Coated Paper 7215,
Matt Coated Paper 140g, Opaque Paper White, Hi Res Graphic Paper, Hi
Res Barrier Paper, Photo Realistic Paper 210g, Photo paper Pearl 260g,
Glossy Proofing Paper 195g, Semiglossy Proofing Paper 195g,
Semiglossy Proofing Paper 255g
Cut Paper:
Plain Paper, Plain Paper (High Quality), Plain Paper (High Grade),
Coated Paper, Premiun Matte Paper, Premium Glossy Paper 280,
Premium Semi-Glossy Paper 280, High Resolution Paper, Matte Photo
Paper, Glossy Photo Paper GP-501, Photo Paper Plus Glossy 2, Photo
Paper Pro Platium, Photo Paper Plus Semi-Gloss, Universal Bond Paper,
Premium RC Photo Luster, High Resolution Coated Paper, Matt Coated
Paper 7215, Matt Coated Paper 140g
Supported thickness 0.07mm to 0.8mm
Media size (Roll media) Width: 254.0mm (10") to 609.6mm (24")
Length: 203.2mm (8") to 18m (709") *1
Outer diameter of roll :150mm or less
*1: The maximum amount of length may vary by the using operating
system or the applications.
Media size (Cut sheet) Width: 203.2mm (8") to 609.6mm (24")
Length: 279.4mm (11") to 1600mm (63") *1
*1: The maximum amount of length may vary by the using operating
system or the applications.
Printable area (Roll media) Internal area, excluding a 3-mm top, bottom and left and right margins.
Borderless printing: 0 mm from the leading edge, trailing edge, and left
and right edges.
* The printable area may vary with each type of paper media used.
Width of media allowing borderless printing:

24"(609.6mm), A1(594.0mm), B2(515.0mm), 17"(431.8mm),
A2(420.0mm), 14"(355.6mm), 300mm, A3(297.0mm), B4(257.0mm),
10"(254mm)
Printable area (Cut sheet) Internal area, excluding a 3-mm top margin, a 23-mm bottom margin and
3-mm left and right margins.
* The printable area may vary with each type of paper media used.
Printing recommendation area Internal area, excluding a 20-mm top margin, a 5-mm bottom margin and
(Roll media) 5-mm left and right margins.
Printing recommendation area Internal area, excluding a 20-mm top margin, a 23-mm bottom margin
(Cut sheet) and 5-mm left and right margins.
Memory 256MB
Increase of memory: none
Firmware Flash ROM (update from USB or Ethernet)
- Printer description language
GARO (Graphic Arts language with Raster Operation), HP-GL/2, HP-
RTL
Interface USB2.0 Hi-Speed
Network (10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T)
1-10
Chapter 1
Operation panel LCD (160 X 128 dots), 13 keys, 5 LEDs

- Panel language
English
- Message language
English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Chinese, Korean, Russianand
and Japanese
Printhead/Ink Tank type Printhead and separate ink tanks
Printhead PF-04
Structure: Integrated six-color assembly
Number of nozzles: 5,120 for MBK, 2,560 for other each color
Ink tank [PFI-107/8107] MBK, BK, C, M, Y
Ink type: Pigment ink (MBK)
Dye ink (BK, C, M, Y)
Ink tank capacity: [PFI-107/8107] 130 ml
(Ink tanks supplied with the printer contain 90 ml of each color.)
Detection functions (Cover Upper cover open/closed detection: Yes
system) Ink tank cover open/closed detection: Yes
Detection functions (Ink passage Ink tank presence/absence detection: Yes
system) Remaining ink level detection (dot count and electrode): Yes
Maintenance cartridge presence/absence detection: Yes
Used ink tank full detection: Yes
Ink supply Valve open/closed detection: Yes
Detection functions (Carriage Printhead presence/absence detection: Yes
system) Carriage position detection: Yes
Carriage home position detection: Yes
Printhead temperature detection: Yes
Printhead height detection: Yes
Non-discharging nozzle detection: Yes
Non-discharging nozzle backup feature: Yes
Ambient temperature/humidity detection: Yes
Detection functions (Paper path Paper presence/absence detection: Yes
system) Paper width detection: Yes
Skew detection: Yes
Paper leading edge and trailing edge detection: Yes
Release lever position detection: Yes
Remaining roll media detection: Yes
Feed roller rotation detection: Yes
Roll holder rotation detection: Yes
Cutter positin detection: Yes
Operating noise Operating: Approx. 47dB (A) or less
Standby: Approx. 35dB (A) or less
Operating environment Temperature: 15 to 30 degrees centigrade
Humidity: 10% to 80%RH without dew condensation
Print quality guaranteed Temperature: 15 to 30 degrees centigrade
environment Humidity: 10% to 80%RH
Power supply 100-240 VAC (50/60 Hz)
Power consumption (Maximum) During printing: Max. 140 W
Power consumption In power save (sleep) mode:
5W or less
During standby: 0.5W or less
Printer unit dimensions 997mm(W) x 698mm(D) x 507mm(H) (printer alone)
(WxDxH) 997mm(W) x 870mm(D) x 1062mm(H) (with ST-26 or ST-27 stand and
opening the output stacker)
997mm(W) x 1100mm(D) x 1062mm(H) (with ST-27 stand and setting
to the extended position B)
Weight Approx. 43kg (printer alone)
Approx. 54kg (with ST-26 or ST-27 stand and without printhead and ink
tank)
Package dimensions (WxDxH) / 1127mm x 830mm x 773mm (printer alone, with the palette), approx.
Weight 72kg
1073mm x 766mm x 263mm (ST-26 stand), approx. 15kg
1083mm x 766mm x 350mm (ST-27 stand alone), approx. 19kg
For US model: 1127mm x 830mm x 1058mm (with the stand and the
palette), approx. 89kg
1.4 Detailed Specifications
1.4.1 Interface Specifications

0023-2577
a. USB (standard)
(1) Interface type
USB 2.0 Hi-Speed (Full speed (12 Mbits/sec), High speed (480 Mbits/sec))
(2) Data transfer system
Control transfer
Bulk transfer
(3) Signal level
Compliant with the USB standard.
(4) Interface cable
Twisted-pair shielded cable, 5.0 m max.
Compliant with the USB standard.
Wire materials: AWG No.28, data wire pair (AWF: American Wire Gauge)
AWG No.20 to No.28, power distribution wire pair
(5) Interface connector
Printer side: Series B receptacle compliant with USB standard
1-11
Chapter 1
Cable side: Series B plug compliant with USB standard
b. Network (standard)
(1) Interface type
Interface compliant with IEEE802.3
(2) Data transfer system
IEEE802.0 10Base-T, IEEE802.3u 100Base-TX/Auto-Negotiation, IEEE802.3ab 1000Base-T/Auto-Negotiation, IEEE802.3x Full Duplex
(3) Interface cable
Category 5 (UTP or FTP) cable, 100 m or shorter
Compliant with ANSI/EIA/TIA-568A or ANSI/EIA/TIA-568B
(4) Interface connector
Printer side: Compliant with IEEE802.3, ANSI X3.263, ISO/IEC60603-7
(5) Protocol
IPX/SPX (Netware4.2(J), 5.1(J), 6.0(J)), SNMP, TCP/IP(IPv4/IPv6), AppleTalk, HTTP
1-12
Chapter 1
1.5 Names and Functions of Components
1.5.1 Front
0023-5230
[3] [14] [15] [1] [2] [3] [4]
[6]
[5]
[13]
[6]
[16]
[7]
[9] [8]
[12] [11] [10]

F-1-28
[1] Roll media cover
Open this cover, and then load roll media.
[2] Media loading slot
Insert media in this slot to load it.
[3] Roll media temporary table
When loading roll media, place the roll holder here and then insert the media in the roll holder slot.
[4] Release lever
When releasing the paper retainer, press this lever backward.
[5] Operation panel
Use this panel to operate the printer or check the printer status.
[6] Ink tank cover
Open this cover to replace the ink tank.
[7] Media alignment line
This orange line is used to align media.
[8] Maintenance cartridge cover
Open this cover to replace the maintenance cartridge.
[9] Maintenance cartridge
This cartridge absorbs the ink used for maintenance. (Replace it when it becomes full of ink.)
[10] Cutter unit
This cutter with a round blade is used to cut roll media automatically.
[11] Cutter rail
The cutter unit moves on this rail to cut media.
[12] Paper eject slot
All printouts are ejected from this slot.
[13] Output guide
A printout is ejected along this guide.
[14] Upper cover
Open this cover to install the printhead or remove the media jammed inside the printer.
[15] Width guide
When loading cassette paper, move this guide according to the paper size.
[16] Stand
Install the printer on this stand. This stand has casters for easy relocation.
1-13
Chapter 1
1.5.2 Side
0023-5231
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4] [4]
F-1-29
[1] Manual pocket
Store the printer manual in this pocket.
[2] Ethernet connector
Connect the Ethernet cable to this connector. The lamp lights when the Ethernet cable is connected properly and the printer is ready to communicate
accordingly.
[3] USB port
Connect the USB cable to this port. This port is compatible with the high-speed USB.
[4] Carrying handles
Three carrying handles provided at the left, right, and back allows three persons to carry the printer.
[5] Power receptacle
Plug the power cord into this receptacle.
1-14
Chapter 1
1.5.3 Top Cover (Inside)

0023-5232
[7]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
F-1-30
[1] Carriage
The carriage moves the printhead. It is an important component used for printing.
[2] Carriage shaft
The carriage moves on this shaft.
[3] Paper retainer
This is an important component used to feed paper. It retains paper.
[4] Platen
The printhead moves on this component to perform printing. Suction holes are provided on the platen surface to prevent media from floating.
[5] Borderless printing ink catch groove
Ink flowed out of the paper edges enter in this groove during borderless printing.
[6] Linear scale
This is an important component used to detect the carriage position. Never touch it when cleaning the parts or removing jammed media inside the
upper cover.
[7] Cleaner brush
Use this brush to remove paper dust off the platen when cleaning the parts inside the upper cover.
1-15
Chapter 1
1.5.4 Roll Unit Cover (Inside)

0023-5233
[3] [4] [4] [3]
[1] [2]
F-1-31
[1] Roll holder
Load roll media in this holder.
[2] Holder stopper
Use this part to secure roll media to the roll holder.
[3] Slide guide
Move the roll holder along this guide.
[4] Roll holder slot
Fit the roll holder in this slot.
1.5.5 Carriage
0023-1267
[4] [1]
[3] [2]
F-1-32
[1] Slant adjusting lever
This lever is used to fine adjust slant of rules lines.
[2] Printhead
The printhead has nozzles. It is an important component used to perform printing.
[3] Printhead fixer lever
This lever is used to lock the printhead fixer cover.
[4] Printhead fixer cover
This cover is used to secure the printhead.
1-16
Chapter 1
1.5.6 Ink Tank Cover (Inside)

0023-1268
[Left Ink Tank Unit]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
F-1-33
[Right Ink Tank Unit]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
F-1-34
[1] Ink tank lock lever
This lever is used to protect and lock the ink tank. Open/close this lever when replacing the ink tank.
[2] Ink color label
Load each ink tank according to the label color and name.
[3] Ink tank lamp (red)
When the ink tank is opened, the ink tank lamp illuminates as follows:
- Stays lit
The ink tank is loaded properly.
- Not lit
No ink tank is loaded or the remaining ink detection function is disabled.
- Blinking slow
Only a small amount of ink remains in the ink tank.
- Blinking fast
No ink remains in the ink tank.
[4] Ink tank
This is a cartridge containing ink of each color.
1-17
Chapter 1
1.5.7 Stand (ST-26)

0023-5234
[5]
[4]
OFF
[1] [2]
ON
[3]
F-1-35
[1] Accessory pocket
Store the printer accessories.
[2] Output stacker
Ejected printouts are collected in this output stacker.
[3] Lockable caster
This caster can be locked.
When relocating the printer, be sure to unlock all four casters. Moving the printer with the casters locked can damage the floor.
[4] Switching stopper
Pull out this stopper when using the output stacker at the extended position.
[5] Paper guide
This guide is used to lead the ejected printout to the output stacker.
1-18
Chapter 1
1.5.8 Stand (ST-27)

0027-2235
[2]
[6] [5]
[1]
[7] [4]
[3]
[8]
OFF
ON
F-1-36
[1] Accessory pocket
Store the printer accessories.
[2] Output stacker
Ejected printouts are collected in this output stacker.
[3] Lockable caster
This caster can be locked.
When relocating the printer, be sure to unlock all four casters. Moving the printer with the casters locked can damage the floor.
[4] Switching stopper
Pull out depending on the paper size when using the output stacker in the extended position A.
[5] Paper guide
This guide is used to lead the ejected printout to the output stacker.
[6] Output stacker handle
This handle is grasped and supports the sliding output stacker when putting the output stacker into extended position B and returning it to the regular
position.
[7] Output stacker release lever
Pull this lever towards you to release extended position B.
[8] Output stacker ejection guide
This guide supports the paper that is output when using the output stacker in extended position B.
1-19
Chapter 1
1.6 Basic Operation
1.6.1 Operation Panel

0031-2510
This section explains the functions of the buttons and the meanings of the LEDs on the operation panel.
[1]
[15]
Data [2]
[14]
Message
[13] [3]
[12]
Load Feed Cut Power [4]
[11]
Menu Stop
[5]
[10] Back OK Navigate
[6]
[9]
[8] [7]
F-1-37
[1] Display
Printer menus, statuses, and messages are shown on this display.
[2] Data reception lamp (green)
- Blinking: When the printer is making prints, this lamp indicates that a print job is being received or processed. When the printer is not making prints, this lamp
indicates that the print job is suspended or the firmware data is being received.
- Not lit: This lamp indicates that there is no print job.
[3] Message lamp (orange)
- Stays lit: A warning message is being displayed.
- Blinking: An error message is being displayed.
- Not lit: The printer is normal or not powered.
[4] [Power] button (green)
Use this button to turn on or off the printer.
When the printer is powered or in the sleep mode, the [Power] button lamp stays lit.
[5] [Stop] button
Use this button to stop execution of a job or drying ink.
[6] [Navi] button
Use this key to confirm the procedures for loading/unloading media, replacing an ink tank, and replacing the printhead.
[7] Direction buttons
- button: Pressing this button on the [tab selection screen] moves the tab. When a menu requiring you to enter a value is selected, pressing this button allows
you to move to the left-hand digit.
- button: Pressing this button in a menu displays the upper item or setting value.
- button: Pressing this button on the [tab selection screen] moves the tab. When a menu requiring you to enter a value is selected, pressing this button allows
you to move to the right-hand digit.
- button: Pressing this button in a menu displays the lower item or setting value.
[8] [OK] button
Pressing this button on the [tab selection screen] displays the menu for the displayed tab.
In the menu for a tab, pressing this button at the item preceded by [+] allows you to move to the bottom layer of menu items, where you can execute a menu item
or set values. Also press this button when a message asking you to press the [OK] button is shown on the display.
[9] [Back] button
Pressing this button displays the preceding screen.
[10] [Menu] button
Pressing this button displays the [tab selection screen] screen.
[11] [Media Change] button
Press this button when loading/replacing media.
[12] [Media Feed] button
When roll media is loaded, pressing this button allows you to change the media position.
[13] [Media Cut] button
When roll media is loaded, pressing this button cuts the media.
[14] [Cut Sheet] lamp (green)
This lamp stays lit when cut sheet is selected as a media type.
[15] [Roll Media] lamp (green)
This lamp stays lit when roll media is selected as a media type.
MEMO:
When the printer is in the sleep mode, pressing any button other than the [Power] button wakes up the printer.
1-20
Chapter 1
1.6.2 Display
0023-1271
When the printer starts, the [tab selection screen] appears on the display.
There are four types of tabs on which the relevant printer status, menu, and error information are displayed.
The tab appears as the icon to the top field of display. The tab moves by key or key.
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[A]
[B]
[C]
F-1-38
[1] Media tab
This tab shows the printer status and menu related to media. When this tab is shown in reverse video, pressing the [OK] button displays the [Media] menu.
-[A] Top field of display: Shows the media icon in reverse video.
-[B] Middle field of display: Shows the printer status and a menu name.
-[C] Bottom field of display: Shows the media type in the first row and the media size in the second row.
[2] Ink tab

This tab shows the printer status and menu related to ink. When this tab is shown in reverse video, pressing the [OK] button displays the [Ink] menu.
-[A] Top field of display: Shows the ink icon in reverse video.
-[C] Bottom field of display: Shows the remaining ink levels of the ink tanks loaded in the printer.
[3] Job tab

This tab shows the printer status and menu related to the print job. When this tab is shown in reverse video, pressing the [OK] button displays the [Job] menu.
-[A] Top field of display: Shows the job icon in reverse video.
[4] Setup/Adjustment tab
This tab shows the printer status and menu related to setup/adjustment. When this tab is shown in reverse video, pressing the [OK] button displays the [Setup/
Adjustment] menu.
-[A] Top field of display: Shows the setup/adjustment icon in reverse video.
-[C] Bottom field of display: Shows the remaining ink level of the maintenance cartridge.
1-21
Chapter 1
1.6.3 Menu
0032-0488
The printer has a Main menu which includes a menu related to maintenance such as adjustment of ink ejection position of each nozzle and head cleaning, a menu
related to printing settings such as auto cutting and ink drying time, and a menu related to parameters such as a message language.
1. Menu Operation
a) Displaying menu on each tab
Press the key or key on the [Tab Selection] screen to select a tab, and press the [OK] key.
A menu associated with each tab is displayed.
Press the key or key to select a menu and press the [OK] key.
The menu is selected and menu items are displayed.
Select a menu with [+] on the left side and press the [OK] key to navigate to lower level menus.
b) Setting menu items

Press the key or key to select an item to set and press the [OK] key.
The item is checked on the left side check box to confirm that it is set.
After 2 seconds, the menu that is one level above is displayed.
c) Setting numeric value for a menu item
Proceed as follows to set a numeric value for an item such as network settings.
1. Press the key or key to move the underscore to the field you want to enter a numeric value.
2. Press the key or key to enter a numeric value.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 and press the [OK] key when finished.
1-22
Chapter 1
2. Main Menu
The structure and settings of the main menu is as follows. The asterisk mark "*" is default setting.
[Paper Menu]
First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
[Load Paper] [Roll Paper]
[Cut Sheet]
[Eject Paper]
[Chg. Paper Type] [Roll Paper] (The paper type is displayed
here.)
[Cut Sheet] (The paper type is displayed
here.)
[Chg. Paper Size] [Cut Sheet Size] (The size of paper is
displayed here.)
[CustomPaperSize] (Set the length)
[Roll Length]*1 (Set the length)
[ManageRemainRoll] [Off]*
[On]
[Pap. Detail Set] (The paper type is displayed [Head Height] [Automatic]*
here.) [Highest]
[High]
[Standard]
[Low]
[Lowest]
[Crooked Chk Lv.] [High Accuracy]
[Standard]*
[Loose]
[Off]
[Cutting Mode] [Automatic]
[Eject]*
[Manual]
[Cut Speed] [Fast]
[Standard]
[Slow]*
[Trim Edge First] [Automatic]*
[Off]
[On (Preset Len)]
[On (Input Length)]
[Manual]
[CutDustReduct.] [Off]*
[On]
[VacuumStrngth] [Automatic]*
[Strongest]
[Strong]
[Standard]
[Weak]
[Weakest]
1-23
Chapter 1
[Paper Details] (The paper type is displayed [Scan Wait Time] [Dry time] [Off]*
here.) [1 sec.]
[3 sec.]
[5 sec.]
[7 sec.]
[9 sec.]
[Area]*16 [Entire area]*
[Leading edge]
[Roll DryingTime] [Off]*
[30 sec.]
[1 min.]
[3 min.]
[5 min.]
[10 min.]
[30 min.]
[60 min.]
[NearEnd RollMrgn] [3mm]*
[20mm]
[NearEnd Sht Mrgn] [3mm]*
[20mm]
[BordlessOversize] [Standard]*
[Reduced]
[Width Detection] [Off]
[On]*
[Return Defaults]
[Pap. Detail Print]
[Keep Paper Type] [Off]*
[On]
1-24
Chapter 1
[Ink Menu]
[Rep. Ink Tank]
[Head Cleaning A]
[Job Menu]
[Print Job]*14 (Job List is displayed here.) (Select Print Job.) [Delete]
[Preempt Jobs]*3
[Stored Job]*14 (Mailbox List is displayed (Enter a password if one has [Job List] [Print]
here.) been set.) [Delete]
[Print Job List]
[Job Log] (Choose from information [Document Name]
about the latest three print [User Name]
jobs.)
[Page Count]
[Job Status] [OK]
[CANCELED]
[Print Start Time] [yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss]
[Print End Time] [yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss]
[Print Time] [xxxsec.]
[Output Img. Size] (The image size is
displayed)
[Media Type]
[Paper Consumed]
[Paper Length]
[Paper Width]
[Interface] [USB]
[Network]
[Ink Consumed] (Indicates the ink color.) [xxx.xxx ml]
[Print settings]
[Head Height]
[Temp./Humidity]
[Adjustment reg.]
[Print Job Log]
[Pause Print] [Off]*
[On]
1-25
Chapter 1
[Set./Adj. Menu]
[Test Print] [Nozzle Check]
[Status Print]
[Interface Print]
[GL2 Set Print]
[Pap. Detail Print]
[Print Job Log]
[Menu Map]
[Color Palette]
[Adjust Printer] [Head Posi. Adj.] [Auto(Standard)]
[Auto(Advanced)]
[Manual]*4
[Head Inc. Adj.]
[Feed Priority] [Adj. Priority] [Automatic]*
[Print Quality]
[Print Length]
[Adj. Quality]*5 [Auto(GenuinePpr)]
[Auto(OtherPaper)]
[Manual]
[Adjust Length]*6 [AdjustmentPrint] [A:High]
[B:Standard/Draft]
[Change Settings] [A:High]
[B:Standard/Draft]
[Maintenance] [Head Cleaning] [Head Cleaning A]
[Head Cleaning B]
[Nozzle Check]
[Replace P.head]
[Repl. maint cart]
[Head Info] The "ProductName" and "s/
n" and "Days elapsed" and
"Count [Mdot]" are
displayed here.
[GL2 Replot]
[GL2 Buffer Clear]
1-26
Chapter 1
First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level Sixth Level
[GL2 Settings] [Quality Manager] [Color Mode] [Monochrome]
[Color (CAD) 1]*
[Color (CAD) 2]
[Color (CAD) 3]
[Color (CAD) 4]
[Color (CAD) 5]
[Print Quality] [Draft]
[Standard]*
[High]
[Input Resolution] [600dpi]*
[300dpi]
[Print (Economy)] [Off]*
[On]
[Paper Manager] [Paper Source] [Automatic]*
[Roll Paper]
[Cut Sheet]
[Margin] [3mm(Standard)]*
[5mm]
[Oversize] [Off]
[On]*
[Conserve Paper] [Off]*
[On]
[Auto Rotate] [Off]*
[On]
[Enlarge/Reduce] [Off]*
[Specify scaling]
[Fit to paper]
[Print centered] [Off]*
[On]
[Standard cut] [Off]*
[On]
[Nesting]*14 [Use Nesting] [Off]*
[On]
[Nesting WaitTime]*7 [xx min.]
[Cut Lines]*7 [Off]*
[On]
1-27
Chapter 1
[GL2 Settings] [Line&Pen Manager] [Enable merge] [Off]*
[On]
[Pen Setup] [Select Palette] [Software]*
[Palette A]
[Palette B]
[Factory]
[Define Palette] [Palette A] [Width]
(Choose a pen number.) (Indicates the Width value.)
[Color]
0-255
[Line Attributes]-[No
Setting]/[Circle Setting]
[Palette B] (Specify the values of
(Choose a pen number.) Width, Color, and Line
(Indicates Width, Color, and Attributes.)
Line Attributes.)
[Factory]
(Choose a pen number.)
(Indicates Width, Color, and
Line Attributes.)
[Reset Palette] [All Palette]
[Palette A]
[Palette B]
[Smoothing] [Software]*
[Smooth]
[ThickenFineLines] [Off]*
[On]
[AdjustFaintLines] [Off]
[On]*
[Ln Wdth correct] [Black/gray] (Set the correcting value of
line width.)
[Color] (Set the correcting value of
line width.)
[ProcessingOption] [Warning] [Off]*
[On]
[On-the-Fly]*14 [Off]*
[On]
[Detect img size] [Off]*
[Command priority]
[Detected size]
[GL2 Set Print]
1-28
Chapter 1
Seventh
Level
[Interface Setup] [EOP Timer]*12 [10 sec.]
[30 sec.]
[1 min.]
[2 min.]
[5 min.]
[10 min.]*
[30 min.]
[60 min.]
[TCP/IP]*12 [IPv4] [IPv4 Mode] [Automatic]
[Manual]*
[Protocol]*8 [DHCP] [On]*
[Off]
[BOOTP] [On]
[Off]*
[RARP] [On]
[Off]*
[IPv4 Settings]*13 [IP Address] (Set the Address.)
[Subnet Mask] (Set the Address.)
[Default G/W] (Set the Address.)
[DNS Settings]*13 [DNS Dync update] [On]
[Off]*
[Pri. DNS SrvAddr] (Set the Address.)
[Sec. DNS SrvAddr] (Set the Address.)
[DNS Host Name] (Set the DNS host
name.)
[DNS Domain Name] (Set the DNS domain
name.)
[IPv6] [IPv6 Support] [Supported]
[Not Supported]*
[IPv6 StlessAddrs]*17 [Use]*
[Do Not Use]
[DHCPv6]*17 [Use]
[Do Not Use]*
[DNS Settings]*13*17 [DNS Dync update] [Statefull Addr] [On]
(Choose whether if [Off]*
using the DNS Settings
of IPv4.) [Stateless Addr] [On]
[Off]*
[Pri. DNS SrvAddr] (Set the Address.)
[Sec. DNS SrvAddr] (Set the Address.)
[DNS Host Name] (Set the DNS host
name.)
[DNS Domain Name] (Set the DNS domain
name.)
1-29
Chapter 1
[Interface Setup] [Ethernet Driver]*12 [Auto Detect] [On]*
[Off]
[Comm.Mode]*10 [Half Duplex]*
[Full Duplex]
[Ethernet Type]*10 [10Base-T]*
[100Base-TX]
[1000Base-T]
[Spanning Tree] [Not Use]*
[Use]
[MAC Address] (The MAC address is
displayed here.)
[Interface Print]*12
[Return Defaults]*12
[System Setup] [Sleep Timer] [5 min.]*
[10 min.]
[15 min.]
[20 min.]
[30 min.]
[40 min.]
[50 min.]
[60 min.]
[210 min.]
[Shut Down Timer] [Off]
[5 min.]
[10 min]
[30 min]
[1 hour]
[4 hours]
[8 hours]*
[12 hours]
[Buzzer] [Off]
[On]*
[Contrast Adj.] -4,-3,-2,-1,0*,+1,+2,+3,+4
[Date & Time]*12 [Date] [yyyy/mm/dd]*11
[Time] [hh:mm]
[Date Format] [yyyy/mm/dd]*
[dd/mm/yyyy]
[mm/dd/yyyy]
[Language] [English]
[Japanese]
[Francais]
[Italiano]
[Deutsch]
[Espanol]
[Portuguese]
[Russian]
[Chinese] (simplified)
[Korean]
1-30
Chapter 1
[System Setup] [Time Zone]*12 [0:London(GMT)]
[+1:Paris,Rome]
[+2:Athens,Cairo]
[+3:Moscow]
[+4:Eerevan,Baku]
[+5:Islamabad]
[+6:Dacca]
[+7:Bangkok]
[+8:Hong Kong]
[+9:Tokyo,Seoul]
[+10:Canberra]
[+11NewCaledonia]
[+12:Wellington]
[-12:Eniwetok]
[-11:Midway is.]
[-10Hawaii(AHST)]
[-9:Alaska(AKST)]
[-8:Oregon (PST)]
[-7:Arizona(MST)]
[-6:Texas(CST)]
[-5:NewYork(EST)]
[-4:Santiago]
[-3:Buenos Aires]
[-2:CenterAtlantic]
[-1:Cape Verde]
[Length Unit] [meter]*
[feet/inch]
[Detect Mismatch] [Pause]
[Warning]
[None]*
[Paper Size Basis] [Roll Selection 1] [ISO A3 (297mm)]*
[300mm Roll]
[Roll Selection 2] [10in. (254mm)]*
[JIS B4 (257mm)]
[Keep Paper Size] [Off]*
[On]
[TrimEdge Reload] [Automatic]
[Off]*
[On]
[Rep.P.head Print] [Off]
[On]*
1-31
Chapter 1
[System Setup] [Nozzle Check] [Frequency] [Standard]*
[1 page]
[10 pages]
[Off]
[Warning] [Off]*
[On]
[Use USB]*12 [Use]*
[Do Not Use]
[Use Ethernet]*12 [Use]*
[Do Not Use]
[Use RemoteUI]*12 [Use]*
[Do Not Use]
[Reset PaprSetngs]*12
[Show Job Log]*12 [Off]
[On]*
[Prep.MovePrinter]
[Admin. Menu]*12 [Chg.Admin.Pswd]*13 (The screen for setting the
password is displayed)
[Init.Admin.Pswd]*13
[Printer Info] [Paper Info]
[Ink Info]
[Head Info]
[System Info]
[Error Log]
[Use Situation] [Tot. Print Area]
[Duty Counter]
*1: Available only if ManageRemainRoll is On.

*2: Available only if Width Detection is set to Off.
*3: Print Anyway is displayed when a job being held is selected.
*4: Available after Auto(Advanced) in Head Posi. Adj. has been used once.
*5: Available when you have specified Feed Priority > Adj. Priority > Automatic or Print Quality.
*6: Available when you have specified Feed Priority > Adj. Priority > Automatic or Print Length.
*7: Available only if Use Nesting is set to On.
*8: Not shown if you have set IPv4 Mode to Manual.
*10: Not shown if you have set Auto Detect to On.
*11: Follows the setting in Date Format.
*12: Viewing and configuration is possible for administrators, and only viewing for other users.
*13: Viewing and configuration is possible for administrators only.
*16: Leading edge is not available as a setting option in the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box of the printer driver.
*17: Not displayed if IPv6 Support is Not Supported.
1-32
Chapter 1
3. Main menu during printing

The structure of the main menu during printing is as follows.
[Adj. Fine Feed]
[Printer Info] [Paper Info]
[Ink Info]
[Head Info]
[System Info]
[Error Log]
[Other Counter]
1-33
Chapter 1
4. Main Menu Settings

Main menu items are described in the following tables.
[Paper Menu]
Setting Item Description/Instructions

[Load Paper] Select and load either cut sheet or roll media.
[Eject Paper] Remove currently loaded paper.
[Chg. Paper Type] Change currently set paper type.
[Chg. Paper Size] Change currently set paper size.
[ManageRemainRoll] Choose On to print a barcode at the end of a roll before you remove it. The printed barcode can
be used in managing the amount of roll paper left. ChooseOff if you prefer not to print the
barcode.
[Pap. Detail Set] [Head Height] Adjust the Printhead height.
(The paper type is displayed [Crooked Chk Lv.] If you print on the paper that has an irregular width, choose Loose for a higher skew detection
here.) threshold, or choose Off to disable skew detection. However, if paper is loaded askew when
detection is Off, note that paper jams or Platen soiling may occur.
[Cutting Mode] Select whether to use standard round blade cutter or not.
Select [Automatic] to cut paper after printing. Select [Manual] to print a line at the cut position
after printing without cutting. Select [Eject] to prevent the printout from dropping until the ink
dries after printing.
[Cut Speed] Choose the cutting speed. If you use adhesive paper, choosing Slow helps prevent adhesive
from sticking to the cutter and keeps the cutter sharp.
[Trim Edge First] If a roll is loaded, the end of the paper will be cut.
[CutDustReduct.] Choose On to reduce the amount of debris generated when cutting film and similar media by
printing a line at the cut position. This option reduces the amount of debris given off after
cutting. It also helps prevent adhesive from sticking to the cutter and keeps the cutter sharp if
you use adhesive paper.
[VacuumStrngth] Specify the level of suction that holds paper against the Platen.
[Scan Wait Time] Specify the time to wait for the ink to dry between each scan in bidirectional printing, in
consideration of how quickly the ink dries. Note that printing will take longer if you specify a
wait time.
[Roll DryingTime] Specify the time to wait for the ink to dry for each sheet.
[NearEnd RollMrgn] Specify the minimum margin at the leading edge of roll paper to ensure better printing quality
at the leading edge.
Note that if you choose 3mm, it may lower the printing quality at the leading edge and affect
feeding accuracy. The printed surface may be scratched, and ink may adhere to the leading
edge. It may also cause the Platen to become soiled.
[NearEnd Sht Mrgn] Specify a margin at the leading edge of sheets to ensure better printing quality at the leading
edge.
Note that if you choose 3mm, it may lower the printing quality at the leading edge and affect
feeding accuracy. The printed surface may be scratched, and ink may adhere to the leading
edge.
[BordlessOversize] Select the margin during borderless printing.
[Width Detection] Set to print from desired position such as when printing inside a frame.
Select [Off] to disable paper width and skew detection. If paper is loaded askew, paper may jam
or platen soiling may occur.
[Return Defaults] Choose OK to restore Paper Details to the factory default values.
[Pap. Detail Print] Print the paper settings set with [Paper Details].
[Keep Paper Type] Select [On] to continue using the same type of paper.
1-34
Chapter 1
[Ink Menu]

[Rep. Ink Tank] When replacing the Ink Tank, choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen.
[Head Cleaning A] Specify Printhead cleaning options.
Execute Head Cleaning A if printing is faint, oddly colored, or contains foreign substances.
[Job Menu]

[Print Job] [Job List] (Select Print [Delete] Delete the current job or queued jobs.
Job.) [Preempt Jobs] Print the job first after the current print job is finished printing.
[Stored Job] [Mailbox List] (Enter a [Job List]- Print a saved job.
password if [Print]
one has been [Job List]- Delete a saved job.
set.) [Delete]
[Print Job List] Print a list of saved jobs.
[Job Log] (Choose from [Document Name] Display the name of the document in the most recently printed job.
information [User Name] Display the name of the user who has transmitted the job.
about the latest
three print [Page Count] Display the number of sheets of the job.
jobs.) [Job Status] Display the result of processing of the job.
[Print Start Time] Display the time at which the job started printing.
[Print End Time] Display the time at which the job finished printing.
[Print Time] Display the time spent printing the job.
[Output Img. Size] Display the image size in the print job.
[Media Type] Display the type of the paper used for printing the job.
[Paper Consumed] Display the consumption of paper.
[Paper Length] Display the length of paper.
[Paper Width] Display the width of paper.
[Interface] Display the interface of the job.
[Ink Consumed] Display the amount of ink consumed for printing the job.
[Print Settings] Display the job print settings.
[Head Height] Display the head height when jobs were printed.
[Temp./Humidity] Display the temperature and humidity when jobs were printed.
[Adjustment reg.] Display the adjustment conditions applied to jobs.
[Print Job Log] Print the print job information such as paper type, size, and ink consumption. Ink consumption
is the approximate amount of ink used to print one sheet.
[Pause Print] Select [On] to stop printing.
1-35
Chapter 1
[Set./Adj. Menu]

[Test Print] [Nozzle Check] Print a nozzle check pattern.
[Status Print] Print the printer information.
[Interface Print] Print the interface settings.
[GL2 Set Print] Print the GL2 settings.
[Pap. Detail Print] Print the paper settings set with [Paper Details].
[Print Job Log] Print print job information such as paper type, size, and ink consumption. Ink consumption is
the approximate amount of ink used to print one sheet.
[Menu Map] Print the menu list.
[Color Palette] Print the GL2 color list.
[Adjust [Head Posi. [Auto(Standard)] Print and read a test pattern for the automatic adjustment of Printhead alignment relative to the
Printer] Adj.] printing direction.
[Auto(Advanced)] Print and read a test pattern for the automatic adjustment of Printhead alignment relative to the
nozzle and printing direction.
[Manual] Print a test pattern for adjustment of Printhead alignment relative to the printing direction. Enter
the adjustment value manually based on the resulting pattern.
[Head Inc. Adj.] Print an adjustment pattern for adjusting the inclination of the printhead.
[Feed Priority] [Adj. Priority] [Automatic] Set the priority feed precision. Normally select [Automatic]. Select [Print Quality] to print at
[Print Quality] high quality. Select [Print Quality] to reduce horizontal streaks. Select [Print Length] to
accurately control the feed amount. However, selecting [Print Length] may cause colors to
[Print Length] become slightly uneven in the carriage scan direction.
[Adj. Quality] [Auto(Genuin Set when using paper described in the paper reference guide.
ePpr)] A pattern to adjust the paper feed amount is printed, and the feed amount is automatically
adjusted from the printed result.
[Auto(OtherPa Set when using paper not described in the paper reference guide.
per)] A pattern to adjust the paper feed amount is printed, and the feed amount is automatically
adjusted from the printed result.
This takes longer than [Auto (GenuinePpr)] to print and consumes more ink.
[Manual] Select for paper that cannot be adjusted by [Auto(GenuinePpr)] or [Auto(OtherPaper)], such as
highly transparent paper.
Print a pattern to adjust the paper feed amount according to the type of paper.
[Adjust [AdjustmentPr Print a test pattern for adjustment relative to paper stretching or shrinkage, after which you can
Length] int]-[A:High]/ enter the amount of adjustment.
[B:Standard/
Draft]
[Change Display when [Print Length] is selected as [Adj. Priority] for [Feed Priority].
Settings]- Adjust the expansion rate of the currently loaded paper.
[A:High]/ Enter the result adjusted with [AdjustmentPrint] or the difference with your own measurement
[B:Standard/ in %.
Draft] Increase the adjustment value to increase the feed amount for paper that tends to expand, and
reduce it for paper that tends to shrink.
[Maintenance] [Head Cleaning] Specify Printhead cleaning options.
Choose Head Cleaning A if printing is faint, oddly colored, or contains foreign substances.
Choose Head Cleaning B if no ink is printed at all, or if printing is not improved by Head
Cleaning A.
[Nozzle Check] Print a nozzle check pattern.
[Replace P.head] Not displayed during a warning message that the remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity is
low.
When replacing the Printhead, choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen.
[Repl. maint cart] When exchanging the maintenance cartridge, choose Yes and follow the instructions on the
screen.
[Head Info] Display the Printhead informations.
[GL2 Replot] Print again the last data printed on the GL2.
[GL2 Buffer Clear] Delete the print data of the replot buffer.
1-36
Chapter 1

[GL2 Settings] [Quality [Color Mode] [Monochrome Print by the monochrome.
Manager] ]
[Color (CAD) Print by the standard color.
1]
[Color (CAD) Print by the bright color.
2]
[Color (CAD) Print by the color emulated the Canon iPF500/iPF600/iPF700/iPF510/iPF610/iPF710/iPF605/
3] iPF720/iPF810/iPF820.
[Color (CAD) Print by the color emulated the HP Designjet 500/800.
4]
[Color (CAD) Print by the color emulated the HP Designjet 1000.
5]
[Print Quality] Select the print quality.
[Input Resolution] Choose the printer input resolution from between [600dpi] and [300dpi].
[Print (Economy)] Print with a lower grade of print than normal, but with less ink consumption. Select [ON] to
economize on inks.
[Paper [Paper Source] Select how to feed paper for printing on the HP-GL/2.
Manager] [Margin] Set the top/bottom and left/right margins of the paper. For cut-sheet, the trailing edge margin is
23mm.
However, if the leading edge margin is set with [Paper Details], that value has priority.
[Oversize] Set the positions of the margins.
Select [On] to adds the margins to the outer edge of the rendering region set by the [Detect img
size] function. (This corresponds to the case where the [PaperSizeProcess 1] function in the old
menu is set to Off)
Select [Off] to sets the margins inside the rendering region taking the size set by the [Detect
img size] function as the rendering region. Areas that overlap with the margin are not printed.
(This corresponds to the case where the [PageSizeProcess 1] function in the old menu is set to
On)
[Conserve Paper] Print by economizing on paper.
[Auto Rotate] If a document has its long side shorter than the roll width, the page rotates by 90 degrees
automatically to economize on paper. If a document contains horizontally long data such that
it has its long side longer than the roll width and its short side shorter than the roll width, the
page rotates 90 degrees to print within the boundaries of the paper.
HP RTL cannot rotate.
In case of HP RTL image, the image may be truncated or a blank paper may be ejected because
the image cannot be rotated even if the paper size is rotated by 90 degrees. In that case, set [Auto
Rotate] to [Off].
[Enlarge/Reduce] Set the enlargement or reduction.
Select [Off] to enlargement and reduction are not executed.
Select [Specify scaling] to prints at the specified magnification. You can specify the
magnification in the range of 25 to 400%.
Select [Fit to paper] to print at enlargement or reduction ratio to fit the paper size.
[Print centered] Set the printing position on the paper.
Select [On] when printing on roll paper, prints in the center of the width of the roll paper. When
printing on cut paper, prints in the center of the paper.
Select [Off] to print at the top left of the paper.
[Standard cut] Select [On] to print depending on the standard paper size.
[Nesting] [Use Nesting] Select [On] to print pages when they are tiled fully to the roll width, instead of printing them
one by one.
[Nesting Set the time to elapse before printing.
WaitTime]
[Cut Lines] Select [On] to print perforated lines between pages.
1-37
Chapter 1

[GL2 Settings] [Line&Pen [Enable merge] When lines overlap, set whether to merge or overwrite the colors of the overlapping lines.
Manager] Select [Off] to overwrite with the line printed later. Select [On] to merge all overlapping colors.
[Pen Setup] [Select Select the value related to pen from [Software], [Palette A], [Palette B], or [Factory].
Palette] Select [Software] to print according to the application side instruction. Select [Palette A] or
[Palette B] to print with value set by [Define Palette].
[Define Set [Width], [Color], and [Line Attributes] for the palette's [Pen Number]. Select [Factory] to
Palette] check the value when [Factory] is selected for [Select Palette].
For [Line Attributes], select the shape of line end and joint between lines as [No Setting] or
[Circle Setting].
[Reset Palette] Return the [Define Palette] settings to factory settings.
[Smoothing] Choose whether to draw an arc with a smooth curve or with a polygon.
[ThickenFineLines] Select [On] to print thin lines clearly.
[AdjustFaintLines] If thin lines print in a tint of color varied from other patterns, selecting [Off] may provide the
print result as intended, though the thin lines may print, interrupted, depending on the color.
[Ln Wdth correct] Correct the width of lines. (The basic line width is set using the [Pen Setup] funstion)
Select [Black/gray] to correct the width of lines whrere all of the RGB values are the same
(except when R=G=B=255). The setting value can be set in the range of -20 to +20, with the
setting value given in units of correction of 0.025mm. When set to -20, lines become 0.5mm
thinner, and when set to +20, lines become 0.5mm thicker.
Select [Color] to correct the width of lines that are not [Black/gray]. The setting value can be
set in the range of -20 to +20 with the setting value given in units of correction of 0.025mm.
When set to -20 lines become 0.5mm thinner, and when set to +20 lines become 0.5mm thicker
[Detect img size] Set the method for selecting the rendering region.
Select [Off] to use the value from the PS command in the input data. If there are no PS
commands, prints using the maximum size (maximum roll paper width X (maximum roll paper
width X 1.5)). This reduces the printing time compared with the cases whrere [Command
priority] or [Detected size] are set because the data analysis finishes in a shorter period of time.
[ProcessingOp [Warning] Select [On] to display warnings during GL2.
tion] [On-the-Fly] In printing data consisting solely of HP RTL, if the data is slow to print, select [On] to expedite
the time at which the data starts printing. Verify the print result to make sure that images are
not chipped in this case.
[GL2 Set Print] Print the GL2 settings.
1-38
Chapter 1

[Interface [EOP Timer] Specify the timeout period before cancellation of print jobs that cannot be
Setup] received by the printer.
[TCP/IP] [IPv4] [IPv4 Mode] Choose whether the printer IP address is configured automatically or a static IP
address is entered manually.
[Protocol] [DHCP]/ Specify the protocol used to configure the IP address automatically.
[BOOTP]/
[RARP]
[IPv4 Settings] [IP Address]/ Specify the printer network information when using a static IP address.
[Subnet Mask]/ Enter the IP address assigned to the printer, as well as the network subnet mask
[Default G/W] and default gateway.
[DNS Settings] [DNS Dync Specify whether DNS server registration is updated automatically.
update]
[Pri. DNS Specify the DNS server address.
SrvAddr]/[Sec.
DNS SrvAddr]
[DNS Host Specify the DNS host name.
Name]
[DNS Domain Specify the DNS domain name.
Name]
[IPv6] [IPv6 Support] Set whether to support IPv6 connection.
[IPv6 StlessAddrs] Set whether to use IPv6 stateless address.
[DHCPv6] Set whether to use DHCPv6 setting.
[DNS Settings] [DNS Dync Specify whether DNS server registration is updated automatically.
update]-[Statefull
Addr]/[Stateless
Addr]
[Pri. DNS Specify the DNS server address.
SrvAddr]/[Sec.
DNS SrvAddr]
[DNS Host Specify the DNS host name.
Name]
[DNS Domain Specify the DNS domain name.
Name]
[Ethernet [Auto Detect] Specify the communication method. To apply your changes, choose Register
Driver]*12 Setting.
Choose On for automatic configuration of the LAN communication protocol.
Choose Off to use settings values of Comm.Mode and Ethernet Type.
[Comm.Mode] Choose the LAN communication method.
[Ethernet Type] Choose the LAN transfer rate.
[Spanning Tree] Choose whether spanning-tree packets are supported over the LAN.
[MAC Address] Display the MAC address.
[Interface Print] Print the interface settings.
[Return Defaults] Select [OK] to return the [Interface Setup] settings to factory default.
1-39
Chapter 1

[System Setup] [Sleep Timer] Specify the period before the printer enters Sleep mode.
[Shut Down Timer] Specify the period the printer shuts down after entering Sleep mode.
[Buzzer] Set the buzzer. Choose On for the buzzer to sound once for warnings and three times for errors.
[Contrast Adj.] Adjust the Display Screen contrast level.
[Date & Time] [Date] Set the current date.
[Time] Set the current time. This can be set only when [Date] is set.
[Date Format] Specify the date format.
[Language] Specify the language used on the Display Screen.
[Time Zone] Specify the time zone. Time zone options indicate a main city in this time zone and the
difference from Greenwich Mean Time.
[Length Unit] Choose the unit of measurement when roll length is displayed. You can switch the unit
displayed for the remaining paper amount.
[Detect Mismatch] Set the printing behavior when the paper type and size set with the printer menu does not match
the paper type and size set with the printer driver.
Select [Pause] to pause printing. Select [Warning] to print a warning and continue printing.
Select [None] to continue printing without displaying a warning.
[Paper Size [Roll Selection When the size of roll paper is detected, select which roll width to use if the roll width is between
Basis] 1] [ISO A3 (297mm)] and [300mm Roll].
[Roll Selection When the size of roll paper is detected, select which roll width to use if the roll width is between
2] [10inch (254mm)] and [JIS B4 (257mm)].
[Keep Paper Size] Select [On] to give priority to paper size. If the margin set with the printer driver is less than
the margin set with the printer menu, the margin set with the printer menu has priority and text
and images extending beyond the margins are truncated.
Select [Off] to give priority to margin settings. If the margins set with the printer driver and the
margins set with the printer menu are different, the larger settings are used for printing.
[TrimEdge Reload] Select whether cut the leading edge of the paper when the paper at the standby position has
loaded. Cut it when the roller trace at the standby position attract attention. Choose On to cut it
everytime when the paper at the standby position has loaded. Choose Automatic to cut it when
the paper at the standby position during two days or more has loaded.
[Rep.P.head Print] Select [On] to automatically perform [Adjust Detail] after replacing the Printhead.
[Nozzle Check] Set with [Frequency] the timing to check for nozzle clogging after printing. Select [Standard]
to adjust the checking timing according to the nozzle usage.
Select [1 page] or [10 pages] to check every one page or 10 pages.
Select [On] for [Warning] to display a warning when the print head nozzle is clogged while
printing.
[Use USB] Select [Off] to disable the function of the USB connection.
[Use Ethernet] Select [Off] to disable the function of the ethernet connection.
[Use RemoteUI] Select [Off] to disable access from RemoteUI and enable setting only from the operation panel.
[Reset PaprSetngs] Restore settings that you have changed with Media Configuration Tool to the factory default
values.
1-40
Chapter 1

[System Setup] [Show Job Log] Selecting off prevents display of the log in Job Menu > Job Log. Additionally, the log is not
printed if you choose Job Menu > Print Job Log. Note that because job logs are not collected,
the Status Monitor accounting functions will not work correctly.
[Prep.MovePrinter] Select when moving the printer. Follow the instruction on the screen and perform the necessary
process.
This is not displayed when displaying a warning message about the amount remaining
maintenance cartridge.
[Admin. Menu] [Chg.Admin.Pswd] Set a password to restrict displaying/setting of menus as follows. Allowed value is from 0 to
9999999.
- Allow only administrator to display/set
[IPv4]
[Change Password]
[Init.Admin.Pswd]
- Allow administrator to display/set and non-administrator to display only
[Interface Setup] (exclude [IPv4])
[Date & Time]
[Date Format]
[Time Zone]
[Use RemoteUI]
[Reset PaprSetngs]
[Save: Shared Box]
[Init.Admin.Pswd] Press [OK] to return the [Administrator Menu] password to factory default.
[Printer Info] [Paper Info] Display the currently set paper type, size and printer settings.
[Ink Info] Display ink levels and maintenance cartridge capacity.
[Head Info] Display the Printhead information.
[System Info] Display the firmware version, serial number, and interface information.
[Error Log] Display the most recent error messages (up to 5).
[Use Situation] Display the total area and duty counter printed.
1-41
Chapter 1
1.7 Safety and Precautions
1.7.1 Safety Precautions
1.7.1.1 Moving Parts

0023-1446
Moving parts of the printer include the carriage unit driven by the carriage motor, the carriage belt, the ink tube, the flexible cable, the feed roller driven by the feed
motor, the pinch roller, and the purge unit driven by the purge motor.
To prevent accidents, the upper cover of the printer is locked during printing. If the top cover is opened in the online/offline mode, the carriage motor, feed motor,
and other driving power supplies are turned off.
Carriage Motor
Roll Media Drive Unit

Pinch Roller
Feed Motor Flexible Cable

Purge Unit
Carriage
Ink tube
Feed Roller
Cutter Unit
Carriage Height
Adjustment Unit
Cutter
F-1-39
1-42
Chapter 1
1.7.1.2 Adhesion of Ink

0023-1463
(1) Ink passages

Be careful not to touch the ink passages of the printer to prevent the printer, workbench, ands, and clothes from being stained with ink.
The ink flows through the ink tank unit, carriage unit, purge unit, maintenance cartridge, and the ink tubes that relay ink to individual units.
Platen
Ink Tank Unit Carriage
Maintenance Cartridge Purge Unit
Ink Tank Unit
Head Management Sensor

F-1-40
- Although the ink is not harmful to the human body, it contains organic solvents.
Ink may contaminate the surrounding parts. Carry out the work with due caution. If your hands are stained with ink, wash them with a plenty of water.
Be careful not to allow the ink to get into your mouth or eyes.
If the ink gets into your eyes, flush them with water well and see a doctor.
In case of accidental ingestion of a large quantity of ink, see a doctor immediately.
- It is also effective to use gloves to prevent ink from adhering when working.
- Since this ink contains pigment, stains will not come out of clothing.
(2) Ink Mist

Since the printhead prints by squirting ink onto the media, a minute amount of ink mist is generated in the printing unit during printing. The generated ink mist is
collected in the printer by the airflow. However, uncollected ink mist may stain the platen, carriage unit, exterior, and purge unit.
These stains may soil the print media or hands and clothes when servicing the printer. Wipe them off carefully with a soft, well-wrung cloth.
Upper Cover
Purge Unit
Platen/Carriage/Main Rail
F-1-41
1-43
Chapter 1
1.7.1.3 Electric Parts

0023-2465
The electric parts of the printer are activated when the printer is connected to the AC power supply.
At the rear and left/right side of the printer are the main controller, power supply and interface connector. The carriage PCB is incorporated in the carriage unit, and
the operation panel is on the upper right top cover.
When serving the printer with the cover removed, be extremely careful to avoid electric shock and shorting electrical devices.
Operation Panel
Carriage PCB
Power Supply PCB
Main Controller PCB
AC Inlet
Interface Connector
F-1-42
1-44
Chapter 1
1.7.2 Other Precautions
1.7.2.1 Printhead
0020-1924
1. How to Handle the Printhead

Do not open the printhead package until you are ready to install the head.
When installing the printhead in the printer, hold the knob and then remove the protective cap 1 and protective cap 2 in that order.
Do not reattach the protective cap to the printhead because the cap may damage the nozzles.
To prevent the nozzles from getting clogged with foreign matter or dried ink, install the printhead immediately after you remove the protective caps.
Also make sure to press down the locking lever of the printhead until you feel a click.
In addition, to prevent clogging of the nozzles with foreign matter and improper supply of ink, never touch the nozzles or ink port, or wipe it with tissue paper or
anything else.
Do not touch Electrical contact.
Also, never attempt to disassemble/reassemble the printhead or wash it with water.
MEMO:
If the nozzles are clogged or an ink suction problem occurs, white lines can appear on the printout a constant frequency or color dulling can occur. If this problem
is not resolved by cleaning operations, replace the printhead with a new one.
[6]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[5]
F-1-43
[1] Knob [4] Nozzles

[2] Protective cap 1 [5] Electrical contact
[3] Protective cap 2 [6] Ink port
2. Capping
The printer will perform the capping operation when printing has ended or during standby due to an error, in order to protect the printhead and avoid ink leakage.
If the power cord is accidentally unplugged, turn off the Power button, reconnect the power cord, and then turn on the Power button. Confirm that the printer starts
up properly and enters to the "Online" or "Offline" status, and then power off the printer using the Power button.
Improper "capping operation" may cause clogged nozzles due to dried ink or ink leakage from the printhead.
3. When the printer is not used for a long time

Keep the printhead installed in the printer even when it is not used for an extended period of time.
If the printhead is left uninstalled, a printing failure may arise from closed nozzles due to depositing of foreign matter or dried ink when it is reinstalled.
Even if the head remains installed, the nozzle may dry out and cause a printing failure if the ink is drained for transport.
4. Conductivity of Ink
The ink used in this printer is electrically conductive. If ink leaks to into the mechanical unit, wipe clean with a soft, well-wrung damp cloth. If ink leaks onto
electrical units, wipe them completely using tissue paper. If you cannot remove ink completely, replace the electrical units with new ones.
If electrical units are powered with ink leaked onto them, the units may damage.
Never connect the power cord when ink has leaded onto the electrical units.
1-45
Chapter 1
1.7.2.2 Ink Tank

0023-1466
1. Unpacking the Ink Tank

Do not unpack the ink tank until you are ready to install it.
When installing the ink tank, be sure to shake it slowly 1 to 2 times before unpacking it. Otherwise, the ink ingredients may precipitate and degrade the print quality.
To prevent foreign matter from entering the ink port, install the unpacked ink tank in the printer immediately.
2. Handling the Ink Tank
To prevent foreign matter from entering the ink flow path and causing ink suction and printing problems, never touch the ink port and contacts of the ink tank.
When you press down the ink tank cover, the needle enters the ink port, allowing ink to flow between the printer and ink tank.
Do not raise or lower the ink tank cover except when replacing the ink tank.
[2]
[1] [4]
[3]
F-1-44
[1] Ink tank

[2] Ink tank lock lever
[3] Contacts
[4] Ink port
1.7.2.3 Handling the Printer

0023-1467
1. Precautions against Static Electricity

Certain clothing may generate static electricity, causing an electrical charge to build up on your body. Such a charge can damage electrical devices or change their
electrical characteristics.
In particular, never touch the printhead contacts.
[2]
[1]
F-1-45
[1] Carriage unit

[2] Printhead contacts
2. Fixing the Carriage

After completion of printing, the carriage is mechanically locked by the lock pin in the purge unit at the same moment the printhead is capped.
1-46
Chapter 1
3. Contact of Linear Scale/Carriage Shaft

Do not touch the linear scale and carriage shaft when the upper cover is opened, for maintenance.
Touching the linear scale and carriage shaft might cause abnormal movement of the carriage and produce defective prints.
[2] [1]
F-1-46
[1] Linear Scale

[2] Carriage Shaft
Don't apply the grease to the linear scale and carriage shaft. It may cause abnormal operations and defective prints.
4. Replacing the maintenance cartridge

When the maintenance cartridge detects that the tank is full, the "Repl. Maint. C" error appears. In this case the maintenance cartridge must be replaced.
The printer will not operate until the error is cancelled.
Be careful that the waste ink does not splash when you remove the used maintenance cartridge from the printer.
MEMO:
This printer has an EEPROM in the maintenance cartridge and the maintenance cartridge status is controlled by the main controller PCB which reads and writes
the contents of that EEPROM. Therefore, initializing the counter information will not be needed when the maintenance cartridge is replaced.
5. Refilling the ink

After draining the ink from the printer according to the automatic or manual ink draining procedure for disassemble, reassemble, or transport/ship the printer, refill
the ink as soon as possible upon completion of those tasks.
Dried remaining ink on the surface of some components, may cause damage or abnormal operations.
1-47
Chapter 1
1.7.3 Precautions When Servicing Printer
1.7.3.1 Notes on the Data Stored in the Printer

0013-5942
This printer counts the print length, number of ink tank replacements, carriage driving time, number of cleaning operations, number of cutter operations, and so on
and stores them in the main controller's EEPROM as a COUNTER in Service mode.
COUNTER provides important information about the printer usage status.
You can check this information by printing it in the service mode or displaying it on the display.
Follow the precautions below when servicing the printer.
(1) Repairing/replacing the PCB

When replacing the main controller, follow the specified replacement procedure.
For the main controller replacement procedure, see "DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY" > "Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly" > "PCBs".
(2) After replacing the carriage unit

The information about the carriage driving time resides in the carriage unit. After replacing the carriage unit, select [INITIALIZE] > [CARRIAGE] in the service
mode to initialize the information about the carriage driving time.
(3) After replacing the purge unit

The information about the number of cleanings resides in the purge unit. After replacing the purge unit, select [INITIALIZE] > [PURGE] in the service mode to
initialize (clear) the information about the number of cleanings.
(4) On replacement of supplies

After supplies have been replaced, execute [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS xx] in service mode to initialize (clear) the parts counter information.
For the consumable parts, see "MAINTENANCE" > "Periodic Replacement Parts".
You cannot check the counter information once it is initialized (cleared). Be careful not to initialize the counter information before checking it.
You cannot modify the counter information from the operation panel.
1.7.3.2 Confirming the Firmware Version

0013-5945
Firmware has been downloaded to the main controller.

When you have replaced the main controller, check that the firmware is the latest version. If not, update it to the latest version.
Reference:
For instruction on how to update the main controller, refer to "TROUBLESHOOTING" > "Version Up".
1.7.3.3 Precautions against Static Electricity

0013-5947
Certain clothing may generate static electricity, causing an electrical charge to build up on your body. Such a charge can damage electrical devices.
To prevent this, discharge any static buildup by touching a grounded metal fitting before you start disassembling the printer.
1.7.3.4 Precautions for Disassembly/Reassembly

0013-5948
The precautions for disassembly/reassembly are described in "DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY".
1.7.3.5 Self-diagnostic Feature

0013-5950
The printer has a self-diagnostic feature to analyze hardware problems.

The self-diagnosis result is shown on the display and indicated by lamps.
For detailed information, see "ERROR CODE".
1-48
Chapter 1
1.7.3.6 Disposing of the Lithium Battery

0013-5952
The main controller PCB of this printer is equipped with a lithium battery to back up various data.
Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type.

Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions.
"For CA, USA Only

Included battery contains Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply. See
http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ for detail."
1-49
Chapter 2 TECHNICAL REFERENCE
Contents
Contents
2.1 Basic Operation Outline.................................................................................................................................................2-1

2.1.1 Printer Diagram............................................................................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.2 Print Signal Sequence .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-2
2.1.3 Print Driving ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-3
2.2 Firmware ........................................................................................................................................................................2-5
2.2.1 Operation Sequence at Power-on................................................................................................................................................. 2-5
2.2.2 Operation Sequence at Power-off ................................................................................................................................................ 2-6
2.2.3 Print Position Adjustment Function............................................................................................................................................. 2-7
2.2.4 Head Management ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2-7
2.2.5 Printhead Overheating Protection Control................................................................................................................................... 2-7
2.2.6 Pause between Pages.................................................................................................................................................................... 2-7
2.2.7 White Raster Skip ........................................................................................................................................................................ 2-7
2.2.8 Sleep Mode .................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-7
2.2.9 Shut Down Mode ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-7
2.3 Printer Mechanical System ............................................................................................................................................2-8
2.3.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.3.1.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................2-8
2.3.2 Ink Passage................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.3.2.1 Ink Passage......................................................................................................................................................................................................2-9
2.3.2.1.1 Overview of Ink Passage.........................................................................................................................................................................2-9
2.3.2.2 Ink Tank Unit ................................................................................................................................................................................................2-10
2.3.2.2.1 Structure of Ink Tank Unit ....................................................................................................................................................................2-10
2.3.2.3 Carriage Unit .................................................................................................................................................................................................2-12
2.3.2.3.1 Functions of Carriage Unit....................................................................................................................................................................2-12
2.3.2.3.2 Structure of Carriage Unit .....................................................................................................................................................................2-13
2.3.2.4 Printhead .......................................................................................................................................................................................................2-16
2.3.2.4.1 Structure of Printhead............................................................................................................................................................................2-16
2.3.2.5 Purge Unit .....................................................................................................................................................................................................2-17
2.3.2.5.1 Functions of Purge Unit ........................................................................................................................................................................2-17
2.3.2.5.2 Structure of Purge Unit .........................................................................................................................................................................2-20
2.3.2.6 Maintenance Cartridge ..................................................................................................................................................................................2-22
2.3.2.6.1 Maintenance Cartridge ..........................................................................................................................................................................2-22
2.3.2.7 Air Flow ........................................................................................................................................................................................................2-23
2.3.2.7.1 Air Flow ................................................................................................................................................................................................2-23
2.3.3 Paper Path .................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-25
2.3.3.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................2-25
2.3.3.1.1 Overview of Paper Path.........................................................................................................................................................................2-25
2.3.3.2 Paper Path......................................................................................................................................................................................................2-26
2.3.3.2.1 Structure of Feed Roller Unit ................................................................................................................................................................2-26
2.3.3.3 Cutter Unit.....................................................................................................................................................................................................2-28
2.3.3.3.1 Structure of Cutter Unit.........................................................................................................................................................................2-28
2.4 Printer Electrical System..............................................................................................................................................2-29
2.4.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-29
2.4.1.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................................................................................2-29
2.4.2 Main Controller.......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-31
2.4.2.1 Main controller PCB components.................................................................................................................................................................2-31
2.4.2.2 Connectors and Pin Arrangement of Main controller PCB ..........................................................................................................................2-32
2.4.3 Carriage Relay PCB................................................................................................................................................................... 2-39
2.4.3.1 Carriage PCB components ............................................................................................................................................................................2-39
2.4.3.2 Connectors and Pin Arrangement of Carriage PCB......................................................................................................................................2-40
2.4.4 Maintenance Cartridge Relay PCB ............................................................................................................................................ 2-44
2.4.4.1 Maintenance cartridge relay PCB components .............................................................................................................................................2-44
2.4.5 Power Supply ............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-45
Contents
2.4.5.1 Power supply block diagram......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-45

2.4.5.2 Connectors and Pin Arrangement of Power supply PCB ............................................................................................................................. 2-46
2.5 Detection Functions with Sensors ............................................................................................................................... 2-47
2.5.1 Covers ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-47
2.5.2 Ink passage system..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-48
2.5.3 Carriage system.......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-51
2.5.4 Paper path system ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-53
2.5.5 Others......................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-55
Chapter 2
2.1 Basic Operation Outline
2.1.1 Printer Diagram

0031-2531
Shown below is a printer diagram.
Main Controller PCB
IC301/IC302 IC601-IC604
SDRAM SDRAM
CN2 J1801 IC701

Power Supply PCB
FLASH ROM
IC802
EEPROM
IC803 IC1
RTC ASIC
BATS801
Lithium Battery
USB J101
Operation Panel PCB
IC2501
LAN LAN Controller
Carriage PCB
Linear Maintenance Cartridge
J202
Encoder Relay PCB
Sensor
Printhead IC401 ROM PCB
J2601
J101/J102
J201 IC2
ASIC
Ink Tank
J3303
Multi J3401/J3601 J3201

Sensor J501 IC503 J3602 J3301
IC504 Ink Tank ROM PCB
J2801/J2951
J3001/J3201
J3301/J3901
J4102/J4501 J3001
Sensor/Switch
J4501
Solenoid
Feed Roller HP Sensor
Feed Roller Encoder Sensor Upper Cover Lock Solenoid
Lift Cam Sensor Release Lever Lock Solenoid
Paper Detection Sensor
Pump Cam Sensor J2951
Pump Encoder Sensor J4501
Fan
Ink Detection Sensor (L)/(R)
Temperature/Humidity Detection Sensor
J2701/J2801 Platen Suction Fan
J2951/J3001 Mist Fan
Cutter HP Sensor
Cutter Left Position Sensor J4101/J4201
IC4101/IC4200
Ink Supply Valve Open/Closed Detection Sensor (L)/(R) J4501
IC4300/IC4401 Motor
Shutter HP Sensor
Motor Driver
Carriage HP Sensor
Roll Encoder Sensor Carriage Motor
Release Lever Lock Sensor Feed Motor
Pinch Roller Pressure Release Switch Lift Motor
Ink Tank Cover Switch (L)/(R) Purge Motor
Upper Cover Lock Switch Valve Motor (L)/(R)
Shutter Motor
Cutter Motor
Roll Motor
F-2-1
2-1
Chapter 2
2.1.2 Print Signal Sequence

0025-9730
The signal sequence from when the printer receives the print signals until printing starts is shown in the following figure.
: Image data
Host computer : Mask pattern data
: Heat pulse
Printer driver : Command data
: PCI bus
a a
: Data bus
: Universal sirial bus
Interface unit
USB LAN
b b
i
ASIC (IC1/L-COA)
EEPROM
Image processing Printhead
c g
DDR-SDRAM unit EEPROM
d
SDR-SDRAM
f Carriage PCB
e
FLASH ROM f Latch IC
e,h
e
i e
Ink tank
h
EEPROM
ASIC (IC2)
i
Operation panel
i
Sensor and drive unit
Main controller
F-2-2
a) The printer driver on the host computer transmits print data, including command data, to the printer after compressing the image data, without resolution, color
and 12-color binarization conversion.
To achieve high-quality image output, the image processing table data used for image data color conversion and binarization conversion are generated as command
data to meet the Media Type and other specifications of the printer driver.
b) This printer receives print data from the individual interfaces on the main controller, transmitting the received print data to ASIC (IC1).
c) The main controller decompresses the print data transmitted to the ASIC and gets it through resolution, color and 5-color binarization conversion while loading
the data into DDR-SDRAM from time to time.
It also converts the print data to 5-color binary equivalents of image and command data.
d) The ASIC (IC1) generates image data synthesized with mask data within the ASIC in sync with the discharge time while loading the data into DDR-SDRAM
from time to time.
e) The ASIC (IC2) collects printhead information from EEPROM mounted on the printheads and the printer temperature from the latch IC on the carriage board
and transmit them to the ASIC (IC1).
The ASIC (IC1) also receives mask pattern data from the firmware installed in flash ROM.
f) The ASIC (IC1) converts the image data synthesized with the mask pattern to data associated with the printhead information and the printer temperature, trans-
mitting the data to the printheads as a print signal. It transmits heat pulses to the printheads at the same time to optimize head driving.
g) The printheads convert the received print signal from a serial signal to a parallel signal for each row of nozzles and then the signal is composed with the heat
pulses to perform the printing.
h) The ASIC (IC1) controls the general aspects of image processing and print drive control by detecting the status of the individual printer components with refer-
ence to the adjustment values stored in EEPROM. SDR-SDRAM is used as work memory.
i) The ASIC (IC2) controls the general aspects of drive control by controlling button actuations and message displays on the basis of the firmware installed in flash
ROM.
2-2
Chapter 2
2.1.3 Print Driving

0012-6491
Print and control signals are transferred via the carriage PCB to the printheads to discharge inks from the nozzle assembly at printing.
Each printhead has 12 trains of nozzles arranged in a zigzag pattern.
This printer uses one printhead.
(In installed state, from left to right, C, M, Y, MBK, MBK, BK)
Print signals directed at each nozzle train are even-numbered nozzle data (Hx-x-DATA-x-EV) and odd-numbered nozzle data (Hx-x-DATA-x-OD). These are
transferred in timing with a data transfer clock (Hx-CLK) and data latch pulses (Hx-LT).
The Heat Enable (Hx-x-HE-x) drive control signal enables inks to be discharged from the nozzles.
1. Pint drive control

Each train of nozzles in a printhead has 2,560 nozzles.
Ink discharge nozzles are selected split in 40-, 20- or 10-nozzle blocks according to the Block Enable information in the even-numbered nozzle data and odd-num-
bered nozzle data.
Each selected block of nozzles is impressed with a Heat Enable signal generated with variable pulse widths according to the head rank, head temperature and printer
temperature for optimized ink discharges. The nozzles are driven by heater boards in the nozzles to discharge inks. Optimal nozzle blocks are selected according
to the print path.
The diagram below illustrates the relationship between a 40-block nozzle and nozzles driven.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1213 1415 1617 1819 2021 2223 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 Block No.
0
Printhead nozzle No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
2559
The pattern is repeated until 2560 nozzles is reached.
F-2-3
2-3
Chapter 2
2. Print drive timing

Each printhead houses 12 trains of nozzles, which share the same data transfer clock (Hx-CLK) and data latch pulses (Hx-LT).
Even-numbered nozzle data (Hx-x-DATA-x-EV), odd-numbered nozzle data (Hx-x-DATA-x-OD) and the Heat Enable (Hx-x-HE-x) signal are generated for each
nozzle train and controlled individually.
Printing is carried out in two ways through reciprocating motion of the carriage.
An encoder sensor mounted on the carriage generates a 150-dpi-pitched linear scale detection signal (ENCODER_A) and a signal (ENCODER_B) shifted 120 de-
grees in phase. The direction of carriage motion is detected from the status of the ENCODER_B signal relative to the leading edge of the ENCODER_A signal.
The printhead is driven using a 2400-dpi timing signal (internal signal), which is generated by dividing the ENCODER_A signal detected at the 150 dpi timing into
16 equal sections.
Printing in the forward direction is triggered at the leading edge of the detection signal (ENCODER_A).
Printing in the backward direction is carried out the same way as printing in the forward direction but at the trailing edge of the detection signal (ENCODER_A),
when the order of heated nozzles is reversed depending on the sequence of transfer of even-numbered nozzle data and odd-numbered nozzle data.
150dpi
Linear scale
ENCODER_A
ENCODER_B
2400dpi
Internal signal
2400dpi
H0_CLK
H0_A_DATA_0_EV Data of block 0 Data of block 2 Data of block 4 Data of block 22
H0_A_DATA_1_EV Data of block 0 Data of block 2 Data of block 4 Data of block 22
H0_A_DATA_0_OD Data of block 0 Data of block 2 Data of block 4 Data of block 22
H0_A_DATA_1_OD Data of block 0 Data of block 2 Data of block 4 Data of block 22
H0_LT
H0_A_HE_1
Low active
F-2-4
2-4
Chapter 2
2.2 Firmware
2.2.1 Operation Sequence at Power-on

0012-6310
The sequence of printer operations, from power-on to transition to online mode, is flowcharted below. The printer takes less than 1 minute to initialize itself(*).
* Excluding the times spent supplying inks and cleaning the printhead after leaving the printer for extended periods of time.
Power Button ON
- Initialization of software
Device/resource - Initialization of various devices
initialization
- Engine startup status check

Engine status check
- Previous power-off status check,etc.
- Printhead installation status check

Printhead/ - Ink tank installation status check
ink tank check - EEPROM check
- Cassette pick-up unit initialization

Media feed system - Roll feed unit initialization
initialization - Roll feed unit initialization
- Sensor check
- Recovery system return to origin

Recovery system - Sensor check
initialization
- Carriage motor return to origin

Carriage position
initialization
Remaining ink level detection/

Waste ink level detection
Power-on
automatic recovery operation
Capping
Waiting for print operation

F-2-5
2-5
Chapter 2
2.2.2 Operation Sequence at Power-off

0012-6311
Turning off the power switch cuts off the drive voltage supply, launching a firmware power-off sequence as shown below.
If the power cord is disconnected from the wall outlet or the upper cover or any other cover is opened, the printer cancels the ongoing operation and shuts down
immediately. Since printhead capping may or may not have been carried out properly, reconnect the power cord to the wall out and turn on the power switch. Making
sure that the printer has entered online mode, turn off the power switch.
1. Power-off sequence
Hold down for at least once second

Power button OFF
If media remains,it is ejected even

Media ejection
when printing is in progress.
Power-off automatic recovery
Capping
Sensor system power OFF
Writing to EEPROM
Backup of various data
Power-off
F-2-6
2-6
Chapter 2
2.2.3 Print Position Adjustment Function

0012-6313
This printer supports a print position adjustment for the vertical and horizontal print positions, the bidirectional print position of the printhead mounted on the car-
riage, and the feedrate.
There are two adjustment modes for the print: automatic adjustment, in which print position adjustment patterns printed are detected by the multi sensor attached
to the lower left part of the carriage, and manual adjustment, in which print position adjustment patterns that are slightly modified from one another are printed, so
that visually verified adjustment values can be set from the operation panel.
To execute the print position adjustments, 10-inches size or larger roll media or two sheets of A4/LTR-size or larger cut sheet are needed. However, in case of A2-
size or larger cut sheet, one sheet is needed.
The print position adjustment function is executed by the following menu.
[Set./Adj. Menu]
[Adjust Printer] [Head Posi. Adj.] [Auto(Standard)]
[Auto(Advanced)]
[Manual]*4
[Head Inc. Adj.]
[Feed Priority] [Adj. Priority] [Automatic]*
[Print Quality]
[Print Length]
[Adj. Quality]*5 [Auto(GenuinePpr)]
[Auto(OtherPaper)]
[Manual]
[Adjust Length]*6 [AdjustmentPrint] [A:High]
[B:Standard/Draft]
[Change Settings] [A:High]
[B:Standard/Draft]
2.2.4 Head Management

0012-6314
This printer supports a nozzle check function to spot non-discharging nozzles in the printhead.
When the printer detects a non-discharging nozzle, it starts cleaning the printhead automatically to correct its discharge failure. If cleaning does not work, the printer
backs up the non-discharging nozzle with an alternative nozzle automatically to ensure unfailing print performance.
Detection timings (automatic):
Power-on, carriage cover open detection, print start (check timing variable by selecting Nozzle Check from the system menu).
2.2.5 Printhead Overheating Protection Control

0012-6315
When an abnormal temperature rise in the printhead is detected, overheating protection control launches.
Overheating could occur in the printhead after a period of print operations without the nozzles being filled with inks.
Overheating protection control is implemented on the basis of the temperature detected by the head temperature sensor for each nozzle. When an abnormal temper-
ature is detected in any nozzle train, overheating protection control is exerted at one of two levels according to that temperature.
Protection level 1:
If the head temperature sensor (DI sensor) detects a temperature higher than the protection temperature, it halts the carriage temporarily at the scan end position in
the direction of travel according to the carriage scan status.
Printing resumes when the printhead radiates naturally to cool down below a predetermined temperature or when 30 seconds or longer have elapsed since the de-
tection of the higher temperature.
Protection level 2:
If the head temperature sensor (DI sensor) detects a temperature higher than the abnormal temperature, the printer shuts down the print operation immediately,
moving the carriage to the home position for capping, with an error indication on the display.
2.2.6 Pause between Pages

0012-6320
An inter-page function is available to prevent ink rubbing, which keeps paper just printed hanging above the platen and waiting for a predetermined period of time
before delivery.
The wait time is user-programmable from the print driver. This feature is particularly useful on paper that takes time to dry after printing, such as film.
2.2.7 White Raster Skip

0012-6322
This printer supports a white raster skip function to bypass carriage scanning in a consecutive sequence of voids in print data, for added throughput.
2.2.8 Sleep Mode

0012-6324
The printer has sleep mode to reduce its standby power requirement.
The printer transitions to sleep mode automatically when it has been left idle or no print data has been received for a predetermined period of time while the printer
is online or offline.
The printer exits sleep mode when any operation panel key is activated or print data is received from the host computer.
The time to transition to sleep mode is variable from the operation panel (Default: 5minutes).
2.2.9 Shut Down Mode

0031-2532
The power supply of printer turns off automatically to reduce the power consumption when the sleep mode is continued for a predetermined period of time.
The time to transition to shut down mode can be changed by the operation panel (Default: 8 hours).
2-7
Chapter 2
2.3 Printer Mechanical System
2.3.1 Outline
2.3.1.1 Outline
0023-1469
The printer mechanism can be broadly divided into two major components: the ink passage and paper path.
The ink passage consists of the ink tank unit, the carriage unit having the printhead, the purge unit, the maintenance cartridge, and the tube unit which are used to
supply, circulate, and suck ink.
The paper path consists of the feed roller unit to support one type of media feeding, transport, and ejection.
This section provides an overview of these mechanical components.
Feed Roller
Pinch Roller
Carriage
Ink Tank Unit
Printhead
Ink Tube
Purge Unit
Ink Tank Unit
F-2-7
2-8
Chapter 2
2.3.2 Ink Passage

2.3.2.1 Ink Passage
2.3.2.1.1 Overview of Ink Passage
0023-1470
The ink passage houses the ink tank, printhead, caps, maintenance jet tray, maintenance cartridge, waste ink collector, ink tubes interconnecting the mechanical
units, suction pump driven mainly for sucking inks and so on. Its functions include supplying, circulating and sucking inks.
The ink passage (per color) is schematically shown below, along with the ink flow.
Mechanical Drive Unit Carriage Unit

Ink Flow
Ink Tank
Needle(air passage)
Agitation Plate
Needle(ink supply) Joint
Printhead
Suction Pump
Cap
Ink Supply
Air Passage Valve
Air Passage
Subtank Air Subtank
Subtank Ink Remaining Passage Valve
Waste ink except PBK Waste PBK ink
Detection Needle
F-2-8
a) Supplying inks from the ink tanks to the ink supply valve assembly
The ink tanks each contain ink to feed the printhead.
The ink is supplied from the ink tanks to the subtanks first, then to the ink supply valves.
Air is discharged through the air passage to keep the internal pressure of the ink tanks and subtanks constant.
b) Supplying inks from the ink supply valves to the printhead

The ink stored in an ink tank flows to the printhead when the suction pump is driven with the ink supply valve opened and the head capped.
The ink sucked from the caps flows to the maintenance cartridge.
c) Supplying inks while printing

The ink supply valves and subtank air passage valves are kept open while printing, so that inks is constantly flowing to the printhead under the negative pressure
of the nozzle assembly which is caused by the discharging inks.
Furthermore, waste inks sucked in the cleaning operation and inks from the maintenance jet tray flow into the maintenance cartridge.
If all of ink passages are opened (no ink tank is installed, the ink supply valve is opened, the subtank air passage valve is opened, and the printhead fixer lever is
opened) when the ink tube is being filled with ink, the ink in the ink tube may reverse-flow due to the fluid level difference and ink may leak from the hollow needle
of the ink tank.
Do not open all of the ink passages at the same time when the ink tube is being filled with ink.
d) Agitation of ink in the ink tank

Ink in the ink tank and the subtank are agitated to prevent precipitation of pigment-based ink in the ink tank and subtank.
This function is implemented by reverse-flowing ink to the ink tank and subtank by opening and closing the ink supply valve and subtank air passage valve in
succession. Inside the ink tank is provided with an agitation plate to assist agitation of ink. (The agitation plate is also provided in the dye ink tank.)
- Operation timing: When a new ink tank is installed or when 168 hours have lapsed since the previous agitation (the agitation is performed irrespective of the
condition whether the printer is printing or cleaning its printhead.)
- Ink supply valve opening/closing count: 30 times (every 30 seconds)
If 336 or more hours have lapsed, the ink valve opening/closing count and the time until the next agitation are changed according to the length of the tame lapsed.
2-9
Chapter 2
2.3.2.2 Ink Tank Unit

2.3.2.2.1 Structure of Ink Tank Unit
0023-1471
a) Ink tank
Each ink tank contains 130 ml of ink (the starter ink tank supplied with the printer contains 90 ml of ink) for each color. The amount of ink is memorized in the
EEPROM mounted to the ink tank.
The amount of the ink remaining in the ink tank is detected as a dot count according to the data memorized in the EEPROM.
When the electrodes mounted to the hollow needle detect a con-conductive state, a message appears on the display to indicate that the ink is nearly empty. If the
dot count reaches the prescribed value, the ink tank is considered to be empty.
b) Ink port
When the ink tank lock lever is pressed down, the hollow needle enters the ink port (covered with a rubber plug), establishing an ink passage between the printer
and ink tank.
c) Air passage
When the ink tank lever of the printer is pressed down, the hollow needle enters the air passage (covered with a rubber plug) and thus the internal pressure of the
ink tank is released, maintaining the internal pressure constant.
d) Notches for preventing incorrect insertion

The ink tanks have notches for preventing incorrect location. Wrong ink tanks cannot be installed in place due to these notches.
The ink tank lock lever can lowered to start ink supply only when the ink tank has been installed in place.
e) Agitation plate
The agitation plate assists the ink agitation which is performed to prevent precipitation of ink.
Notches for Preventing

incorrect installation
Air Passage Ink Port

Notches for
Preventing
incorrect
EEPROM
installation
Notches for
preventing Agitation
incorrect Plate
installation
Ink Tank
F-2-9
2-10
Chapter 2
f) Subtank
The subtank installed under each ink tank complements the work of the ink tank, agitating the ink in the tank.
If the ink tank runs out of the ink while printing, the ink stored in the subtank is available, allowing the ink tank to be replaced without having to stop printing.
g) Ink supply valve

The ink supply valve is located between the ink tank and ink tube to prevent ink leakage from occurring when the ink tube on the ink tank side is opened during
replacement of the ink tank.
The ink supply valve is opened and closed by the valve open/close mechanism which is driven by the valve motor.
The ink tank unit (Left/Right) consist of tank bases each of which contains ink tanks for three colors and the ink tubes for three colors.
Ink supply valves for all colors are opened and closed at the same time.
h) Subtank air passage valve

The subtank air passage valves keep the internal pressure of the subtank adequately.
The subtank air passage valve is opened and closed by the valve open/close mechanism which is driven by the valve motor.
Ink Supply Valve Open/Closed Lever
Ink Supply Valve Subtank
Ink Supply Valve Open/Closed

Detection Sensor
Subtank
Air Passage Valve
Ink Supply
Valve Cam
Air Passage Valve Open/Closed Detection Sensor
Subtank Air Passage Valve Open/Closed Lever
Valve Motor Subtank Air Passage Valve Cam

F-2-10
2-11
Chapter 2
2.3.2.3 Carriage Unit

2.3.2.3.1 Functions of Carriage Unit
0023-1473
a) Printhead mounting function

The carriage mechanically locks the printhead and transmits the print signals to the printhead via the carriage PCB.
b) Control function
The carriage incorporates a carriage PCB that relays the signal from the main controller, a linear encoder that generates a print timing signal based on the detected
carriage position, and a multi sensor that detects the media width and skewing to adjust the registration and height.
The carriage PCB and main controller PCB are connected with a flexible cable.
c) Carriage drive function

The carriage motor moves the carriage back and forth on the platen via the carriage belt.
d) Printhead maintenance function

The printer performs the printhead cleaning operation such as printhead wiping and suction at the home position of the carriage.
e) Nozzle check function

The printer detects a non-discharging nozzle using the head management sensor attached to the maintenance jet tray by discharging ink with the carriage stopped
at the maintenance jet tray.
f) Media thickness adjustment function

If the gap between the printhead face and the media increases due to the difference in media thickness, cockling, curling, and so on, more ink mist is generated. In
reverse, if the gap decreases, the head can touch the media surface more frequently.
To maintain the proper gap, the remote lifter is driven to adjust the head height automatically according to the selected media type, media supply method, printing
conditions (borderless/priority print type), environmental conditions (temperature/humidity), and the result of measurement by the multi sensor.
The relationship between media types and head heights (from the platen) is summarized in the table below. Note that the head height is adjusted with priority given
to the media gap measured by the multi sensor.
Head height (mm) Media type (Value in parentheses:mm)*1

1.0 (select by the user when using the plain paper)
1.3 Photo paper, Synthetic paper, Backlit film
1.8 Plain paper, Coated paper
2 Heavyweight coated paper
2.2 Premiun matte paper, Special
2.6 Special (at the low humidity or high humidity)
*1: Roll media, borderless printing, standard mode except for line document
g) Paper leading edge detection function/paper width detection function/skewing detection function
The leading edge, width, and skewing of the paper fed to the platen is detected by the multi sensor mounted at the lower left of the carriage.
h) Auto printing position adjustment function

The adjustment pattern printed on paper is read by the multi sensor mounted at the lower left of the carriage, thus adjusting the printing timings of each printhead
automatically.
i) Remaining roll media detection function

The amount of the remaining roll paper can be detected using the multi sensor mounted at the lower left of the carriage by printing a barcode at delivery of the roll
media.
j) Internal temperature detection function

The internal temperature around the printhead is detected using the thermistor mounted on the carriage PCB.
2-12
Chapter 2
2.3.2.3.2 Structure of Carriage Unit

0023-2472
a) Printhead mounting unit

The printhead is secured to the carriage by the printhead fixer lever.
When the printhead is secured to the carriage, the signal contact of the carriage PCB touches the signal contact point of the printhead, allowing print signals to be
transmitted.
The ink passage from the ink tank is connected to the printhead through the ink tube and joint.
b) Ink port
Ink is supplied to the printhead via an ink tube, which is connected to ink joints, and runs between the tube guides to reach the carriage and follow its movement.
Printhead Fixer Cover

Joint for Ink Supply
Printhead Fixer Lever

Terminal
Carriage Motor
Slant Adjustment Lever
Ink Tube
F-2-11
c) Control unit
The carriage PCB is connected to the main controller PCB with a flexible cable. The flexible cable moves in conjunction with the carriage.
A photo-coupler-type encoder is mounted at the top of the rear of the carriage to detect the slit on the linear scale during carriage movement, thus controlling the
print timing.
d) Carriage drive
Mechanical misregistrations in the vertical/horizontal and bidirectional print positions of the printhead mounted can be corrected by selecting Adjust Printer from
the main menu to shift the print timing.
A DC-operated carriage motor drives the carriage reciprocally on the platen by way of the carriage belt.
The carriage home position, or the capping position, is detected by the sensor flag on the right side of the carriage and the photointerrupter-based carriage HP sensor
on the right side of the printer. When the linear scale position is set as a reference home position for use in subsequent position control operations, the carriage motor
is driven by a control signal generated from the main controller PCB.
e) Printhead maintenance unit

This printer cleans the printhead with the carriage halted at its home position.
Wiping takes place through the rotation of the motor.
Wiper blades mounted on the carriage wipe the printhead while the carriage is halted at its home position.
Wet wiping is carried out for added wiping removal performance, whereby the wiper blades are moistened with glycerin as they are pressed against an absorber
impregnated with glycerin.
Maintenance jet ejection is carried out on the cap, at the maintenance jet tray.
A suction operation is carried out by a suction cap in the purge unit.
2-13
Chapter 2
Carriage
Spring (for Printhead Height)
Slant Adjustment Lever

Spring (for Printhead Slant)
Slant Adjustment Lever Shaft
Spring (for Printhead Slant)
Carriage Height Changing Cam
Head Holder
Lift Cam Sensor Lift Motor

F-2-12
f) Carriage height adjustment unit
The head height is adjusted with the carriage halted at its home position.
The lift motor is driven to rotate the carriage height changing cam within the carriage, in sync with which the lift cams on both sides of the carriage move the head
holder up and down, thereby varying the separation between the face of the printhead and the paper.
The printhead height is detected from the lift cam sensor within the carriage and the distance of rotation of the lift motor.
g) Slant adjustment unit
The tilting of the head is adjusted with the slant adjustment lever.
The point where the slant adjustment lever axis touches the head holder is offset from the fulcrum of the lever axis. Therefore, the printhead is tilted by moving the
slant adjustment lever and moving the position on the right side of the head holder back or forward.
2-14
Chapter 2
Linear Encoder Sensor

Carriage PCB
Shaft Cleaner
Multi Sensor Reference

Multi Sensor
Shaft Cleaner
Linear Scale
Lift Cam Sensor

Lift Drive Unit
F-2-13
h) Multi Sensor
A photo reflective type multi sensor consists of three red LEDs, one red/blue/green LED array, and three light receiving sensors and is used for media end, skew,
and width adjustment, registration adjustment, head height adjustment, and print position adjustment.
The multi sensor reference has three white plates attached to it, so that a reference value can be calculated during carriage height measurement by measuring the
intensity of light reflected upon the white plates.
(Service mode: SERVICE MODE>ADJUST>GAP CALIB.)
i) Shaft cleaner units

The shaft cleaners mounted at the left and right of the carriage are used to clean the carriage and apply oil to the shaft.
j) Internal temperature detection

A themistor for measuring the internal temperature is mounted on the carriage PCB on the rear of the head holder.
2-15
Chapter 2
2.3.2.4 Printhead
2.3.2.4.1 Structure of Printhead
0013-4821
A printhead incorporates six nozzle arrays. Each nozzle can be controlled individually so that a six-color discharge action can be performed by a single printhead.
a) Nozzle arrays
A total of 2560 nozzles are arranged in a two-column staggered pattern.
In each column, 1280 nozzles are arranged in a staggered pattern at intervals of 600 dpi, forming a 2560-nozzle arranged at intervals of 1200 dpi.
1
1/1200inch
0
2
1278
1279 2559
F-2-14
b) Nozzle structure
Ink supplied from the ink tank is filtered by a mesh ink filter, and the supplied to the nozzles.
Ink is supplied from the shared ink chamber to the nozzles. When the head driving current is applied to the nozzle heater, ink boils and form bubbles so that ink
droplets are discharged from the nozzles.
Resin
Sillicon plate
Heater Heater
Shared ink chamber
F-2-15
2-16
Chapter 2
2.3.2.5 Purge Unit

2.3.2.5.1 Functions of Purge Unit
0031-2535
To maintain high print quality, the purge unit performs maintenance of the nozzles of the printhead.
The purge unit supports a capping function, cleaning function, and ink supply function.
Purge Unit
F-2-16
a) Capping function
The capping function presses the cap of the purge unit against the face plate on the nozzle section of the printhead to prevent nozzle drying and dust adhesion.
Capping is performed when printing is complete, at the start of the suction operation, and when switching to the standby state due to an error.
The capping function also establishes the ink passage between the printhead and purge unit.
b) Cleaning function
The cleaning function restores the printhead to the state where ink can be easily discharged from nozzles. This function includes the following three types of oper-
ations.
- Wiping operation
This operation is performed to remove paper fibers and dried ink from the face plate.
- Pumping operation
This operation is performed to remove ink from the nozzles and fill the nozzles with fresh ink.
- Maintenance jet operation
This operation is performed to spray ink from the nozzles to the cap, the maintenance jet ink groove of the platen to remove bubbles in the nozzles and dust and
other foreign particles.
c) Ink supply function

The suction pump of the purge unit operates together with the ink supply valve to supply ink to the printhead during the initial filling and ink level adjustment.
2-17
Chapter 2
Details of the cleaning function are shown in the table below.
Name of Service mode or

Cleaning mode PRINT INF Operation Description of cleaning
(Name of Main Menu)
Cleaning 1 CLN-A-1/CLN-M-1 Normal cleaning Removes dried ink from nozzles, thick ink accumulated on the
(Head Cleaning A) face, and paper particles.
Cleaning 2 CLN-A-2 Ink level adjustment and cleaning Adjust the ink level in the head by suction, and then performs
normal cleaning.
Cleaning 3 CLN-A-3 Initial filling ink Fills the empty tube (during initial installation) with ink, and
then performs normal cleaning.
Cleaning 4 CLN-M-4 Ink drainage for head replacement Drains ink to replace the head (drains only the ink in the head).
(Replace P.head)
Cleaning 5 CLN-M-5 Ink drainage for secondary transport Drains ink from the head and tube for secondary transport.
(Move Printer)
Cleaning 6 CLN-A-6/CLN-M-6 Normal (strong) cleaning Performs suction stronger than when adjusting the ink filling
(Head Cleaning B) amount in the head or normal cleaning to unclog nozzles.
Cleaning 7 CLN-A-7 Aging Performs idle ejection after replacement of the head.
Cleaning 10 CLN-A-10 Ink filling after secondary transport Fills the empty tube (during installation after secondary
(Move Printer) transport) with ink, and performs normal cleaning.
Cleaning 11 CLN-A-11 Ink filling after head replacement Performs normal cleaning after head replacement and ink
filling.
Cleaning 15 CLN-A-15 Dot count suction Performs suction to remove ink adhered to dried nozzles and
thick ink accumulated on the face when the dot count reaches
the prescribed value.
Cleaning 16 CLN-A-16 Precipitated ink agitation Performs the agitation (ink supply valve open/close) operation
to prevent the ink ingredient from precipitating.
Cleaning 17 CLN-A-17 Cleaning (weak) Performs cleaning weaker than normal cleaning to unclog
nozzles.
2-18
Chapter 2
Cleaning operation timings are as follows.
Ink consumption
Printer status Cleaning operation
(typ.)*1
Standby The following times elapsed since the last section of Cleaning 2, 3, 6, 10. Cleaning 6 (Normal 5g
- Color: At least 720 hours (strong) Cleaning)
- Black: At least 3840 to 11520 hours
At initial installation and 96 hours elapsed since the last session of Cleaning 16 Cleaning 16 -
(Precipitated ink
agitation)
1 hour elapsed capped with a specified number of dots discharged per chip completed after last Wiping + Idle ejection 0.013g
wiping
Power-on At initial installation Cleaning 3 (initial filling 50g
ink)
Both heads and inks The print operation has completed. The following times elapsed since Cleaning 6 (Normal 5g
available the last section of Cleaning 2, 3, 6, (strong) Cleaning)
10.
- Color: At least 720 hours
- Black: At least 3840 to 11520
hours
At least 96 hours elapsed since the Cleaning 16 -
last session of Cleaning 16 (Precipitated ink
agitation)
At least 1 hour elapsed capped with Wiping + Idle ejection 0.013g
a specified number of dots
discharged per chip completed after
last wiping
Print operation aborted (uncapped) Up to 72 hours elapsed after an Cleaning 1 (Normal 1g
and CR error occurring abort Cleaning)
Over 72 hours elapsed after an abort Cleaning 6 (Normal 5g
(strong) Cleaning)
Print operation aborted (uncapped) and no CR error occurring Cleaning 11 (ink filling 10g
after head replacement)
No heads are available Cleaning 10 (ink filling 60g
on secondary transport)
Power off Specified number of dots discharged per chip completed since the last session of wiping Wiping + Idle ejection 0.013g
Before the Less than 168 hours elapsed capped Idle ejection 0.013g
start of Before printing in the wake of an error occurrence Cleaning 1 (Normal 1g
printing Cleaning)
Printing Before scanning while printing Idle ejection (+Wiping) - (0.013g)
After the end A specified number of dots (color) discharged per chip since the last session of Cleaning 2, 3, 6 or 1 Cleaning 6 (Normal 5g
of printing (strong) Cleaning)
A specified number of dots discharged per chip after the last session of wiping Wiping + Idle ejection 0.013g
3 minutes elapsed since the last session of capping Wiping + Idle ejection 0.013g
0.5 to 3 hours elapsed uncapped since the last session of Cleaning 1, 2, 3, 6 or 10 Idle ejection MBK:0.5g(X2)
When the Manual Cleaning (Head Cleaning A) Cleaning 1 (Normal 1g
Head Cleaning)
Cleaning Manual cleaning (Head cleaning B) Cleaning 6 (Normal 5g
menu choice (strong) Cleaning)
is executed
When the After and before head replacement Cleaning 4 (ink drainage 20g
Replace for head replacement) +
Printhead Cleaning 11 (ink filling
menu choice after head replacement)
is executed
When the After the Move Printer menu choice is executed Cleaning 5 (ink drainage 10g
Move Printer for secondary transport)
menu choice After power-on at secondary installation After power-on at 60g
is executed secondary installation
*1: Quantities of ink consumption by nozzle train
2-19
Chapter 2
2.3.2.5.2 Structure of Purge Unit

0023-1476
a) Cap unit
The cap unit is used to cap the printhead nozzles during capping and cleaning. The portion that touches the face plate is made from rubber. Two caps are arranged
for the printhead (six arrays of nozzles) installed in the carriage.
During cleaning, the caps used for both suction and capping are used to suck ink from the printhead using the suction pump.
During capping, the caps are raised by the purge motor to cover the printhead when the carriage has moved to the home position, thus protecting the nozzles.
Carriage Lock Pin

Wiper Blade
Cap Pump Cam Sensor
Glycerin Tank
Pump Encoder Sensor
Purge Motor
F-2-17
2-20
Chapter 2
b) Wiper unit
The wiper unit operated by the purge motor wipes the printhead face.
The printer is provided with a pair of wiper blades for better wiping performance.
The wiping operation is performed by a "slide wipe" method by which the purge motor rotates (in the normal direction) to slide the wiper blade via the wiper cam.
It is performed by a constant-speed movement toward the front of the printer as viewed from the printer front.
The wiper blade, which is positioned at right angles to the printhead, wipes the entire printhead face, and then the narrow blade is used to wipe the nozzle arrays.
After wiping, the wipe blades are cleaned before they are set at the wiping position so that the maximum wiping performance is obtained.
During the wiper blade cleaning, the ink removed form the head is rubbed off by the in scraper.
Absorbent material soaked with glycerin is pressed against the wiper blades to enhance the wiping performance. The amount of glycerin used (tank capacity: 50
ml) is managed by counting the number of times the wiper blade is pressed against the absorbent material. When this count reaches to the specified values, either
a replacement warning (continued print available) or replacement required indication (service call error) is issued.
Glycerin Absorbent Material Ink Scraper

Printhead
Glycerin Tank Wiper Blade
Blade Holder
Cap Wiper Cam

F-2-18
c) Pump unit
This printer uses tube pumps (suction pumps) that press on the ink tubes using rollers to produce negative pressure, thus sucking ink.
Two rollers are used to press on a single tube one after another to control the amount of ink sucked.
The roller rotation timing is detected by the pump cam sensor, and the amount of rotation is controlled by the driving of the purge motor.
Pump Cam Sensor

Cap
Pump Unit
Suction Pump
Cap
Push Rollers Ink Tubes
To Maintenance Cartridge
Purge Motor
Pump Encoder Sensor
F-2-19
2-21
Chapter 2
2.3.2.6 Maintenance Cartridge

2.3.2.6.1 Maintenance Cartridge
0023-2484
a) Maintenance cartridge
The maintenance cartridge can store waste ink.
b) Detection of waste ink in maintenance cartridge

The quantity of waste ink in the maintenance cartridge is measured by counting dots.
When the quantity of the waste ink reaches approximately 80% of the cartridge capacity, the warning message "Check maint cartridge capacity" is displayed to tell
that the maintenance cartridge is nearly full.
Printing may continue even when the warning message is displayed.
When the quantity of the waste ink reaches approximately 100% of the cartridge capacity, a replacement prompt error message is displayed, telling that the main-
tenance cartridge is full.
When the printer determines that the maintenance cartridge is full, it shuts down even while it is printing.
The printer will remain inoperable until the maintenance cartridge is replaced.
MEMO:
The maintenance cartridge houses EEPROM, so that main controller PCB can control the status of the maintenance cartridge by writing to and reading from the
EEPROM content.
There is no need to initialize the counter information, therefore, when the maintenance cartridge is replaced.
F-2-20
2-22
Chapter 2
2.3.2.7 Air Flow

2.3.2.7.1 Air Flow
0023-2485
This printer is equipped with a mist fan to collect the ink mist and a suction fan to suck the media to the platen.
The ink floating in air or spattered from the media during printing passes through the suction port because of the air flow inside the printer and is collected inside
the mist fan and mist exhaust duct.
There is a duct below the platen and the ink mist in the duct is collected in the platen suction duct by the platen suction fan.
Platen Shutter
Platen Suction Fan
Mist Fan
Platen Exhaust Duct Mist Exhaust Duct

F-2-21
There are two ducts below the platen and each is connected to the platen suction fan. One comes from the borderless printing ink receiving grooves and the other
comes from the suction port.
The duct from the borderless printing ink receiving grooves has a shutter unit in front of the platen suction fan. This controls the suction pressure from the borderless
printing ink receiving grooves according to the paper size and number of print passes with the shutter opening amount of the shutter unit in order to prevent ink
flowing and smearing at the edge of paper during borderless printing.
The shutter position (opening) is detected by the shutter HP sensor and the rotation of the shutter motor.
2-23
Chapter 2
The shutter is controlled at the following six positions.
To Platen Suction Fan To Platen Suction Fan

[4]
[5]
[3]
[6]
[1]
From borderless From borderless
printing ink printing ink
receiving grooves receiving grooves
of BP [2] [2] of HP
Borderless printing Bordered printing
Shutter Motor
Shutter HP Sensor
Shutter
F-2-22
Shutter
Shutter opening During borderless printing During bordered printing
position
[1] Only HP side open Yes (17 inch or shorter
media)
[2] Fully open Yes (B2 or larger media) Yes
[3] Fully close Yes
[4] 1/4 open Yes
[5] 1/2 open Yes
[6] 3/4 open Yes
2-24
Chapter 2
2.3.3 Paper Path

2.3.3.1 Outline
2.3.3.1.1 Overview of Paper Path
0023-2511
The paper pass comprises an roll unit, a feed roller, a pinch roller pressure drive unit that pressurizes and depressurizes the pinch roller, a roll holder drive unit that
drives the roll holder and sensors that detect the transport status of paper to feed paper in one way, and transport and eject the paper.
Pinch Roller Media

Multi Sensor
Upper Delivery Guide
Cutter
Roll Encoder Sensor
Platen Feed Roller Paper Detection Sensor

F-2-23
2-25
Chapter 2
2.3.3.2 Paper Path

2.3.3.2.1 Structure of Feed Roller Unit
0023-2512
Feed Roller Encoder Sensor

Feed Motor Pinch Roller

Feed Roller
F-2-24
a) Feed roller Unit
The feed roller unit consists of media feeding mechanisms such as feed rollers driven by the feed motor and the pinch roller unit operating in conjunction with the
feed rollers.
While being held flat on the platen, media is fed horizontally under the printhead.
b) Detection Unit
The feed roller unit has a sensor that detects the media feed status and a sensor that detects the status of the mechanisms that constitute the paper path.
2-26
Chapter 2
Release Lever Lock Lever

Release Lever Lock Sensor
Release Lever Lock Solenoid
Roll Motor Roll Holder
Release Lever
Roll Media Drive Unit
Roll Encoder Sensor
F-2-25
c) Roll media drive unit
The paper feed unit has a roll media drive unit to prevent sagging and skewing of media when feeding a roll media. The roll media drive unit feeds/rewinds the roll
media by rotating the roll holder with the forward/reverse rotation of the roll motor.
The roll encoder sensor of the roll media drive unit detects the rotation of the roll holder during roll media feed, and assumes the end of roll media is reached when
the roll holder stops rotating.
d) Release lever unit

The release lever is used to release the pinch roller pressure when setting the media or fixing jam.
The release lever lock solenoid turns ON and locks the release lever with the release lever lock lever so that the pinch roller pressure cannot be released while
printing.
The release lever lock status is detected with the release lever lock sensor.
2-27
Chapter 2
2.3.3.3 Cutter Unit

2.3.3.3.1 Structure of Cutter Unit
0023-2516
When a roll media is used, the cutter unit cuts the leading end of the roll on loading and also cuts the roller on paper ejection. Whether cutting takes place or not
depends on the relevant printer driver setting in the main menu.
The cutter in the cutter unit stands by at the cutter home position, except when a roll media is cut. Power imparted from the cutter motor to the cutter via a circular
belt drives it to travel from right to left for cutting.
Cutter Left Position Sensor

Cutter Motor
Cutter HP Sensor
Cutter
Cutter Unit
F-2-26
2-28
Chapter 2
2.4 Printer Electrical System
2.4.1 Outline
2.4.1.1 Overview
0031-2541
The printer electrical system consists of the main controller PCB and power supply PCB which are mounted on the rear side of the printer, the carriage PCB and
printhead which are mounted in the carriage, and other electrical components such as the operation panel, sensors, and motors.
The main controller PCB manages the image data processing and the entire electrical system, and controls relay PCBs and driver functions.
Main Controller PCB
Carriage PCB
Operation Panel PCB
Power Supply
F-2-27
2-29
Chapter 2
Power Supply PCB Main Controller PCB
AC inlet +26V generation function IC1501/IC1701

IC1601-IC1603
+21.5V generation function Power supply control function
BATS801 IC601-IC604 IC301/IC302

Lithium Battery SDRAM SDRAM
IC803 IC802
RTC EEPROM
IC1
Host Computer
IC2501 Interface control function
LAN Controller
Image data control function
Linear Encoder detection function
Heat pulse control function
IC701 FLASH ROM

Carriage PCB
Linear Encoder
Sensor IC2
Printhead Operation panel control function Operation Panel
IC401
PWM control function Fans
DI Sensor reading
EEPROM
control function
Remaining ink level
detection function
Temperature reading Ink Tank ROM PCB
control function
LED control function
Thermistor Relay PCB
EEPROM contol function IC1 EEPROM

Multi Sensor
IC503/IC504 Sensor detection function
EEPROM Sensors
Multi Sensor
control function
Solenoid control function Solenoids
Motor control function
IC4101/IC4200
IC4300/IC4401 Motors
Motor Driver
F-2-28
2-30
Chapter 2
2.4.2 Main Controller
2.4.2.1 Main controller PCB components

0023-2542
IC803
IC4101
IC802
IC4103 BATS801
IC1201
IC4200
IC604
IC703
IC2 IC603
IC1
IC701
IC4300
IC602
IC601
IC4401
IC2750 IC301 IC302
IC3001
F-2-29
a) ASIC (IC1/IC2)
The ASIC (IC1/IC2) with a 32/16-bit internal bus is driven in sync with the 165/66 MHz external clock. It supports the following functions:
Image processing unit

This unit converts the RGB multi-value image data or CMYK multi-value data received from the host computer through the interface connector to the binary image
data for the ink colors used.
DMA controller
This controller control DMA transfer of the data transferred through the input interfaces as well as DMA transfer of the data stored in the DIMM.
Image data generation/output function

This function generates image data for color printing from the received image data and the mask pattern (corresponding to print mode) stored in the FLASH ROM,
and stored the generated image data in DIMM. It also outputs the generated image data to the carriage PCB.
Interrupt controller
This controller receives and processes internal interrupts and external interrupts from the USB, image processing unit, and expansion card slot.
Timer function
Even when the printer is turned off, the timer function is held on using the RTC(IC803) and lithium battery(BATS801) to assist the cleaning function.
When the power cord is plugged to the outlet, power is supplied to the RTC and therefore the lithium battery power is not consumed.
Heat Enable signal control function

This function uses the pulse width to perform variable control of the time of application of the Heat Enable signal to the nozzle heater board for each printhead
nozzle array.
Linear scale count function
This function reads the linear scale when the carriage moves, thus generating the ink discharge timing. It also counts the linear scale timing cycle using the reference
clock to measure the carriage moving speed.
Dot count function

This function controls the discharge dots used as the information for Heat Enable signal control, maintenance jet control, cleaning control, and remaining ink level
for each nozzle array.
Operation panel control function

This function controls serial communication with the operation panel.
PWM control function

This function controls driving of the suction fan and mist fan as well as the temperature of the printhead.
Remaining ink level detection function

This function detects the remaining level of each color of ink based on the signal received from the hollow needle mounted in the ink tank unit.
LED control function

This function controls the LEDs on the ink tank unit.
I/O port function

This function controls input signals from sensors.
Power ON/OFF control function

This function controls turning on/off of the drive power (26 V and 21.5 V) supplied from the power supply PCB.
Head DI sensor read control function

This function controls read operation by the head DI sensor.
Multi sensor control function

This function controls the LED, adjusts the gain, and controls obtainment of the reading for the multi sensor.
EEPROM control function

This function controls the EEPROMs of individual ink tanks, the maintenance cartridge EEPROM, the EEPROM on the maintenance cartridge relay PCB, and the
head EEPROM in addition to the on-board EEPROM.
Motor control function
2-31
Chapter 2
This function controls the carriage motor, feed motor, valve motor (L)/(R), shutter motor, purge motor, lift motor, roll motor and cutter motor based on the input
signals from sensors.
b) Driver IC (IC4101/4103)
This IC generates a carriage motor control signal based on the control signal from the ASIC.
c) Driver IC (IC4200)
This IC generates a feed motor control signal based on the control signal from the ASIC.
d) Driver IC (IC4300)
This IC generates purge motor and cutter motor control signals based on the control signal from the ASIC.
e) Driver IC (IC4401)
This IC generates roll motor and valve motor (L)/(R) control signals based on the control signal from the ASIC.
f) Driver IC (IC2750)
This IC generates a shutter motor control signal based on the control signal from the ASIC.
g) Driver IC (IC3001)
This IC generates a lift motor control signal based on the control signal from the ASIC.
h) DIMMs (IC301, IC302, IC601, IC602, IC603, IC604)

The DIMM comprising a 512-MB DDR-SDRAM (IC301/IC302) and 256-MB SDR-SDRAM (IC601/IC602/IC603/IC604) is connected to the 32-bit data bus to
be used as a work area.
During print data reception, it is also used as an image buffer.
It cannot be expanded.
i) FLASH ROM (IC701/IC703)
A 128-MB/64-MB flash ROM (IC701/IC703) is connected to the 8-bit data bus to store the printer control program.
j) EEPROM (IC802)
The 256-KB EEPROM stores various setting values, adjustment values, log data, counter values related to the user/servicing.
MEMO:
After replacement of the main controller PCB, the printer must be started up in the service mode to copy over the setting and adjustment values to the new PCB
properly (the service mode will be switched to the PCB replacement mode automatically).
2.4.2.2 Connectors and Pin Arrangement of Main controller PCB

0032-0623
J4101
1
J3602 1
J1201
J1801 J4102
1
1 J3601 1 1
1
J4201
1
1 J3401 1
J3901 J1001
1
J3301
1
1 J3302
J4501
1
1
J3202J3201
1
J2601
1
J33031 J3001 1 J2951 1 J2801
F-2-30
T-2-1
J1001 (USB)
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 VBUS IN USB VBUS(+5V)
2 D- IN/OUT USB data (-)
3 D+ IN/OUT USB data (+)
4 GND - USB GND
5 GND - GND (Connector shell)
6 GND - GND (Connector shell)
T-2-2
J1201 (Network)
1 TX+ OUT Ethernet data TX line (+)
2 TX- OUT Ethernet data TX line (-)
3 RX+ IN Ethernet data RX line (+)
4 - - Not used
2-32
Chapter 2
J1201 (Network)
5 - - Not used
6 RX- IN Ethernet data RX line (-)
7 - - Not used
8 - - Not used
9 GREEN_LED_C OUT Link LED (green:100Mb/s) cathode terminal
10 GREEN_LED_A OUT Link LED (green:100Mb/s) anode terminal
11 YELLOW_LED_C OUT Link LED (yellow:10Mb/s) cathode terminal
12 YELLOW_LED_A OUT Link LED (yellow:10Mb/s) anode terminal
T-2-3
J1801 (Connect to Power supply)

1 PW_CONT OUT Normal/power saving switch signal
2 VM(+32V) IN Power supply (+32V)
3 VM(+32V) IN Power supply (+32V)
4 VMGND - GND
5 VMGND - GND
6 VH(+32V) IN Power supply (+32V)
7 VH(+32V) IN Power supply (+32V)
8 VHGND - GND
9 VHGND - GND
10 PW_ENB(VH_ENB) OUT VH power supply ON/OFF signal
T-2-4
J2601 (Connect to Operation panel)

1 POWER_ON IN Power switch signal
2 GND - GND
3 +5.1V OUT Power supply (+5.1V)
4 BUZZER OUT Buzzer control signal
5 PDO OUT Panel IC control signal
6 +5.1V OUT Power supply (+5.1V)
7 PDI OUT Panel IC data signal
8 EX_HDD_LED - N.C
9 PRESET* OUT Panel IC reset signal
10 GND - GND
11 PCK OUT Panel IC clock signal
12 PANEL5V_ON OUT LED backlight power supply (+5V)
13 PCS* OUT Panel chip select signal
T-2-5
J2801 (Purge motor, Pump encoder sensor, Pump cam sensor, Paper detection sensor, Lift cam sensor, Carriage HP sensor, Pinch roller pressure release
switch)
1 PUMPM_OUTA OUT Purge motor drive signal A
2 PUMPM_OUTB OUT Purge motor drive signal B
3 PUMP_ENCB IN Pump encoder sensor output signal B
4 SNS5V_FU1 OUT Power supply (+5V)
5 PUMP_ENCA IN Pump encoder sensor output signal A
6 GND - GND
7 SNS3V_FU1 OUT Power supply (+3.3V)
8 GND - GND
9 PUMP_HP_SNS* IN Pump cam sensor output signal
10 GND - GND
11 LFPE(MEDIA)_SNS* IN Paper detection sensor output signal
12 MEDIA5V OUT Power supply (+5V)
14 GND - GND
15 LIFT_HP_SNS* IN Lift cam sensor output signal
17 GND - GND
18 CR_HP_SNS* IN Carriage HP sensor output signal
19 RELEASE_LEV_OPEN_SNS* IN Pinch roller pressure release switch output signal
20 GND - GND
2-33
Chapter 2
T-2-6
J2951 (Head management sensor, Shutter HP sensor, Shutter motor, Platen suction fan)
1 APCCHK IN Head management sensor unit LED current output detection signal
2 FUTO_MONITOR(N.C.) - N.C
3 GND - GND
4 FUTO_CLMP* OUT Head management sensor unit clamp signal
5 FUTO_ON* OUT Head management sensor unit LED ON/OFF signal
6 SNS5V OUT Power supply (+5V)
7 FUTO_CMP* IN Head management sensor unit light shading detection signal
9 GND - GND
10 HUSOKU_HP_SNS* IN Shutter HP sensor output signal
11 VM_26V OUT Power supply (+26V)
12 HUSOKUM_OUTA OUT Shutter motor drive signal A
13 HUSOKUM_OUTAX OUT Shutter motor drive signal AX
14 HUSOKUM_OUTB OUT Shutter motor drive signal B
15 HUSOKUM_OUTBX OUT Shutter motor drive signal BX
16 FAN_VM(26.5V) OUT Power supply (+26.5V)
17 PLATEN_FAN_LOCK* IN Platen suction fan lock signal
18 PLATEN_FAN_PWM OUT Platen suction fan PWM control signal
19 GND - GND
T-2-7
J3001 (Lift motor, Roll motor, Roll encoder sensor, Release lever lock sensor, Release lever lock solenoid)
1 VM_26V(26.5V) OUT Power supply (+26.5V)
2 LIFTM0_A OUT Lift motor drive signal A
3 LIFTM2_AX_N0 OUT Lift motor drive signal AX
4 LIFTM1_B OUT Lift motor drive signal B
5 LIFTM3_BX_N0 OUT Lift motor drive signal BX
6 TP_ROLL_TRNSM_AP OUT Roll motor drive signal AP
7 TP_ROLL_TRNSM_AM OUT Roll motor drive signal AM
8 TP_ROLL_TRANSM_BP OUT Roll motor drive signal BP
9 TP_ROLL_TRNSM_BM OUT Roll motor drive signal BM
10 GND - GND
11 ROLL_KEI_ENCA IN Roll encoder sensor output signal A
13 ROLL_KEI_ENCB IN Roll encoder sensor output signal B
15 GND - GND
16 RELEASE_LEV_MEM_SNS* IN Release lever lock sensor output signal
17 VM_26V OUT Power supply (+26.5V)
18 RELEASE_LEV_LOCK_SOL* OUT Release lever lock solenoid drive signal
T-2-8
J3201 (Ink detection sensor (R), Ink tank cover switch (R), Cutter HP sensor)
1 GND - GND
2 INK_SNS3 IN Ink detection sensor output signal 3
8 TANK_COVER_SW_R* IN Ink tank cover switch (R) output signal
9 GND - GND
11 GND - GND
12 CUTTER_R_SNS* OUT Cutter HP sensor output signal
T-2-9
J3202 (Ink supply valve open/closed detection sensor (R), Air passage valve open/closed detection sensor (R), valve motor (R), Ink tank ROM PCB (R))
2-34
Chapter 2
J3202 (Ink supply valve open/closed detection sensor (R), Air passage valve open/closed detection sensor (R), valve motor (R), Ink tank ROM PCB (R))
2 GND - GND
3 SUPPLY_BEN_R_SNS* IN Ink supply valve open/closed detection sensor (R) output signal
5 GND - GND
6 TAIKI_BEN_R_SNS* OUT Air passage valve open/closed detection sensor (R) output signal
7 INKBEN_R_OUTB OUT Valve motor (R) drive signal B
8 INKBEN_R_OUTA OUT Valve motor (R) drive signal A
9 TANK_DAT3 IN/OUT Ink tank data signal 3
11 TANK_3V OUT Power supply (+3.3V)
13 GND - GND
14 TANK_CLK OUT Ink tank clock signal
T-2-10
J3301 (Ink detection sensor (L), Ink tank cover switch (L))
1 GND - GND
8 TANK_COVER_SW_L* IN Ink tank cover switch (L) output signal
9 GND - GND
T-2-11
J3302 (Ink supply valve open/closed detection sensor (L), Air passage valve open/closed detection sensor (L), Valve motor (L), Ink tank ROM PCB (L))
2 GND - GND
3 SUPPLY_BEN_L_SNS* IN Ink supply valve open/closed detection sensor (L) output signal
5 GND - GND
6 TAIKI_BEN_L_SNS* OUT Air passage valve open/closed detection sensor (L) output signal
7 INKBEN_L_OUTB OUT Valve motor (L) drive signal B
8 INKBEN_L_OUTA OUT Valve motor (L) drive signal A
13 GND - GND
14 TANK_CLK OUT Ink tank clock signal
15 N.C. - N.C
T-2-12
J3303 (Connect to Maintenance cartridge relay PCB)

1 MENT_ROM_SDA IN/OUT Maintenance cartridge rom control signal (data)
2 MENT_ROM_SCL IN/OUT Maintenance cartridge rom control signal (clock)
3 GND - GND
T-2-13
J3401 (Connect to Carriage PCB J201)

1 VHGND - GND
2 VHGND - GND
3 VHGND - GND
4 VHGND - GND
5 VH_MONI1 IN VH control signal
6 VH OUT Power supply (+21.5V)
2-35
Chapter 2

8 VHGND - GND
9 H3V OUT Power supply (+3V)
11 VHGND - GND
22 VHGND - GND
T-2-14

1 FFC_SLANT_DET_SNS2* IN FFC disconnection detection signal 2
2 GAP_SNS2 IN Multi sensor head height (GAP) detection signal 2
4 EDGE_SNS IN Multi sensor paper edge detection signal
5 GND - GND
6 VH_DIS OUT VH select signal
7 GND - GND
8 ENCODER_A IN Carriage encoder output signal A
9 ENCODER_B IN Carriage encoder output signal B
10 GND - GND
11 H1-B-DATA-3-EV OUT Even head data signal 3(B)
12 GND - GND
13 H1-B-HE-3* OUT Head heat enable signal 3(B)
14 GND - GND
15 H1-C-DATA-4-EV OUT Even head data signal 4(C)
16 GND - GND
18 GND - GND
19 H1-C-HE-5* OUT Head heat enable signal 5(C)
20 GND - GND
21 H1-C-DATA-5-OD OUT Odd head data signal 5(C)
22 GND - GND
23 H1-D-DATA-7-OD OUT Odd head data signal 7(D)
24 GND - GND
26 GND - GND
27 H1-D-HE-6* OUT Head heat enable signal 6(D)
28 GND - GND
29 H1-D-DATA-6-EV OUT Even head data signal 6(D)
30 GND - GND
32 GND - GND
33 H1-D-HE-7* OUT Head heat enable signal 7(D)
34 GND - GND
35 H1-E-DATA-8-EV OUT Even head data signal 8(E)
36 GND - GND
38 GND - GND
39 H1-E-HE-9* OUT Head heat enable signal 9(E)
40 GND - GND
41 H1-F-DATA-10-EV OUT Even head data signal 10(F)
42 GND - GND
2-36
Chapter 2

44 GND - GND
45 H1-F-HE-11* OUT Head heat enable signal 11(F)
46 GND - GND
47 H1-F-DATA-11-OD OUT Odd head data signal 11(F)
48 GND - GND
49 IO-ASIC-SDA IN/OUT Head ROM control signal (data)
50 FFC-SLANT-DET-SNS1* IN FFC disconnection detection signal 1
T-2-15

1 FFC_SLANT_DET_SNS4* IN FFC disconnection detection signal 4
2 H1-DSOUT1 IN Head temperature output 1
3 H1-DSOUT2 IN Head temperature output 2
4 COLOR_SNS IN Multi sensor density detection signal
5 GND - GND
6 H1-DLD_LICC2 OUT Head analogue switch latch signal
7 H1-DATA_LICC2 OUT Head analogue switch data signal
8 H1-DASLK_LICC2 OUT Head analogue switch clock signal
9 H-DASH_LICC2 OUT Analogue switch A/D triggar signal
10 GND - GND
12 GND - GND
13 H1-C-HE-4* OUT Head heat enable signal 4(C)
14 GND - GND
15 H1-B-DATA-3-OD OUT Odd head data signal 3(B)
16 GND - GND
18 GND - GND
19 H1-B-HE-2* OUT Head heat enable signal 2(B)
20 GND - GND
21 H1-A-DATA-1-OD OUT Odd head data signal 1(A)
22 GND - GND
24 GND - GND
25 H1-A-HE-0* OUT Head heat enable signal 0(A)
26 GND - GND
27 H1-A-DATA-0-EV OUT Even head data signal 0(A)
28 GND - GND
30 GND - GND
31 H1-A-HE-1* OUT Head heat enable signal 1(A)
32 GND - GND
34 GND - GND
35 H1-LT* OUT Head latch signal
36 GND - GND
37 H1-CLK OUT Head clock signal
38 GND - GND
39 H1-E-HE-8* OUT Head heat enable signal 8(E)
40 GND - GND
42 GND - GND
43 H1-F-HE-10* OUT Head heat enable signal 10(F)
44 GND - GND
45 H1-E-DATA-9-OD OUT Odd head data signal 9(E)
46 GND - GND
48 GND - GND
49 IO-ASIC_SCL IN/OUT Head ROM control signal (clock)
50 FFC_SLANT_DET_SES3* IN FFC disconnection detection signal 3
2-37
Chapter 2
T-2-16
J3901 (Feed roller encoder sensor, Feed roller HP sensor, Temperature/humidity detection sensor)
1 GND - GND
2 LF_ENCA IN Feed roller encoder sensor output signal A
4 LF_ENCB IN Feed roller encoder sensor output signal B
6 GND - GND
7 LF_HP_SNS* IN Feed roller HP sensor output signal
8 BACKUP_3V OUT Power supply (+5V)
9 RH2_OUT IN Temperature/humidity detection sensor output signal
10 GND - GND
11 TH2_OUT IN Thermistor output signal
T-2-17
J4101 (Carriage motor)

1 CR_HWP IN Carriage motor hole device W-phase + signal
2 CR_HWM IN Carriage motor hole device W-phase - signal
3 CR_W OUT Carriage motor W-phase drive signal
4 CR_HVM IN Carriage motor hole device V-phase - signal
5 CR_U OUT Carriage motor U-phase drive signal
6 GND - GND
7 CR_V OUT Carriage motor V-phase drive signal
8 SNS5V Power supply (+5V)
9 N.C. - N.C
10 CR_HVP IN Carriage motor hole device V-phase + signal
11 CR_HUM IN Carriage motor hole device U-phase - signal
12 CR_HUP IN Carriage motor hole device U-phase + signal
T-2-18
J4102 (Upper cover lock switch)

1 VM OUT Power supply (+32V)
2 CR_VM IN Upper cover lock switch output signal
T-2-19
J4201 (Feed motor)

1 LF_OUTB(LF_AP) OUT Feed motor driver signal B
2 LF_OUTA(LF_AM) OUT Feed motor driver signal A
T-2-20
J4501 (Upper cover lock solenoid, Cutter left position sensor, Cutter motor, Mist fan)
1 VM_26V(26.5V) OUT Power supply (+26.5V)
2 DCOVER_SOL OUT Upper cover lock solenoid drive signal
4 GND - GND
5 CUTTER_L_SNS* OUT Cutter left position sensor signal
6 CUTTERM_OUTB OUT Cutter motor driver signal B
7 CUTTERM_OUTA OUT Cutter motor driver signal A
8 MIST_FAN_VM(26.5V) OUT Power supply (+26V)
9 MIST_FAN_LOCK* OUT Mist fan drive signal
10 N.C.(MIST_FAN_PWM) - N.C
11 GND - GND
12 N.C. - N.C
2-38
Chapter 2
2.4.3 Carriage Relay PCB
2.4.3.1 Carriage PCB components

0031-2545
IC503
IC504
IC401
F-2-31
a) Latch ICs (IC401)
DI sensor reading control function

This function obtains the DI sensor value in the printhead and head rank for each color and sends it to the main controller PCB based on the control signals from
the main controller.
Environmental temperature reading control
This function sends the environmental temperature detected by the thermistor on the board based t the main controller PCB based on the control signals from the
main controller PCB.
Image data relay function

This function relays the image data from the main controller PCB to the printhead.
The function for processing image data is not supported.
b) Multi sensor control ICs (IC503 and IC504)

These ICs are used to generate the multi sensor LED control signal and adjust the gain.
2-39
Chapter 2
2.4.3.2 Connectors and Pin Arrangement of Carriage PCB

0031-2548
J201 J202
1 1
J101 1
1
J501
J102
1
J103
F-2-32
T-2-21
J101 (Connect to Main controller PCB J3601)

1 FFC-SLANT-DET-SNS1* OUT FFC disconnection detection signal 1
2 IO-ASIC-SDA IN/OUT Head ROM control signal (data)
3 GND - GND
4 H1-F-DATA-11-OD IN Odd head data signal 11(F)
5 GND - GND
6 H1-F-HE-11* IN Head heat enable signal 11(F)
7 GND - GND
8 H1-F-DATA-11-EV IN Even head data signal 11(F)
9 GND - GND
10 H1-F-DATA-10-EV IN Even head data signal 10(F)
11 GND - GND
12 H1-E-HE-9* IN Head heat enable signal 9(E)
13 GND - GND
14 H1-E-DATA-9-EV IN Even head data signal 9(E)
15 GND - GND
16 H1-E-DATA-8-EV IN Even head data signal 8(E)
17 GND - GND
18 H1-D-HE-7* IN Head heat enable signal 7(D)
19 GND - GND
20 H1-D-DATA-7-EV IN Even head data signal 7(D)
21 GND - GND
22 H1-D-DATA-6-EV IN Even head data signal 6(D)
23 GND - GND
24 H1-D-HE-6* IN Head heat enable signal 6(D)
25 GND - GND
26 H1-D-DATA-6-OD IN Odd head data signal 6(D)
27 GND - GND
28 H1-D-DATA-7-OD IN Odd head data signal 7(D)
29 GND - GND
30 H1-C-DATA-5-OD IN Odd head data signal 5(C)
31 GND - GND
32 H1-C-HE-5* IN Head heat enable signal 5(C)
33 GND - GND
34 H1-C-DATA-5-EV IN Even head data signal 5(C)
35 GND - GND
36 H1-C-DATA-4-EV IN Even head data signal 4(C)
37 GND - GND
38 H1-B-HE-3* IN Head heat enable signal 3(B)
39 GND - GND
40 H1-B-DATA-3-EV IN Even head data signal 3(B)
41 GND - GND
42 ENCODER_B OUT Carriage encoder output signal B
43 ENCODER_A OUT Carriage encoder output signal A
44 GND - GND
45 VH_DIS IN VH select signal
46 GAP_FAR_SNS OUT Multi sensor head height (FAR) detection signal
47 GAP_NEAR_SNS OUT Multi sensor head height (NEAR) detection signal
48 GND - GND
49 COLOR_SNS OUT Multi sensor density detection signal
2-40
Chapter 2

50 FFC_SLANT_DET_SNS2* OUT FFC disconnection detection signal 2
T-2-22

1 FFC_SLANT_DET_SES3* OUT FFC disconnection detection signal 3
3 GND - GND
4 H1-E-DATA-8-OD IN Odd head data signal 8(E)
5 GND - GND
6 H1-E-DATA-9-OD IN Odd head data signal 9(E)
7 GND - GND
8 H1-F-HE-10* IN Head heat enable signal 10(F)
9 GND - GND
10 H1-F-DATA-10-OD IN Odd head data signal 10(F)
11 GND - GND
12 H1-E-HE-8* IN Head heat enable signal 8(E)
13 GND - GND
14 H1-CLK IN Head clock signal
15 GND - GND
16 H1-LT* IN Head latch signal
17 GND - GND
18 H1-B-DATA-2-EV IN Even head data signal 2(B)
19 GND - GND
20 H1-A-HE-1* IN Head heat enable signal 1(A)
21 GND - GND
22 H1-A-DATA-1-EV IN Even head data signal 1(A)
23 GND - GND
24 H1-A-DATA-0-EV IN Even head data signal 0(A)
25 GND - GND
26 H1-A-HE-0* IN Head heat enable signal 0(A)
27 GND - GND
28 H1-A-DATA-0-OD IN Odd head data signal 0(A)
29 GND - GND
30 H1-A-DATA-1-OD IN Odd head data signal 1(A)
31 GND - GND
32 H1-B-HE-2* IN Head heat enable signal 2(B)
33 GND - GND
34 H1-B-DATA-2-OD IN Odd head data signal 2(B)
35 GND - GND
36 H1-B-DATA-3-OD IN Odd head data signal 3(B)
37 GND - GND
38 H1-C-HE-4* IN Head heat enable signal 4(C)
39 GND - GND
40 H1-C-DATA-4-OD IN Odd head data signal 4(C)
41 GND - GND
42 H1-DASLK_LICC2 IN Head analogue switch clock signal
43 H1-DLD_LICC2 IN Head analogue switch latch signal
44 H1-DATA_LICC2 IN Head analogue switch data signal
45 H-DASH_LICC2 IN Analogue switch A/D triggar signal
46 GND - GND
47 H1-DSOUT1 OUT Head temperature output 1
48 H1-DSOUT2 OUT Head temperature output 2
49 EDGE_SNS OUT Multi sensor paper edge detection signal
50 FFC_SLANT_DET_SNS4* OUT FFC disconnection detection signal 4
T-2-23
J103 (Printhead)
1 VH2 OUT Power supply
4 VHT12 OUT Head Transistor drive Power supply
2-41
Chapter 2
J103 (Printhead)
6 IO_ASIC_SDA IN/OUT EEPROMcontrol signal (data)
7 IO_ASIC_SCL OUT EEPROMcontrol signal (clock)
8 H3V_1 OUT Power supply (+3V)
9 H1-C-DIA1 IN Head DI sensor signal 1(C)
10 /H1-A-HE-1 OUT Head heat enable signal 8(E)
17 /H1-F-HE-11 OUT Head heat enable signal 11(F)
18 H1-E-DIA1 IN Head DI sensor signal 1(E)
19 H1-D-DIA1 IN Head DI sensor signal 1(D)
20 H3V_1 OUT Power supply
21 H3V_1 OUT Power supply
24 /H1-B-HE-2 OUT Head heat enable signal 2(B)
27 H1-D-DIA2 IN Head DI sensor signal 2(D)
28 /H1-E-HE-8 OUT Head heat enable signal 8(E)
29 H1-E-DIA2 IN Head DI sensor signal 2(E)
30 H1-F-DIA2 IN Head DI sensor signal 2(F)
31 /H1-E-HE-9 OUT Head heat enable signal 9(E)
33 /H1-D-HE-6 OUT Head heat enable signal 6(D)
37 H1-A-DIA2 IN Head DI sensor signal 2(A)
38 H1-B-DIA2 IN Head DI sensor signal 2(B)
39 /H1-C-HE-4 OUT Head heat enable signal 4(C)
42 /H1-F-HE-10 OUT Head heat enable signal 10(F)
44 H1-E-DATA-8-EV OUT Even head data signal 8(F)
46 H1-C-DIA2 IN Head DI sensor signal 2(C)
48 H1-B-DIA1 IN Head DI sensor signal 1(B)
49 /H1-A-HE-0 OUT Head heat enable signal 0(A)
53 GND - GND
54 GND - GND
55 GND - GND
58 GND - GND
60 /H1-C-HE-5 OUT Head heat enable signal 5(C)
61 /H1-B-HE-3 OUT Head heat enable signal 3(B)
62 H1-A-DIA1 IN Head DI sensor signal 1(A)
64 GND - GND
65 GND - GND
66 GND - GND
67 GND - GND
69 H1-F-DIA1 IN Head DI sensor signal 1(F)
70 /H1-D-HE-7 OUT Head heat enable signal 7(D)
2-42
Chapter 2
J103 (Printhead)
71 GND - GND
72 H1_CLK OUT Head data clock signal
73 /H1_LT OUT Head data latch signal
76 GND - GND
77 GND - GND
78 GND - GND
T-2-24

1 VHGND - GND
2 VHGND - GND
3 VHGND - GND
4 VHGND - GND
5 VH IN Power supply (+21.5V)
13 +24V_HV_SW IN Power supply (+24V)
14 SNS5V IN Power supply (+5V)
15 GND - GND
16 +3.3V_H1 IN Power supply (+3.3V)
17 +3.3V_H1 IN Power supply (+3.3V)
18 VH_SW1_ON IN VH control signal
19 21V_H1_VHT IN Power supply (+21V)
20 +5V_VM_IC IN Power supply (+5V)
21 GND - GND
22 VHGND - GND
23 VHGND - GND
24 VHGND - GND
25 VHGND - GND
T-2-25
J202 (Linear encoder sensor)

1 ENCODER_B IN Carriage encoder output signal B
2 GND - GND
3 ENCODER_A IN Carriage encoder output signal A
T-2-26
J501 (Multi sensor)

1 SNS3.3V OUT Power supply (+3.3V)
2 GND - GND
4 IO-ASIC_SDA IN/OUT Head ROM control signal (data)
7 COLOR_SNS IN Multi sensor density detection signal
8 EDGE_SNS IN Multi sensor paper edge detection signal
9 GND - GND
11 THERMISTOR - N.C
12 GND - GND
2-43
Chapter 2
2.4.4 Maintenance Cartridge Relay PCB
2.4.4.1 Maintenance cartridge relay PCB components

0023-2553
IC 1
F-2-33
a) EEPROM (IC1)
The 256-KB EEPROM stores all information written to the EEPROM on the main controller PCB.
2-44
Chapter 2
2.4.5 Power Supply
2.4.5.1 Power supply block diagram

0013-4333
AC inlet
100V to 240V
Operation panel Main controller PCB Power supply
DC power supply +26V

POWER ON Noize filter circuit
control circuit generation circuit
Transformer
+5V/+3.3V +21.5V
generation circuit Rectifying circuit
generation circuit
F-2-34
The power supply converts AC voltages ranging from 100 V to 240 V from the AC inlet to DC voltages for driving the ICs, motor, and others.
The voltage generator circuits include the +26 V generation circuit for driving motors, fans, and sensors and a +21.5 V generator circuit for driving sensors, heads,
logic circuits, and others.
When the power is turned off, +26 V and +21.5 V are reduced to about 12 V and 9 V respectively (power save mode).
Power ON/OFF operation is controlled by the main controller PCB.
2-45
Chapter 2
2.4.5.2 Connectors and Pin Arrangement of Power supply PCB

0031-2549
CN1
CN2
F-2-35
T-2-27
CN1
1 AC(H) - Power supply (AC120V or AC230V)
2 AC(N) - Power supply (AC120V or AC230V)
T-2-28
CN2 (Connect to Main controller PCB)

1 PW_CONT IN Normal/power saving switch signal
2 VM(+32V) OUT Power supply (+32V)
3 VM(+32V) OUT Power supply (+32V)
4 VMGND - GND
5 VMGND - GND
6 VH(+32V) OUT Power supply (+32V)
7 VH(+32V) OUT Power supply (+32V)
8 VHGND - GND
9 VHGND - GND
10 VM_UNIT_PW_ENB IN VH power supply ON/OFF signal
2-46
Chapter 2
2.5 Detection Functions with Sensors
2.5.1 Covers
0023-2554
Ink Tank Cover Switch (L)
Ink Tank Cover Switch (R)
Upper Cover Lock Switch

F-2-36
Upper cover lock switch
The microswitch-based upper cover lock switch detects the open/closed states of the upper cover.
When the upper cover close, the switch is pressed to detect the closed state of the upper cover.
Ink tank cover switch (L)/(R)

The microswitch-based ink tank cover switches detect the open/closed states of left and right ink tank cover.
When an ink tank cover closes, the switch is pressed to detect the closed state of the ink tank cover.
2-47
Chapter 2
2.5.2 Ink passage system

0023-2556
Pump Encoder Sensor Pump Cam Sensor
Air Passage Valve Open/Closed

Detection Sensor (L)/(R)
Ink Detection Sensor (L)/(R) Shutter HP Sensor
Ink Supply Valve Open/Closed

Detection Sensor (L)/(R)
F-2-37
2-48
Chapter 2
Pump cam sensor

The photo-interrupter-type pump cam sensor detects that the sensor light is shielded or unshielded by the rotary cam. The sensor detects the purge unit capping and
wiping states with the combination of the state detected by the pump cam and the state of pump motor rotation control performed by the pump encoder.
Rotary flag Sensor
- Carriage lock - Capping - Air passage valve open - Printing

- Suction - Idle suction - Suction during printing
- Wiping - Carriage lock - Carriage move - Idle ejection

- Air passage - Idle suction
F-2-38
Pump encoder sensor
The pump encoder is a photo-interruptive type sensor. It reads the slits on the pump motor's encoder film to control the amount of pump motor rotation.
Slits
Sensor
F-2-39
Ink supply valve open/closed detection sensor (L)/(R)
The photo-interrupter-type ink supply valve open/closed detection sensor detect the valve cam state.
When the link that operates in conjunction with the ink supply valve cam shields light, this sensor detects that the ink supply valve has been opened.
Air passage valve open/closed detection sensor (L)/(R)

The photo-interrupter-type air passage valve open/closed detection sensor detect the valve cam state.
When the link that operates in conjunction with the subtank air passage valve cam shields light, this sensor detects that the subtank air passage valve has been
opened.
Ink detection sensor (L)/(R)

Presence of absence of ink in the ink tank is detected according to whether the two hollow needles are electrically connected.
When the ink level in the ink tank lowers below the wall around the hollow needle at the air passage, this hollow needle is electrically disconnected form the hollow
needle located on the ink supply side, thus detecting that the printer has run out of ink.
Ink tank
Wall
Rubber plug
Needle (ink supply) Needle(air passage)

F-2-40
Shutter HP sensor
The photointerrupter-type sensor detects the presence of the shutter at the home position.
2-49
Chapter 2
Head management sensor

The photo-transmission-type sensor detects that the printhead is discharging ink.
The carriage moves to and stops at the detection positions for individual nozzle arrays. When the carriage is at a stop, nozzles discharge ink on after another.
The sensor detects each nozzle due to the voltage change caused when ink discharged from the nozzle blocks the sensor light.
Non-discharging nozzle detection is carried out at the following timings:

- After the execution of Cleaning 1, Cleaning 2, Cleaning 3, Cleaning 6 or Cleaning 10
- After the number of copies that has been set by the user menu choice Nozzle Check Frequency have been printed
If more than a specified number of non-discharging nozzles have been located in one session of non-discharging nozzle detection, the normal cleaning sequence is
launched before a second session of non-discharging nozzle detection is conducted. If more than a specified number of non-discharging nozzles are located in the
second session of non-discharging nozzle detection, the normal (High) cleaning session is launched before a third session of non-discharging nozzle detection is
conducted.
If there are at least 320 non-discharging nozzles out of 2560 nozzles as the result of non-discharging nozzle detection, printing is canceled after displaying a message
to replace the head.
However, if service mode: [SERVICE MODE] > [SETTING] > [HEAD DOT INF] is [ON], the following message appears.
If there are at least 30 nozzles unable to correct the non-discharging state and the number of non-discharging nozzles is less than 100 out of 2,560 nozzles as the
result of non-discharging nozzle detection, printing can continue after displaying a message to check the printing. Also, if the number of non-discharging nozzles
is at least 100 but less than 320 nozzles, printing can continue after displaying a message to check the head. And if there are at least 320 non-discharging nozzles,
printing is canceled after displaying a message to replace the head.
Printhead
Nozzle unit
Head management
sensor unit
F-2-41
2-50
Chapter 2
2.5.3 Carriage system

0023-2559
Linear Encoder Sensor
Multi Sensor
Carriage HP Sensor
Lift Cam Sensor
F-2-42
Carriage HP sensor
The photointerrupter-based carriage HP sensor detects the home position of the carriage.
Installed on the right side plate of the printer, the sensor detects an edge of the carriage home position on the carriage unit under carriage movement control.
The printer establishes the carriage home position from the position at which its edge is detected as a reference position.
Linear encoder sensor

Mounted on the back of the carriage, the linear encoder detects the position of the carriage from a slit in the linear scale during its movement.
Lift cam sensor
A photointerrupter-based sensor. After the sensor light is shielded by the flag, the lift motor is driven by a predetermined number of pulses to regulate the separation
between the printheads and platen automatically.
Ambient temperature sensor

The thermostat-based ambient temperature sensor mounted on the carriage PCB detects the ambient temperature to which the carriage is exposed.
The resistance of the thermistor that varies as a function of temperature changes in the printer is transmitted to the main controller via the carriage PCB.
The ambient temperature is used to help calibrate the head temperature sensor and detect abnormal ambient temperatures.
Head temperature sensor
The head temperature sensor detects the temperature of the printhead.
The printhead temperature is transmitted to the main controller via the carriage PCB.
The printhead temperature is used to help control the head drive and detect abnormal printhead temperatures.
Printhead contact detection

The printhead contact detects the status of printhead installation by electrical means.
The contact detects the status of contact from voltage changes in the flexible cables on the carriage side that come into contact with two terminals of the printhead
with remote contact surfaces, the power terminals and GND terminal.
2-51
Chapter 2
Multi sensor
A photo reflective type multi sensor consists of three red LEDs, one red/blue/green LED array, and three light receiving sensors and is used for media end, skew,
and width adjustment, registration adjustment, head height adjustment, and print position adjustment.
Media leading edge detection, head height (GAP) detection, and print density detection are performed by independent LED and sensor.
A clear film media detection (regular reflection) LED and a non-clear film media detection (diffused reflection) LED are used for end of media detection.
The head height is detected by receiving the reflection of red LED from the media with two sensors in a light receiving sensor and calculating the difference in
measurements.
The print density is detected by receiving the reflection of red/blue/green LED array from the media and determining the density of the printed surface.
Light-sensitive sensor
(Paper edge detection) Red LED(GAP)
Light-sensitive sensor Red LED(Paper Edge:
Red LED(Paper edge: (GAP detection) Regular reflection)
Diffused reflection)
Red/Blue/Green LED Array(Density)
Light-sensitive sensor
(Density detection)
Media
Platen
F-2-43
Service mode: After SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > GAP CALIB. has been carried out, pass paper to make sure that it is detected properly.
2-52
Chapter 2
2.5.4 Paper path system

0023-2560
Release Lever Lock Sensor
Roll Encoder Sensor
Feed Roller Encoder Sensor

F-2-44
Feed roller HP sensor
The feed roller HP sensor detects a reference white (transmitted) to black (shielded) transition from the encoder at power on and sets a home position for correcting
the eccentricity of the feed roller.
Feed roller encoder sensor

The feed roller encoder sensor detects the rate of paper transport per revolution of the feed roller from slits in the encoder during driving.
Release lever lock sensor

A photointerrupter type sensor. This sensor detects the release lever lock status when the release lever solenoid turns ON and the sensor flag shields the sensor light.
Roll encoder sensor

A photointerrupter type sensor. This sensor detects the rotation of the roll holder by reading the encoder film at the roll media drive unit.
2-53
Chapter 2
Pinch Roller Pressure

Release Switch
Cutter Left Position Sensor
Cutter HP Sensor
F-2-45
Paper detection sensor
A photoreflective type sensor. When a media is fed from the manual feed unit and roll feed unit, this sensor detects the presence of media by receiving the light
reflected from the media.
Cutter HP sensor
The photointerrupter-type sensor detects the presence of the cutter at the home (rightmost) position.
Cutter left position sensor

The photointerrupter-type sensor detects the presence of the cutter at the leftmost position.
Pinch roller pressure release switch
A micro switch type pinch roller pressure release switch detects the application/release of pinch roller pressure. The pinch roller pressure release switch is depressed
when the media release lever is set and detects the pressure of the pinch roller.
2-54
Chapter 2
2.5.5 Others
0023-2561
Temperature/Humidity Detection Sensor
F-2-46
Temperature/humidity detection sensor
The temperature/humidity detection sensor detects the temperature and relative humidity around the printer to implement head height adjustment, maintenance jet
control, waste ink evaporation calculation and suction fan control on the basis of the temperature and relative humidity thus measured.
2-55
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION
Contents
Contents
3.1 Transporting the Printer .................................................................................................................................................3-1

3.1.1 Transporting the Printer ............................................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1.1 Transporting the Printer ..................................................................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1.2 Reinstalling the Printer ................................................................................................................................................................ 3-4
3.1.2.1 Reinstalling the Printer....................................................................................................................................................................................3-4
Chapter 3
3.1 Transporting the Printer
3.1.1 Transporting the Printer
3.1.1.1 Transporting the Printer

0032-0543
Do not remove the printhead once they are installed, as this may cause the nozzles to dry out or accumulate foreign matter. Also the head must be capped and stay
in the carriage while transporting the printer. In spite of this precaution, shocks incurred during transportation can still damage the printhead. Print the "Nozzle
Check" before moving the printer, print the "Nozzle Check" after installing in a new location, and compare the two printouts. If any deterioration is evident in the
output quality, replace the printhead with new ones.
This subsection describes how to transport the printer.

When moving the printer to another place on the same floor of the building, move it slowly so that it does not receive any shocks. Follow the steps shown in "1.
Moving the printer on the same floor with no difference in grade".
When moving it elsewhere, follow the steps shown in "2. How to transport the printer to a different floor".
- When lifting or moving the printer, be sure to hold the left and right and rear carrying handles of the printer. The printer may be unsteady if you hold it at other
positions, which poses a risk of injury from dropping the printer.
F-3-1
- The printer main unit weights approximately 43kg. When moving the printer, have at least three people hold it from left and right and rear side taking care not to
hurt their back.
F-3-2
3-1
Chapter 3
1. Moving the printer on the same floor with no difference in grade
Item Description
[Prep. MovePrinter] on the Main menu This need not be performed.
Allowed tilting angle Do not tilt.
Ink consumption No ink is consumed.
Ink tank It may be installed or removed.
Separation of printer and stand They do not need to be separated.
Maintenance cartridge Install.
There is no need to open a new maintenance cartridge.
Replacement of consumable parts There is no need to replace consumable parts.
Service support No service support is necessary.
Transportation procedure
1) Turn off the [Power] button, and check that the heads are capped and carriage is locked.
2) Remove the roll holder from the roll unit.
3) Remove the interface cable and power cord from the printer.
4) Unlock the casters on the stand.
5) Hold the printer carrying handle at the bottom, and then slowly move the printer.
- If the printer is subjected to strong vibrations when it is moved, it can cause ink leakage or damage to the printhead. Be sure to move the printer slowly and care-
fully.
- Do not incline the printer during transportation. The internal ink may leak and the surrounding area may be stained.
2. Moving the printer on floor where there is difference in grade, or transporting by truck or plane or ship or others, or transporting in low temperature
environment such as below freezing
Item Description
[Prep. MovePrinter] on the Main menu Perform [Limited].
Allowed tilting angle Lengthwise: -30 to +30 degrees
Rotation: -30 to +30 degrees
Separation of printer and stand They do not need to be separated.

Maintenance cartridge Install.
There is no need to open a new maintenance cartridge.
However, if there is a message instructing to replace the maintenance cartridge or check the remaining ink,
replace with new maintenance cartridge before transporting.
Replacement of consumable parts There is no need to replace consumable parts.
Service support No service support is necessary.
Transportation procedure
1) Turn on the [Power] button on the printer.
3) Enter the Main menu, and then select "Set./Adj. Menu" > "Prep.MovePrinter". Follow the instructions in the messages, and remove all of the ink tanks.
Put the removed ink tanks in the plastic bag with the ink supply part upward and close the opening.
3-2
Chapter 3
- "Prep.MovePrinter" cannot be selected when "MTCart Full Soon" is displayed. In this case, replace the maintenance cartridge first.
- If the consumable parts counter is checked and a message to replace consumable parts appear, check the consumable parts counter from service mode and replace
the necessary consumable parts. After replacing the consumable parts and resetting the counter of service mode, perform the steps again. Refer to "SERVICE
MODE" > "Details of Service Mode" > "PARTS CNT." and "MAINTENANCE" > "Consumable Parts" > "Consumable Parts".
- Never disconnect the power cord while the "Prep.MovePrinter" operation is in progress since this can cancel the operation. "Ink Filling" is performed when the
power is turned back on after canceling so repeat "Prep.MovePrinter" from the beginning.
- Check that used ink is no longer leaking after removing the maintenance cartridge. If it is leaking, install the maintenance cartridge and wait until leaking stops.
4) Once the "Prep.MovePrinter" operation is completed, turn off the [Power] button.
5) Open the upper cover, check that the heads are capped and carriage is locked.
6) Close the upper cover.
7) Disconnect the interface cable and power cord from the printer.
8) Attach the cushioning materials and tape.
9) If the printer is mounted on a stand, remove the printer from the stand.
10) Pack the printer into the packing box, and then put the roll media, ink tank and stand in another packing box for moving.
Use the original packing material for the printer and stand. If it is not available, pack them with a sufficient amount of cushioning materials.
3. Transportation procedure when the printer is not operating properly
To prevent the waste ink from leaking, remove the maintenance cartridge after draining the ink. Package the removed maintenance cartridge so that the waste ink
does not leak from it.
1) Make sure that the printer is turned off.

2) Disconnect the interface cable and power cord from the printer.
4) While referring to "DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY" > "Draining the Ink" > "Manual Ink Drainage", drain the ink from the printer.
5) While referring to "INSTALLATION" > "Transporting the Printer" > "Transporting the Printer" > "4. Manual Capping", perform the capping and lock of the
carriage operations.
6) Remove the maintenance cartridge, and then package it so that the waste ink does not leak from it.
Check that used ink is no longer leaking after removing the maintenance cartridge. If it is leaking, install the maintenance cartridge and wait until leaking stops.
7) Attach all external covers.

8) Attach the cushioning materials and tape.
9) If the printer is mounted on a stand, remove the printer from the stand.
10) Pack the printer into the packing box, and then put the roll media, ink tank and stand in another packing box for moving.
Use the original packing material for the printer and stand. If it is not available, pack them with a sufficient amount of cushioning materials.
4. Manual capping
When transporting the printer, cap the Printhead to protect the nozzles from drying out and to keep them clean. Follow the procedures described below:
1) While referring to "DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY" > "Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly" > "Opening the Cap/Releasing the Carriage Lock
Pin/Moving the Wiper Unit manually", open all caps.
2) Move the carriage to the home position.
3) While referring to "DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY" > "Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly" > "Opening the Cap/Releasing the Carriage Lock
Pin/Moving the Wiper Unit manually", perform the capping.
Manual capping is an emergency measure when the printer does not operate. Manual capping can damage the printhead.
3-3
Chapter 3
3.1.2 Reinstalling the Printer
3.1.2.1 Reinstalling the Printer

0023-3194
1. Installing the printer on the same floor

If ink has not been drained from the printer when moving it to another place on the same floor, then an operation check (Test Print) needs to be performed after the
printer is moved to a new location.
2. Installing the printer on a different floor

If ink has been drained when transporting the printer to a different floor, follow the installation procedure below. It is nearly identical to the procedure when install-
ing for the first time.
1) Remove the cushioning materials and tape.

2) Connect the power cord and interface cable.
3) Turn on the power and following the instruction in the message to install the ink tank. The ink is filled.
4) After the ink has been filled, load the media, and perform the operation check.
3-4
Chapter 4 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
Contents
Contents
4.1 Service Parts...................................................................................................................................................................4-1

4.1.1 Service Parts................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-1
4.2 Disassembly/Reassembly...............................................................................................................................................4-2
4.2.1 Disassembly/Reassembly............................................................................................................................................................. 4-2
4.3 Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly ...........................................................................................................4-2
4.3.1 Note: Items that should never be disassembled ........................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.3.2 Moving the carriage manually ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.3.3 Units requiring draining of ink .................................................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.3.4 External Covers............................................................................................................................................................................ 4-4
4.3.5 Drive Unit .................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-13
4.3.6 Cutter.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-17
4.3.7 Carriage Unit.............................................................................................................................................................................. 4-19
4.3.8 Purge Unit .................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-26
4.3.9 Ink Tank Unit ............................................................................................................................................................................. 4-30
4.3.10 Ink Tube Unit ........................................................................................................................................................................... 4-33
4.3.11 Waste Ink Collection Unit ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-37
4.3.12 Multi Sensor............................................................................................................................................................................. 4-42
4.3.13 Linear Encoder......................................................................................................................................................................... 4-43
4.3.14 Head Management Sensor ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-48
4.3.15 PCBs ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-49
4.3.16 Opening the Cap/Moving the Wiper Unit................................................................................................................................ 4-50
4.3.17 Opening/Closing the Ink Supply Valve/Subtank Air Passage Valve ...................................................................................... 4-52
4.3.18 Draining the ink ....................................................................................................................................................................... 4-53
4.4 Applying the Grease.....................................................................................................................................................4-54
4.4.1 Applying the Grease .................................................................................................................................................................. 4-54
4.5 Adjustment and Setup Items ........................................................................................................................................4-58
4.5.1 Adjustment Item List ................................................................................................................................................................. 4-58
4.5.2 Procedure after Replacing the Carriage Unit or Multi Sensor ................................................................................................... 4-58
4.5.3 Procedure after Replacing the Feed Roller or Feed Roller Encoder.......................................................................................... 4-58
4.5.4 Procedure after Replacing the Head Management Sensor......................................................................................................... 4-58
Chapter 4
4.1 Service Parts
4.1.1 Service Parts

0012-6508
The service parts indicated below require careful handling.
1. Keep all packages with the warning not to turn over.

Pay careful attention to all individually packaged service part (carriage unit, purge unit, ink tank unit, and other parts) boxes marked "This side up" and handle
appropriately.
F-4-1
4-1
Chapter 4
4.2 Disassembly/Reassembly
4.2.1 Disassembly/Reassembly
0016-9451
For the procedure for disassembly/reassembly of the components excluding the major components, refer to the parts catalog.
Illustrations in the parts catalog are assigned illustration numbers according to the order in which parts are disassembled.
4.3 Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly
4.3.1 Note: Items that should never be disassembled

0012-6514
Assemblies that should never be removed after initial factory adjustments, are indicated by the presence of red screws.
Under no circumstance should these red screws be loosened or removed. Removing these screws will render the printer out of alignment forever.
F-4-2
4.3.2 Moving the carriage manually

0023-2637
Hold the handle [1] when moving the carriage.
Move the carriage as required during assembly and disassembly to prevent the carriage from contacting the parts to be removed.
You cannot move the carriage when capping has been performed. Refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to Notes on Disassembly and Reassembly
> Opening the caps and moving the wiper unit to remove the caps, and then move the carriage.
[1]
F-4-3
4-2
Chapter 4
4.3.3 Units requiring draining of ink

0014-8953
When disassembling the following units, drain the ink completely, to prevent ink leakage. For ink drain instructions, refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY >
Points to Notes on Disassembly and Reassembly > Draining the ink.
[1] Carriage unit

Refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to Notes on Disassembly and Reassembly > Carriage unit.
[2] Ink tube unit
Refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to Notes on Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink tube unit.
[3] Ink tank unit
Refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to Notes on Disassembly and Reassembly >Ink tank unit.
4-3
Chapter 4
4.3.4 External Covers

0023-5281
a) Operation Panel
Removing the Operation Panel
1) To remove the operation panel, open the upper cover [1] and right tank cover [2], and then release two hooks [3] using a flat head screwdriver.
2) Remove the cable from the cable guide, and then remove the ground wire [5] by pushing the hook [4] from the backside of the operation unit and disconnect the
connector [6], and then remove the operation panel [7].
[5] [4] [6]
[7]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-4-4
b) Upper Left Cover
Removing the Upper Left Cover
1) To remove the upper left cover [4], open the upper cover [1] and left tank cover [2], and then release two hooks [3] by using a flat head screwdriver.
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
F-4-5
4-4
Chapter 4
c) Right Cover
Removing the Right Cover
1) To remove the right cover, remove the operation panel.
2) Remove six screws [1], release two hooks [2], and then remove the right cover [3].
[3]
[1] [2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1] [1]
F-4-6
d) Left Cover
Removing the Left Cover
1) To remove the left, remove the upper left cover.
2) Remove six screws [1], release two hooks [2], and then remove the left cover [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1] [1]
[2]
[1] [1]
F-4-7
4-5
Chapter 4
e) Front Cover
Removing the Front Cover
1) To remove the front cover [5], open the upper cover [1] to remove the cleaner brush [2], remove two screws [3], and then release three hooks [4] by using the
flat head screwdriver.
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[3]
[4] [4]
F-4-8
f) Output Guide
Removing the Output Guide
1) To remove the output guide, open the maintenance cartridge cover [1] to remove the maintenance cartridge [2], and then remove the face cover [3] by inserting
a flat head screwdriver in the slit.
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-4-9
4-6
Chapter 4
2) Remove two screws [1], and then the output guide (right) [2].
[1]
[2]
F-4-10
3) Remove one screw [1], release two hooks [2], and then remove the output guide (middle)/left [3].
[2]
[1] [3]
[2]
F-4-11
g) Left/Right Ink Tank Cover
Removing the Left/Right Ink Tank Cover
1) To remove the left/right ink tank cover [2], remove the left/right cover, and then one screw [1].
<Left Ink Tank Cover>
[2] [1]
F-4-12
4-7
Chapter 4
<Right Ink Tank Cover>
[1] [2]
F-4-13
h) Upper Cover
Removing the Upper Cover
1) To remove the upper cover [1], remove the upper left cover, and then slide the upper cover [1] to the left to remove it from the hinge [2].
[1]
[2]
F-4-14
i) Rear Upper Cover
Removing the Rear Upper Cover
1) To remove the rear upper cover [3], remove the left/right cover and upper cover, open the roll cover [1], and then remove eight screws [2].
[2] [2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-4-15
4-8
Chapter 4
MEMO:
The rear upper cover [1] and upper cover [2] can be removed together.
[2]
[1]
F-4-16
j) Rear Cover
Removing the Rear Cover
1) To remove the rear cover [2], remove ten screws [1].
[1]
[1] [2] [1]

F-4-17
k) Roll Feed Unit
Removing the Roll Feed Unit
MEMO:
Open/close the roll cover as needed.
4-9
Chapter 4
1) To remove the roll feed unit, remove the roll holder, and then remove the left/right cover and rear upper cover.
2) Remove four screws [1] and one connector [2], and then the feed guide [3].
[2]
[3]
[1]
F-4-18
3) Remove four screws [1], and then the left and right roll lower inner covers [2].
<Left roll lower inner cover >
[2] [1]
F-4-19
<Right roll lower inner cover>
[1] [2]
F-4-20
4-10
Chapter 4
4) Remove three screws [1], and then remove the left roll cover [2].
[1]
[1] [2]
F-4-21
5) Remove seven screws [1] and three connectors [2], and then remove the cable from the cable guide to remove the roll feed unit [3].
[1] [1]
[3]
[1]
[1] [2] [1] [1] [2]

F-4-22
4-11
Chapter 4
l) Release Lever
Removing the Release Lever
1) To remove the release lever, remove five screws [1] and four connectors [2], and then remove the cable from the cable guide to remove the right side plate unit [3].
[1] [1] [3]
[1]
[2] [1] [2]

F-4-23
2) Remove one spring [1], and then the release lever [2]. Keep the pinch roller pressurized to enable phase adjustment at the time of release lever reinstallation.
[2]
[1]
F-4-24
Precautions about Reinstallation of Release Lever
When reinstalling the release lever, align the notch [1] on the gear portion of the release lever with the protrusion [2] on the gear portion of the pinch roller.
[2]
[1]
F-4-25
4-12
Chapter 4
4.3.5 Drive Unit

0032-0785
a) Feed Motor
Removing the Feed Motor
1) Remove the left cover.
2) Remove one spring [1], two screws [2], and one connector [3], and then remove the belt [4] from the motor pulley and remove the cable from the cable guide to
remove the feed motor [5].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5] [4]
F-4-26
Precautions about Reinstallation of Feed Motor
Put the timing belt on the pulley in the feed motor drive unit, tighten the screw [1] temporarily, install the spring [2], and then tighten the screw [1] to secure the
feed motor.
[2]
[1]
F-4-27
b) Action to take after replacing the feed roller encoder and feed roller
This printer as shipped has the feed roller eccentricity (that is, variations in the rate of paper feed from rotation to rotation) corrected for enhanced media feed ac-
curacy. When the feed roller HP sensor or feed roller encoder and feed roller pertaining to the correction of eccentricity variations has been replaced, therefore, they
should require adjustment.
Execute service mode under the following conditions to launch automatic adjustment:
Service mode: SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > LF TUNING
- Media type: Glossy photo paper
- Media size (width): 24 inches
If adjustment cannot be done properly by selecting "SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > LF TUNING" (auto adjustment), carry out manual ad-
justment.
Service mode: SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > LF TUNING2
- Media type: Gloss photo paper
Check the printed pattern and enter values for adjustment.
4-13
Chapter 4
c) Carriage Motor
Removing the Carriage Motor
1) Move the carriage onto the platen. Refer to "Disassembly/Reassembly > Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly > Opening the Cap/Moving the Wiper
Unit".
2) Remove the left/right cover.
3) Remove one screw [1], and then remove the carriage upper cover [2].
[1]
[2]
F-4-28
4) Remove one screw [1], pulley retainer [2] and spring [3] to loosen the carriage belt [4]. Remove the belt from the pulley unit [5], and then the pulley unit [5].
[4] [2] [3] [5]
[1]
F-4-29
4-14
Chapter 4
5) Remove the belt [1] from the pulley [5], and then remove two screws [2] and disconnect one connector [3] to remove the carriage motor [4].
[3]
[4] [1]
[2] [5]
F-4-30
Precautions about Reinstallation of Carriage Motor
- Reinstall the carriage belt [1] carefully so that it is not twisted. After reinstalling it, check whether the carriage moves on the platen smoothly.
[1]
F-4-31
- Reinstall the pulley retainer [1] in such a manner that it fits in the notch [2] on the side plate.
[1] [2]
F-4-32
d) Action to take after removing or replacing the carriage motor
After the carriage and carriage motor and carriage belt and linear encoder sensor has been removed or replaced, execute the following service mode.
Service mode: SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > CR MOTOR COG
4-15
Chapter 4
e) Shutter Motor
Removing the Shutter Motor
1) Remove the output guide (right).
2) Disconnect one connector [1]. While releasing the hook [3] by pressing the protrusion [2], turn the shutter motor unit [4] slightly in the clockwise direction.
Remove the shutter motor unit [4] with it lifted.
[4] [1]
[2]
[3]
F-4-33
4-16
Chapter 4
4.3.6 Cutter
0023-5529
a) Cutter
Removing the Cutter
1) Perform service mode: [SERVICE MODE] > [REPLACE] > [CUTTER] and then choose [YES] to move the cutter to the replacement place.
2) Remove two screws [1] by using the hex key wrench of 1.5mm diameter to remove the cutter [2].
[1] [2]
F-4-34
MEMO:
After replacing the cutter, press the [OK] key to return the cutter to the home position. Then, choose [CLR COUNTER CT-1] > [YES] that displayed on the LCD
to initialize the parts counter information.
Removing the Cutter Rail Unit

1) Drain ink. Refer to "Draining Ink" in "Precautions about Disassembly/Reassembly" in "Disassembly/Reassembly".
2) To remove the cutter rail unit, remove the left/right ink tank cover, left/right ink tank unit, and mist fan.
3) Remove two screws [1] and disconnect one connector [2] and remove the cable from the cable guide, and then remove the cutter unit [3].
[1] [3]
[2]
F-4-35
4-17
Chapter 4
4) Remove one screw [1], move the cutter rail unit [2] to the left to release it from two protrusion [3], and then remove it rightward.
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-4-36
4-18
Chapter 4
4.3.7 Carriage Unit

0032-0593
a) Carriage Unit
Removing the Carriage Unit
1) Drain ink. Refer to "Draining Ink" in "Precautions about Disassembly/Reassembly" in "Disassembly/Reassembly".
2) Unlock the carriage unit. Refer to "Disassembly/Reassembly > Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly > Opening the Cap/Moving the Wiper Unit".
3) Remove the rear upper cover, front cover, and rear cover.
4) Move the carriage to the position where there is a notch [1] at the front of the platen as shown in the figure.
[1]
F-4-37
5) Remove the printhead.
6) Open the tube guide [1] an angle of 90 degrees frontward, and then remove the tube guide [1] together with the ink tube from the carriage.
Remove the ink tube [2] from the carriage guide, and then remove one spring [3] and two hooks [4] to remove the joint base [5] together with the printhead fixer
lever.
[1]
[4]
[4]
[2]
[5] [3]
F-4-38
4-19
Chapter 4
- Remove the joint carefully so that ink does not spout.

- Put a plastic bag or the like on the ink tube joint to prevent ink from spouting.
F-4-39
7) Move the carriage to the HP side on the platen.

8) Release the hook [1], and then remove the flexible cable guide [2] by sliding it to the left.
[1]
[2]
F-4-40
9) Remove two screws [1], and then remove the feed guide (left) [2].
[2]
[1]
F-4-41
4-20
Chapter 4
10) Remove two screws [1], and then remove the left roll lower inner cover [2].
[1] [2]
F-4-42
11) Disconnect three flexible cable connectors [1] from the main controller PCB.
[1]
F-4-43
12) Release the hook [1], and then remove the flexible cable guide [2].
[1] [2]
F-4-44
4-21
Chapter 4
13) Release two hooks [1], and then remove the flexible cable [4] from the flexible cable retainer [2] and flexible guide [3].
[2] [2] [2] [3]
[1] [4] [1]

F-4-45
14) While releasing the hook with the guide [1] lifted, slide the flexible cable retainer [2] to remove it.
[2] [1]
F-4-46
[1]
[2]
F-4-47
4-22
Chapter 4
16) Remove one screw [1], the pulley retainer [2], and spring [3] to loosen the carriage belt [4]. Remove the belt [4] from the pulley unit [5], and then remove the
pulley unit [5].
[4] [2] [3] [5]
[1]
F-4-48
17) Remove the carriage belt [1] from the carriage motor pulley [2].
[1]
[2]
F-4-49
18) Remove five screws [1] and disconnect four connectors [2], and then remove the cable from the cable guide to remove the right side plate unit [3].
[1] [1] [3]
[1]
[2] [1] [2]

F-4-50
4-23
Chapter 4
19) Remove the carriage unit [1] from the right side of the printer.
[1]
F-4-51
Precautions about Reinstallation of Carriage Unit
- Make sure that the linear scale [1] is in the detection zone of the linear encoder sensor [2].
[1] [2]
F-4-52
- Reinstall the carriage belt [1] carefully so that it is not twisted. After reinstalling it, check whether the carriage moves on the platen smoothly.
[1]
F-4-53
- Reinstall the pulley retainer [1] in such a manner that it fits in the notch [2] on the side plate.
[1] [2]
F-4-54
- The phase of the carriage height adjuster is automatically adjusted as the motor turns, requiring no on-site adjustment.
4-24
Chapter 4
Precautions about Reinstallation of Carriage Belt

- When reinstalling the carriage belt, push it deeply into the belt holder of the carriage.
F-4-55
b) Action following the replacement of the carriage unit/multi sensor
Because the distance between the multi sensor (in the carriage unit) and the nozzles (in the printhead) is varied from one unit to another, the printer as shipped has
its optical axis corrected to adjust the image write position. When the carriage unit or multisensor has been replaced or disassembled and reassembled, they require
adjustment.
Execute service mode under the following conditions:
* The multi sensor reference plate(QL2-6891: MOUNT, MULTI SENSOR REFERENCE) must be replaced at the same time whenever the carriage or the multi
sensor is being replaced.
1) Carry out the following service mode without media loading.

- Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > GAP CALIB.
2) Load the following media.
Media type : Photo glossy paper
Media size : Media having a width equal too larger than that of A2-size paper
3) Carry out the following service mode.
- Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > OPTICAL AXIS
- After the carriage unit or carriage motor or carriage belt or linear encoder sensor have been removed or replaced, execute the following service mode.
c) Precautions against handling the carriage shaft
The carriage shaft is functionally important part. Therefore, be sure to note the following points.
- Do not touch the shaft.
- Do not allow the shaft to get scratched or marked.
- Do not apply the grease to the shaft.
4-25
Chapter 4
4.3.8 Purge Unit

0031-3155
a) Purge Unit
Removing the Purge Unit
1) Unlock the carriage unit, and then move the carriage onto the platen. Refer to "Disassembly/Reassembly > Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly >
Opening the Cap/Moving the Wiper Unit".
2) Remove the right cover.
3) Remove five screws [1] and disconnect five connectors [2], and then remove the cable from the cable guide to remove the right side plate unit [3].
[2] [1] [1] [1] [2]
[1] [2] [3] [1] [2]

F-4-56
4) Remove two screws [1] and two waste ink tubes [2], the cable from the cable guide, and then remove the purge unit [3].
[1] [3] [1]
[2]
F-4-57
Remove the waste ink tubes carefully so that ink does not spout.
4-26
Chapter 4
Precautions about Reinstallation of Purge Unit

- When installing the waste ink tubes, attach the tube that painted the white mark [1] to the near edge (i.e.; the length of the tube is the shorter) to the left joint [2].
[1] [2]
F-4-58
- When installing the waste ink tubes, attach the tubes surely until end of the joint. And check that the tubes are not buckled.
F-4-59
b) Drain ink tube joint (CL)
Removing the drain ink tube joint (CL)
1) Open the maintenance cartridge cover [1] to remove the maintenance cartridge [2], and then remove the face cover [3] by inserting a flat head screwdriver in the
slit.
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-4-60
2) Remove two screws [1], and then remove the output guide (right) [2].
[1]
[2]
F-4-61
4-27
Chapter 4
3) Remove ten screws [1], and then remove the rear cover [2].
[1]
[1] [2] [1]

F-4-62
4) Disconnect the connector [1].
[1]
F-4-63
5) Remove two screws [1], and then remove the maintenance cartridge holder unit [2].
[1]
[2]
F-4-64
4-28
Chapter 4
6) Remove three screws [1] and drain ink tube [2], and then remove the drain ink tube joint (CL) [3].
[1]
[2] [3]
F-4-65
When removing the drain ink tube joint (CL) and the drain ink tube, be careful so that the ink do not spout or drip.
Precautions about Reinstallation of drain ink tube joint (CL)

- When attaching the drain ink tube joint (CL), insert the drain ink tube [1] firmly to the joint.
[1]
F-4-66
4-29
Chapter 4
4.3.9 Ink Tank Unit

0023-3216
a) Ink Tank Unit

Removing the Right Ink Tank Unit
1) Perform ink drainage. Refer to "Disassembly/Reassembly > Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly > Draining the ink".
2) Remove the right cover, right ink tank cover, and front cover.
3) Remove four screws [1] and disconnect two connectors [2], and then remove the cable from the cable guide.
4) Remove the joint [3] between the ink tube unit and ink tank unit carefully, the ink tube from the guide, and then remove the right ink tank unit [4].
[1] [2]
F-4-67
[4]
[3] [1]
F-4-68
4-30
Chapter 4

F-4-69
F-4-70
4-31
Chapter 4
Removing the Left Ink Tank Unit

2) Remove the left cover, left ink tank cover, and front cover.
3) Remove four screws [1] and disconnect two connectors [2], and then remove the cable from the cable guide.
4) Remove the joint [3] between the ink tube unit and ink tank unit carefully, the ink tube from the guide, and then remove the left ink tank unit [4].
[2] [1]
F-4-71
[4]
[1] [3]
F-4-72
4-32
Chapter 4

F-4-73
F-4-74
b) Valve Motor Unit

Removing the Valve Motor Unit
1) Remove the ink tank unit.
2) Remove three screws [1] and disconnect three connectors [2], and then remove the cable from the cable guide to remove the valve unit [4] while pressing down
the protrusion [3].
[3]
[1] [2] [4] [1] [2]
F-4-75
4-33
Chapter 4
4.3.10 Ink Tube Unit

0023-3328
a) Ink Tube Unit

Removing the Ink Tube Unit
2) Unlock the carriage unit. Refer to "Disassembly/Reassembly > Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly > Opening the Cap/Moving the Wiper Unit".
3) Remove the front cover.
4) Move the carriage to the position where there is a notch [1] at the front of the platen as shown below.
[1]
F-4-76
5) Remove the printhead.
6) Open the tube guide [1] an angle of 90 degrees frontward, and then remove the tube guide [1] together with the ink tube.
Remove the ink tube [2] from the carriage guide and one spring [3], release two hooks [4], and then remove the joint base [5] together with the printhead fixer lever.
[1]
[4]
[4]
[2]
[5] [3]
F-4-77
4-34
Chapter 4

F-4-78
7) Remove two screws [1] and disconnect two connectors [2], and then remove the solenoid base [3].
[2] [3]
[1]
F-4-79
8) Remove two joint [1] between the ink tube unit [2] and ink tank unit carefully, and then remove the ink tube unit [2] from the guide.
[1] [2] [1]
F-4-80
4-35
Chapter 4

F-4-81
F-4-82
F-4-83
F-4-84
4-36
Chapter 4
Precautions about Reinstallation of Ink Tube Unit

- Insert the ink tube and joint deeply into the guide.
- When installing the ink tube unit, align marking [1] on the ink tube unit to the right end of guide [2] and the left end of tape [3] to within 4mm from the left end
of tube guide [4].
[3] [4]
0+4mm
[2] [1]
F-4-85
After detaching the joint of the ink tube unit, the joint might become easy to come off by the ink that has adhered to it.
In that case, please wash the joint by alcohol and remove the adhering ink.
4-37
Chapter 4
4.3.11 Waste Ink Collection Unit

0032-0594
When disassembling the waste ink collection unit, pay attention to the ink leaking from the disassembled parts. Put the parts of the disassembled waste ink collection
unit in a plastic bag or the like with care given to the ink leaking from the portion [A] enclosed in a circle.
The service parts packing box may include a plastic bag for packing replacement parts. Use it for putting consumable parts of the waste ink collection unit.
[8]
[3]
[5] [7]
[1]
[4]
[6]
[9]
[2]
[7]
F-4-86
Service Mode
No Name Q'ty Part number Consumables
(PARTS xx)
[1] Mist Fan 1 QM4-2798 Yes Mi-1
[2] Mist Exhaust Duct 1 QM4-2797 Yes Mi-1
[3] Platen Suction Fan 1 QM4-2817
[4] Platen Exhaust Duct 1 QM4-2753 Yes WF-2
[5] Head Management Sensor 1 QM4-2767 Yes HMa-1
[6] Maintenance Cartridge 1 -
[7] Ink Tank Unit Waste Ink Tray 1 QM4-2873/
QM4-2876
[8] Purge Unit Waste Ink Tray 1 -
[9] Front Duct 1 -
[1] Mist Fan
[A]
F-4-87
4-38
Chapter 4
[2] Mist Exhaust Duct
[A]
F-4-88
[3] Platen Suction Fan
[A]
F-4-89
[4] Platen Exhaust Duct
[A]
F-4-90
[5] Head Management Sensor
[A]
F-4-91
4-39
Chapter 4
a) Mist Fan
Removing the Mist Fan
1) Remove the rear upper cover and front cover and left ink tank cover.
2) Remove two screws [1] and disconnect the connector [2], and then remove the cable from the cable guide to remove the support plate [3].
[3] [1]
[1] [2]
F-4-92
3) Remove four screws [1] and disconnect three connectors [2], and then remove the cable from the cable guide to remove the mist fan [3].
[2] [2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[3]
F-4-93
4-40
Chapter 4
b) Mist Exhaust Duct

Removing the Mist Exhaust Duct
1) Remove the mist fan.
2) Remove one screw [1], and then remove the cable from the cable guide to remove the mist exhaust duct [2].
[2] [1]
F-4-94
MEMO:
The mist fan [1] and mist exhaust duct [2] can be removed together.
[1]
[2]
F-4-95
Precautions about Reinstallation of Mist Exhaust Duct

Make sure that the protrusion [1] on the mist exhaust duct fits in the notch [2] on the side plate.
[2] [1]
F-4-96
4-41
Chapter 4
c) Platen Suction Fan

Removing the Platen Suction Fan
1) Remove the output guide (right)/(middle).
2) Remove one screw [1] and disconnect one connector [2] to remove the platen suction fan [3].
[1] [3] [2]

F-4-97
3) After drawing out the platen suction fan [1], turn it up side down immediately so that ink does not drip off.
[1]
F-4-98
d) Platen Exhaust Duct
Removing the Platen Exhaust Duct
1) Remove the mist exhaust duct and left ink tank unit.
2) Remove one screw [1], and then the platen exhaust duct [2].
[1] [2]
F-4-99
4-42
Chapter 4
4.3.12 Multi Sensor

0032-0595
a) Removing the Multi Sensor

1) Unlock the carriage unit, and then move the carriage onto the platen. Refer to "Disassembly/Reassembly > Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly >
Opening the Cap/Moving the Wiper Unit".
2) Remove the printhead to protect it.
3) Remove one screw [1] and disconnect one connector [2], and then the multi sensor [3].
[2]
[1] [3]
F-4-100
b) Removing the Multi Sensor Reference Plate
1) Remove one screw [1], and then remove the multi sensor reference plate [2].
[1] [2]
F-4-101
Do not touch the white sheets of the multi sensor reference plate.
c) Action following the replacement of the carriage unit/multi sensor

Because the distance between the multi sensor (in the carriage unit) and the nozzles (in the printhead) is varied from one unit to another, the printer as shipped has
its optical axis corrected to adjust the image write position. When the carriage unit or multi sensor has been replaced or disassembled and reassembled, they require
adjustment.
Execute service mode under the following conditions:
* The multi sensor reference plate(QL2-6891: MOUNT, MULTI SENSOR REFERENCE) must be replaced at the same time whenever the carriage or the multi

Media size : Media having a width equal toor larger then that of A2-size paper
4-43
Chapter 4
4.3.13 Linear Encoder

0023-3337
a) Linear Encoder
Removing the Linear Encoder Sensor
1) Remove the carriage unit.
2) Remove two screws [1], and then remove the linear encoder sensor cover [2].
[2]
[1]
F-4-102
3) Remove two screws [1] and disconnect one connector [2], and then remove the linear encoder sensor [3].
[3] [2]
[1]
F-4-103
Removing the Linear Scale
1) Unlock the carriage unit, and then move the carriage unit [1] on the platen. Refer to "Disassembly/Reassembly > Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly
> Opening the Cap/Moving the Wiper Unit".
[1]
F-4-104
MEMO:
When removing or installing the linear scale, move the carriage unit to the HP side on top of the platen to prevent the linear scale from touching the linear encoder
sensor.
4-44
Chapter 4
2) Remove the left/right cover and left/right ink tank cover.

[1]
[2]
F-4-105
4) Remove the spring [1], release the notch from the protrusion [2] on the side plate, and then remove the linear scale [3] from the left side.
[1] [3]
[2]
F-4-106
4-45
Chapter 4
Precaution about Reinstallation of Linear Encoder Sensor/Linear Scale

- When removing or installing the linear scale, move the carriage unit to the HP side on top of the platen to prevent the linear scale from touching the linear encoder
sensor.
- Reinstall the linear scale in such a manner that the "R" mark on the linear scale is on the right side of the printer and the "L" mark is on the left side of the printer
when viewed from the front of the printer.
F-4-107
4-46
Chapter 4
- Reinstall the linear scale in such a manner that it passes through the notch in the guide [1] and the notch [2] on the side plate.
[1]
[1] [2]
F-4-108
- Never touch the detection part [1] of the linear scale.
[1]
R
F-4-109
4-47
Chapter 4
- Make sure that the linear scale [1] is in the detection zone of the linear encoder sensor [2].
[1] [2]
F-4-110
b) Action to take after removing or replacing the linear encoder sensor
After the carriage and carriage motor and carriage belt and linear encoder sensor has been removed or replaced, execute the following service mode.
4-48
Chapter 4
4.3.14 Head Management Sensor

0023-3339
a) Head Management Sensor

Removing the Head Management Sensor
1) Remove the purge unit.
2) Remove one screw [1] and one disconnect connector [2], release one protrusion [3], and then remove the head management sensor [4].
[1] [4] [2] [3]
F-4-111
b) Procedure after replacing the head management sensor
Since the distance between the head management sensor and the carriage unit varies among printers, the optical axis is factory-adjusted to adjust the non-discharging
detection position. When you have replaced the head management sensor or performed assembly/reassembly of surrounding parts that can change the distance be-
tween the head management sensor and the carriage unit, readjustment is required.
Perform the readjustment in the service mode.
Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > NOZZLE CHK POS.
4-49
Chapter 4
4.3.15 PCBs
0023-3347
Do not replace the main controller PCB and the maintenance cartridge relay PCB (ROM board) at the same time.
Both PCBs hold vital information, such as settings and a carriage drive time. Before either PCB is replaced, such information is temporarily saved through internal
communication with the other PCB and is automatically written to the new PCB when it is installed. For this reason, the two PCBs cannot be replaced at the same
time. To replace both PCBs, work in order of (a) > (b).
When the main controller PCB and maintenance cartridge relay PCB have been replaced with service parts, check that the latest version of firmware is installed in
them.
If not, upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
Reference:
a) Replacing the maintenance cartridge relay PCB (ROM board)

1) Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug.
2) Replace the maintenance cartridge relay PCB.
3) Reconnect the power plug and turn on the power while pressing the [Load] and [Navigate] keys. (Start the printer in PCB replacement mode.)
4) Release the key, but not before making sure that "Initializing" appears on the display. (The message lamp lights when printer enters PCB replacement mode.)
5) Wait until "REPLACE MODE" appears on the display.
6) Select MC BOARD and press the [OK] key.
7) Turn off the power, but not before making sure that "Power off" appears on the display.
8) Turn on the power.
9) Check the firmware version. If the firmware is not the latest version, upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
b) Replacing the main controller PCB

1) Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug.
2) Replace the main controller PCB.
3) Reconnect the power plug and turn on the power while pressing the [Load] and [Navigate] keys. (Start the printer in PCB replacement mode.)
4) Release the key, but not before making sure that "Initializing" appears on the display. (The message lamp lights when printer enters PCB replacement mode.)
5) Wait until "REPLACE MODE" appears on the display.
6) Select CPU BOARD and press the [OK] key.
7) Turn off the power, but not before making sure that "Power off" appears on the display.
8) Turn on the power.
9) Check the firmware version. If the firmware is not the latest version, upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
4-50
Chapter 4
4.3.16 Opening the Cap/Moving the Wiper Unit

0023-3340
a) Opening the Cap/Releasing the Carriage Lock Pin by service mode

After entering the service mode, execute the following mode.
Service mode: SERVICE MODE > FUNCTION > CR UNLOCK
b) Opening the Cap/Releasing the Carriage Lock Pin/Moving the Wiper Unit manually
1) Insert a flat head screwdriver in the slit on the left cover to remove the face cover [1].
[1]
F-4-112
4-51
Chapter 4
2) Insert a Phillips screw driver in the "+" groove on the purge unit and turn it counterclockwise. The cap and carriage lock pin lower, allowing the carriage to move.
Also, the wiper unit can move.
F-4-113
F-4-114
MEMO:
Turning the screwdriver continuously repeats the vertical movement of the cap and carriage lock pin and the to-and-fro movement of the wiper unit. Visually check
that the cap has been opened and the carriage lock pin has been released.
F-4-115
4-52
Chapter 4
4.3.17 Opening/Closing the Ink Supply Valve/Subtank Air Passage Valve

0023-3341
a) Opening/Closing the Ink Supply Valve/Subtank Air Passage Valve

1) Remove the ink tank cover.
2) Open the ink supply valve and the subtank air passage valve with moving the lever [1] in the arrow direction.
[1]
F-4-116
- If the printhead fixer lever is released with the ink supply valve and subtank air passage valve to an ink tube open while the tube is filled with an ink, the ink in
the tube could flow backward to the ink tank unit, leaking through the hollow needle in the ink tank.
- If the valve remains open, as on occurrence of the valve open/close error, remove the valve motor unit and (see Disassembly/Reassembly > Points to Note on
Disassembly/Reassembly > Ink Tank Unit) and close the ink supply valve.
4-53
Chapter 4
4.3.18 Draining the ink

0023-3348
There are two ways to drain the ink passage of inks: automatic and manual.
Be sure to drain the ink from the ink passage to prevent ink leakage before disassembling any component of the ink passage or reshipping the printer.
1. Automatic Ink Drain

Execute Automatic Ink Drain by selecting "Set./Adj. Menu" > "Prep.MovePrinter" from the main menu.
Execute Automatic Ink Drain once again if the printer shuts down due to a power failure or any other trouble before the operation completes.
2. Manual Ink Drain

Drain the ink passage of inks manually if any electrical component in the printer fails or firmware malfunctions or if the printer fails to be powered on.
1) Remove left/right cover, left/right ink tank cover. See "Disassembly/Reassembly > Points to Note on Disassembly/Reassembly > External Covers".
2) Remove the ink tanks.
3) Move the carriage to above the platen. See "Disassembly/Reassembly > Points to Note on Disassembly/Reassembly > Opening the caps and moving the wiper
unit".
4) Release the printhead fixer lever.
5) Open the ink supply valve/subtank air passage valve to allow the inks to flow into the ink tank unit waste ink tray.
MEMO:
When supplying the ink to the printer after the manual ink drainage, return the printer to the normal condition, and then turn ON the power supply without the
printhead installed. And according to the message, execute the installation of the printhead.
4-54
Chapter 4
4.4 Applying the Grease
4.4.1 Applying the Grease

0023-2642
Some parts require application of grease when replaced. Apply the grease(special tool) listed below.
Smear the grease lightly and evenly with a flat brush or the like.
For the printer disassembly/reassembly method, refer to "DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY" and "parts catalog".
Do not apply the grease to locations in which not designated grease may cause poor print quality. Take particular care that grease do not get onto the wiper, cap,
carriage shaft and the linear scale.
No. Location Grease Quantity Remarks

1 Joint Base Rib FLOIL G-5000H Approx. 8-20mg
2 Shaft Cleaner EU-1 Soaks enough.
3 Upper Cover Hinge Catch FLOIL G-5000H Approx. 8-20mg
Roll Cover Slide Guide FLOIL G-5000H Approx. 8-20mg
4 Contact between Pinch Roller Release Shaft and FLOIL G-5000H Approx. 8-20mg
Pinch Roller
Pinch Roller Pressure Release Gear FLOIL G-5000H Approx. 8-20mg
Protrusion of Release Lever FLOIL G-5000H Approx. 8-20mg Be careful not to apply the grease to
the edge face of protrusions.
Bushing of Feed Roller FLOIL G-5000H Approx. 8-20mg
1. Joint Base Rib [1]
[1]
F-4-117
4-55
Chapter 4
2. Shaft Cleaner [1]
[1]
[1]
F-4-118
4-56
Chapter 4
3. Upper Cover Hinge Catch [1] / Roll Cover Slide Guide [2]
[2]
[1]
F-4-119
4-57
Chapter 4
4. Contact between Pinch Roller Release Shaft and Pinch Roller [1] / Pinch Roller Pressure Release Gear [2] / Protrusion of Release lever [3] / Bushing of Feed
Roller [4]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[4]
[3] [3]
F-4-120
4-58
Chapter 4
4.5 Adjustment and Setup Items
4.5.1 Adjustment Item List

0023-5489
The following adjustment procedures need to be performed when parts have been replaced or removed and then reinstalled:
Adjustment item Adjustment timing

Multi sensor recalibration Multi sensor replacement/removal
Carriage unit replacement/removal
Adjusting feed roller eccentricity Feed roller
Feed roller encoder
Head management sensor recalibration Head management sensor replacement/removal
Carriage unit replacement/removal
Carriage motor recalibration Carriage unit replacement/removal
Carriage motor replacement/removal
Carriage belt replacement/removal
4.5.2 Procedure after Replacing the Carriage Unit or Multi Sensor

0032-0596
a) Note on replacing the carriage unit and the multi sensor

- The multi sensor reference plate(QL2-6891: MOUNT, MULTI SENSOR REFERENCE) must be replaced at the same time whenever the carriage or the multi
b) Multi Sensor Recalibration

Because the distance between the multi sensor (in the carriage unit) and the nozzles (in each printhead) is varied from one unit to another, the printer has its optical
axis corrected and paper gap adjustment sensor gain and calibration adjusted prior to shipment. When the carriage unit or multi sensor has been replaced, they
should require adjustment.
Execute service mode under the following conditions to launch automatic adjustment:

Media size : Media having a width equal too larger than that of A2-size paper
c) Carriage Motor Adjustment

- After the carriage and carriage motor and carriage belt and linear encoder sensor has been removed or replaced, execute the following service mode.
4.5.3 Procedure after Replacing the Feed Roller or Feed Roller Encoder
0032-0786
Feed roller eccentricity is factory-adjusted (correction of variation in the paper feed amount per rotation). It is necessary to adjust feed roller eccentricity after re-
placing the feed roller or feed roller encoder.
In the service mode, perform automatic adjustment of feed roller eccentricity.
Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > LF TUNING
- Media type: Photo glossy paper
If adjustment cannot be done properly by selecting "SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > LF TUNING" (auto adjustment), carry out manual ad-
justment.
Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > LF TUNING2
Check the printed pattern and enter values for adjustment.
4.5.4 Procedure after Replacing the Head Management Sensor

0013-7146
Since the distance between the head management sensor and the carriage unit varies among printers, the optical axis is factory-adjusted to adjust the non-discharging
detection position. When you have replaced the head management sensor or performed assembly/reassembly of surrounding parts that can change the distance be-
tween the head management sensor and the carriage unit, readjustment is required.
Perform the readjustment in the service mode.
Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > NOZZLE CHK POS.
4-59
Chapter 5 MAINTENANCE
Contents
Contents
5.1 Periodic Replacement Parts ...........................................................................................................................................5-1

5.1.1 Periodic Replacement Parts ......................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Consumable Parts...........................................................................................................................................................5-1
5.2.1 Consumable Parts......................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.3 Periodic Maintenance.....................................................................................................................................................5-3
5.3.1 Periodic Maintenance................................................................................................................................................................... 5-3
Chapter 5
5.1 Periodic Replacement Parts
5.1.1 Periodic Replacement Parts

0012-6595
Level Periodic Replacement Part

User None
Service Personnel None
5.2 Consumable Parts
5.2.1 Consumable Parts

0032-0598
Count Warning level thresholds Panel message *3 Reference page of

Life
er Parts Q't Count "Points to Note on
Name sheets/
name number y Level1 Level2 Unit Level1 Level2 contents Disassembly and
A0 *2
*1 Reassembly"
CR1 CARRIAGE UNIT QM4-2880 1 28000 11228571 12476190 (X210) W: Level1 W: Level2 Carriage scan "Carriage Unit" >
mm distances "Removing the
CR2 FLEXIBLE CABLE QM3-4614 1 54000 6030000 6700000 times W: Level1 W: Level2 Carriage scan Carriage Unit"
UNIT times
CR3 CARRIAGE UNIT QM4-2880 1 28000 14850000 16500000 (X1,000, W: Level1 W: Level2 Total ink
SCALE, LINEAR QC4-9427 1 000) dots discharge "Linear Encoder" >
quantity "Removing the Linear
Encoder"
CR4 CARRIAGE UNIT QM4-2880 1 28000 54000 60000 times W: Level1 W: Level2 Number of Carriage Unit >
carriage "Removing the
height Carriage Unit"
changing cam
rotation
CR5 MULTI SENSOR QM4-3668 1 30000 14850000 16500000 (X1,000, W: Level1 W: Level2 Total ink "Multi Sensor" >
UNIT 000) dots discharge "Removing the Multi
quantity Sensor"
SP1 INK TUBE UNIT QM4-2865 1 35000 3960000 4400000 times W: Level1 E144-4047 Carriage scan "Ink Tube Unit" >
times "Removing the Ink
Tube Unit"
PG1 PURGE UNIT QM4-3670 1 50000 45000 50000 times W: Level1 E141-4046 Number of "Purge Unit" >
suction pump "Removing the Purge
rotation Unit"
JOINT, TUBE, QC4-8861 1 "Purge Unit" >
COLOR "Removing the Waste
Ink Tube Joint (CL)"
Hma1 HEAD QM4-2767 1 100000 30.35 31.29 ml W: Level1 E194-404A Ink discharge "Head Management
MANAGEMENT quantity to Sensor" > "Removing
SENSOR UNIT head the Head Management
management Sensor"
sensor
MT1 MOTOR, DC QK1-5068 1 480000 13500 15000 hours - *4 - *4 Carriage scan "Drive Unit" >
hours "Removing the
Carriage Motor"
PL1 MOTOR, DC QK1-0447 1 45000 700.20 778 hours - *4 - *4 Media feed "Drive Unit" >
hours "Removing the Feed
Motor"
Mi1 FAN UNIT QM4-2798 1 31000 34.97 38.85 ml W: Level1 E146-4001 Mist "Waste Ink Collection
collection Unit" > "Removing the
quantity Mist Fan"
MIST FAN DUCT QM4-2797 1 "Waste Ink Collection
UNIT Unit" > "Removing the
Mist Exhaust Duct"
CT1 CUTTER QM4-2881 1 100000 90000 100000 times W: Level1 W: Level2 Cut times (cut "Cutter" > "Removing
operation to the Cutter"
the forward
direction)
WF1 M/C HOLDER QM4-2785 1 - (when 254.21 282.45 ml W: Level1 E146-4001 Waste ink "Purge Unit" >
UNIT the error quantity by "Removing the Waste
occuring suction Ink Tube Joint (CL)"
) operation that
has been
executed
during
detachment of
the
maintenance
cartridge
WF2 WASTE INK BOX QM4-2753 1 77000 42.53 47.25 ml W: Level1 E146-4001 Mist "Waste Ink Collection
UNIT collection Unit" > "Removing the
quantity by Platen Exhaust Duct"
platen fan
*1: The counter name is the name of "SERVICE MODE > COUNTER > PARTS CNT. > COUNTER XX-X".
*2: The exchange timing varies by the print mode and operating condition and others. (Print condition: coated paper/ print mode of photo and illustration/
each color 12.5% duty X 4(total 50% duty))
5-1
Chapter 5
*3: When displaying the message of "W: Level1" or "W: Level2", the printer continues to operate. And when displaying the error code, the printer stops
to operate.
*4: The operation panel do not display the message, but the condition is printed in the "PRINT INF".
- Maintenance Kit
Kit name Parts number Counter name Name

MAINTENANCE KIT (CR/Mi) QY6-1535 CR1/CR2/CR4/CR5 CARRIAGE UNIT
CR3 SCALE, LINEAR
Mi1 FAN UNIT
After supplies have been replaced, execute [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS xx] in service mode to initialize (clear) the parts counter information.
5-2
Chapter 5
5.3 Periodic Maintenance
5.3.1 Periodic Maintenance

0023-2576
Level Periodic maintenance

User Cleaning of ink mist and other substances(about once each month
Service personnel None
a) Printer cleaning
To keep up with print quality and prevent troubles, clean the printer about once each month.
1) Turn off the printer power.

2) Remove the power cord and interface cable.
3) Wipe the external surfaces of the printer with a cloth moistened with water and then wrung tight and then dry them finally with a dry cloth.
F-5-1
- Be sure to turn off the printer power and pull out the power cord from the outlet. If the power is accidentally turned on, contact with moving internal parts can
result in injury.
- Do not use flammable solvents, such as thinner and benzine, on the printer. Solvents coming into contact with any electrical parts inside the printer could result
in fires or electrical shock hazards.
4) Open the Upper Cover.
F-5-2
5-3
Chapter 5
5) If paper dust has accumulated in the suction holes [1] on the Platen, the borderless printing ink grooves [2], use the included Cleaning Brush [3] to wipe it away.
[2] [3] [1]
F-5-3
MEMO:
If the Cleaning Brush is dirty, rinse it in water.
6) Using a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely, wipe inside the Upper Cover to clean it. Wipe away any ink residue on all over the Platen [1], the Pinch
Roller Unit [2], the Borderless Printing Ink Grooves [3], the Output Guide [4], and so on.
[1] [3] [2]
[4]
F-5-4
5-4
Chapter 5
- Do not dry the interiors of the upper cover with a dry cloth. Electrostatic charges could make the internal components susceptible to dirt, resulting in degraded
print quality.
- Do not use flammable solvents, such as thinner and benzine, on the printer. Solvents coming into contact with any electrical parts inside the printer could result
in fires or electrical shock hazards.
- Do not touch linear scale [1] and carriage shaft [2].
[2] [1]
F-5-5
MEMO:
When cleaning between the Platen and Output Guide, use a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely to wipe over the ejection slot and along grooves.
F-5-6
7) Close the upper cover.
5-5
Chapter 5
5-6
Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING
Contents
Contents
6.1 Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................................................6-1

6.1.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1.1 Outline of Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................................................................6-1
6.2 Error Code......................................................................................................................................................................6-2
6.2.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.1.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................6-2
6.2.2 Warning/Error/Service Call Error................................................................................................................................................ 6-3
6.2.2.1 Code Table ......................................................................................................................................................................................................6-3
6.3 Service Software ..........................................................................................................................................................6-35
6.3.1 L Printer Service Tool................................................................................................................................................................ 6-35
6.4 Firmware Update Tool .................................................................................................................................................6-39
6.4.1 imagePROGRAF Firmware Update Tool.................................................................................................................................. 6-39
6.5 Service Tools................................................................................................................................................................6-41
6.5.1 Tool List..................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-41
Chapter 6
6.1 Troubleshooting
6.1.1 Outline
6.1.1.1 Outline of Troubleshooting

0013-1940
1. Outline
Troubles subject to troubleshooting are classified into those shown on the display (warning, error, and service call) and those not shown on the display.
The code of warning and error is shown by combining alphanumeric characters of eight digits and four digits.
The code of service call error is shown by the initial character of "E" and combining alphanumeric characters of three digits and four digits.
No code number is displayed when a warning occurs. Selecting [SERVICE MODE] > [DISPLAY] > [WARNING] in service mode allows you to check the warning
log.
2. Precautions for Troubleshooting

1) Check the environmental conditions and the media used for printing.
2) Before performing troubleshooting, make sure that all connectors and cables are connected properly.
3) When servicing the printer with the external cover removed and the AC power supplied, be extremely careful to avoid electric shock and shorting electrical
devices.
4) In the following sections, the troubleshooting steps are described such that the component related to the most probable cause of the problem will be repaired or
replaced first, being followed by components with less problem probability. If multiple components have the same problem probability, the steps are described
beginning with the easiest one.
After performing each step, check to see if the problem has been resolved by making test prints. If the problem persists, proceed to the next step.
5) After completion of the troubleshooting, check that all connectors and cables have been reconnected and screws have been tightened firmly.
6) Whenever you have performed replacement or repair services, make test prints to check whether the problem has been resolved.
7) When connecting with the printer by using the LAN cable at the service working, be sure to enter the service mode to recognize the printer correctly.
6-1
Chapter 6
6.2 Error Code
6.2.1 Outline
6.2.1.1 Outline
0031-2603
The printer indicates errors using the display and LEDs.

If an error occurs during printing, the printer status is also displayed on the status monitor of the printer driver.
The following three types of errors are displayed on the display:
- Warning
Status where the print operation can be continued without remedying the cause of the problem. This can, however, adversely affect the printing results.
- Error
Status where the print operation is stopped, and the regular operation cannot be recovered until the cause of the problem is remedied.
- Service call error

When a service call error occurs, the error is not cleared and the error indication remains on the operation panel even if the printer is powered off and on again.
(Occurrence of the service call error is indicated again at power-on.)
This measure is taken to prevent user's recovery of the service call error and damages to the printer.
Service call errors can be cleared, however, by starting up the printer in the service mode.
The codes of warning and error and service call error are common in all models.
Note that some of the warnings, errors, and service call error described in the following tables may not appear in this printer.
In addition, the message that appears on the screen may not be the same as what is described in the table.
The first 4 digits of Warning and Error code show the following description.
The first 2 digits of code Description

01xxxxxx-xxx Warning
03xxxxxx-xxx Error
The next 2 digits of code Description

xx01xxxx-xxxx Jam-related
xx03xxxx-xxxx Cover-related
xx06xxxx-xxxx Media-related
xx13xxxx-xxxx Controller-related
xx1Axxxx-xxxx HDD-related
xx32xxxx-xxxx Media-related
xx34xxxx-xxxx PDL-related
xx80xxxx-xxxx Printhead-related
xx81xxxx-xxxx Inktank-related
xx83xxxx-xxxx Inktank-related
xx84xxxx-xxxx Maintenance cartridge-related
xx86xxxx-xxxx Print-related
xx87xxxx-xxxx Cutter-related
xx89xxxx-xxxx Media take-up unit-related
xx8Bxxxx-xxxx Stacker-related
xx90xxxx-xxxx Version up-related
6-2
Chapter 6
6.2.2 Warning/Error/Service Call Error
6.2.2.1 Code Table

0032-0887
Code
Panel display Panel display
(last 4 digits) Explanation/Detection sequence Remedial Action
(Large LCD) (Small LCD)
- Sheet printing Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Printing on cut sheet is not functional
is selected, but Print data having a cut sheet print with a media take-up unit in use.
a roll is loaded. specification has been received with media
take-up unit use being selected.
- Media Type not Media Check Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Check the cassette pick-up setting/
compatible with Please Cancel Cassette pickup has been specified for paper type.
cassette. Cas Cannot Feed paper that does not support cassette pickup.
Check Media Type. Please Check
Stop: Stop Printing

- Regular printing Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Check the cassette pick-up setting/
is selected, but Print data having a manual feed print paper type.
a roll is loaded. specification has been received at the
completion of roll paper pickup.
Press OK,
remove the roll,
and load sheets.
- Papr Type Mismatch PaprTyp Mismatch Paper mismatch (type) This is a warning and allows continued
(1) Mismatch following the selection of printing.
any of the following menu choices:
- [Warning Indication] has been selected
for [Paper Mismatch Detection].
- [ON] has been selected for [Paper Error
Skip].
(2) On forced printing following a
mismatch resulting from the selection of
the following menu option:
- [Pause] has been selected for [Paper
Mismatch Detection].
- Paper Mismatch Paper mismatch (both type and size) This is a warning and allows continued
Skip].
- Papr Size Mismatch PaprSiz Mismatch Paper mismatch (size) This is a warning and allows continued
Skip].
- Cannot print Paper mismatch (size) Replace the paper with appropriate
as specified. When performing internal printing, paper one.
loaded is smaller than the size specified for
Lift the release each print purpose.
lever and replace
paper with XXX [XXX]: appropriate paper size
(vertical) or larger
- Sheet printing Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Load cut sheet.
is selected. No cassette paper has been loaded when
data having a cut sheet specification is
Press Load/Eject received. (Paper type /size not determined)
and load sheets.
- Sheet printing Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Load cut sheet.
is selected. No cassette paper has been loaded when
received.
(Paper type /size not determined)
- Paper Pos Wrong Paper Pos Wrong Invalid paper loading position
Paper is invalidly positioned on the platen.
- Turn on the media Printing has started with the media take-up Switch on the media take-up unit.
take-up unit. unit setting of [Use] and with the media
take-up unit switched off. *A measure for a third-party media
take-up unit that is not connected to the
main unit.
6-3
Chapter 6
Code
- Media take-up unit Media take-up unit use has been set to [Do 1. Press the [Online] button to set the
ready. not use] at the start of printing when the media take-up unit use setting to force
media take-up unit is active. [Use] and print.
Online: Print 2. Press the [Stop] key to cancel
Stop: Stop Printing printing.
- End of paper feed. Feed Limit.. Forced feed limit The message clears automatically 2
Cannot feed Paper being manually fed in the return seconds later.
paper more. direction (back-feeding) has reached the Check the Paper detection sensor/
pinch roller position. Media sensor sensor (I/O mode).
- Close Ink Tank Ink tank cover open while printing The message clears when the ink tank
Cover On a model having a subtank, the ink tank cover is closed.
cover opened while printing. (Printing is Check the sensor (I/O mode).
allowed to continue.)
- The roll feed unit The roll unit has been pulled out during Close the roll unit.
is loose. Push it standby or printing on the lower roll paper
all the way in. or cut sheet A3 or less.
- Prepare for parts W Level 1 Durable parts replacement due soon Check the parts counter and prepare
replacement. Consumables Low Any of the parts counters has reached the target unit or Refresh Service Kit.
Call for service. warning level 1. Initialize the parts counter for the
- Parts replacement W Level 2 Durable parts replacement due soon target unit after the replacement.
time has passed. Repl Consumables Any of the parts counters has reached
Call for service. warning level 2.
1000 Ink Level: Check Ink Lvl: Chk XX Ink tank near-empty (continued use 1. Replace the tank (continued usage
to Not much ink is allowed) allowed).
100C left. Prepare to The remaining volume of ink is 2. If the problem persists after the tank
replace the ink. diminishing (below the pin check level). has been replaced, the remaining ink
(XX: Target color display) detection system is at fault. (Replace
the supply unit or check catching wire
Last 2 digits of error code: or connection status of harness.)
00:Bk, 01:Y, 02:M, 03:C, 04:PM, 05:PC,
06:MBk1, 07:MBk2, 08:GY, 09:PGY,
0A:R, 0B:B, 0C:G
100F End of paper feed. End of paper feed. The limit of forced paper feeding. The The message is cleared automatically
Cannot feed media reached to a pinchroller at feeding after displaying for 2sec.
paper any more. backfeed media manually. Confirmation of Paper detection
(not an error or a failure) sensor/ Media sensor sensor (I/O
mode)
1010 Problem with CheckPrintout:LR Head non-ejection warning (Check 1. Check image quality. (Unless there
Printhead L/R printout/ possible to continue printing) are problems with the image quality,
Chk printing results there is no need to replace the
Check printed Check Printout See 280C for detection criteria. printhead.)
document. 2. Replace the printhead.
1012 Problem with CheckPrintout:R Printhead R non-ejection warning (double-

Printhead R head model)
Chk printing results (Check printout/ possible to continue
printing)
See 280C for detection criteria.

1013 Problem with CheckPrintout:L Printhead L non-ejection warning (double-
Printhead L head model)
Chk printing results (Check printout/ possible to continue
printing)
See 280C for detection criteria.

1015 This type of paper GL2: Unsup. papr HP-GL2 error: out of the scope of paper When [Warning Indication] is selected
is not compatible GL2: Incompatible paper support Replace with appropriate paper.
with HP-GL/2. type [Warning Indication] or [Pause] have been
Press Online Starts printing selected for [Paper Mismatch Detection]. When [Pause] is selected
1. Press the [Online] button to force
The paper that is being fed does not support printing.
HP-GL/2 printing; that is, a paper type that Caution) Due to use of image process
does not have a required print mode has table (LUT) defined for HP-GL/2
been set. compatible paper different from the
specified paper, you might have a
problem in quality of image.
2. Press the [Stop] button to cancel
printing.
1021 Papr Type Mismatch MediaType Mismatch Paper mismatch (type) Continued printing is allowed.
With [Warning Indication] is selected for Check driver setting.
[Paper Mismatch Detection], the type of Replace with appropriate paper.
loaded paper mismatches the specified
type. Or, with [Pause] is selected for [Paper
Mismatch Detection], the [Online] button
was pressed to execute forced printing.
1022 Papr Type Mismatch MediaType Mismatch Paper mismatch (type) Continued printing is allowed.
With [Warning Indication] is selected for Check driver setting.
[Paper Mismatch Detection], the type of Replace with appropriate paper.
loaded paper mismatches the specified
type. Or, with [Pause] is selected for [Paper
Mismatch Detection], the [Online] button
was pressed to execute forced printing.
6-4
Chapter 6
Code
1030 GARO W1221 GARO W1221 (Image mode)Unknown command 1. Identify the model.
A character that is located within bounds of 2. If the error has occurred with RIP,
a group character or end parameter try with the printer driver.
character but that is not defined as a 3. Try in an alternative environment (I/
command has been detected during Image F, PC).
mode command decoding.
1031 GARO W1222 GARO W1222 (Image mode) Invalid parameter count (no
parameters)
A numeric field has not been identified as
being numeric during Image mode
command decoding.
1032 GARO W1223 GARO W1223 (Image mode) Required item missing
A character out of bounds has been
detected where a group or end parameter
character ought to exist, during Image
mode command decoding.
1034 GARO W1225 GARO W1225 (Image mode)Other warning
A character other than <ESC> has been
detected right after the image mode
analysis module entered Image mode or
when the decoding of a single command
ended.
1035 GARO W1231 GARO W1231 (Setup mode)Unknown command
A command character string other than
RESET, SET, OPCMT0 and OPCMT2 has
been detected in a PJL command.
1036 GARO W1232 GARO W1232 (Setup mode)Invalid parameter count
Too many or too few parameters have been
detected during Setup mode command
decoding.
1037 GARO W1233 GARO W1233 (Setup mode) Required item missing
The exit parameter is missing in the
EnterGAROMode command and the
UniversalExitLanguage command used in
Setup mode.
1038 GARO W1234 GARO W1234 (Setup mode)Data out of bounds
A character string that is not defined as an
environmental variable has been detected.
An unknown environmental variable has
been detected.
A character string that is not defined as an
environmental variable value has been
detected.
The value of an unknown environmental
variable has been detected.
1039 GARO W1235 GARO W1235 (Setup mode) Other warning
A character string other than the @PJL
prefix has been detected while the analysis
module was idle.
103A GARO W1226 GARO W1226 (Image mode) Image processing table error 1. Retransmit.
No image processing table is being 2. Check with a different interface
transmitted, a required image processing choice.
table is unavailable, or an image processing 3. Try by printing other data.
table contains a value out of bounds. 4. With RIP, print from the print
driver.
Supplement: If this error occurs, the
print result would appear blank.
1040 GL2: W0501 GL2: W0501 HP/GL2 error; Insufficient memory 1. Reduce the size of rendering data.
The memory is full. capacity 2. Replace with HP RTL data for
The size of drawing data exceeds the manipulation with On The Fly*.
processing capacity.
*: On The Fly: The method to transmit
data in sequence from paper. The
software that generates HP-GL/2 data
has this option to specify. Select this
option to save the memory usage of the
printer.
1041 GL2: W0502 GL2: W0502 HP/GL2 error; invalid parameter Verify the data and fix it.
The parameter is out Data having an invalid number of types of
of range. parameters that follow the command has
been detected.
1043 GL2: W0504 GL2: W0504 HP/GL2 error; Invalid command Verify the data and fix it.
This command is not A command that is not defined in HP-GL/2
supported. or HP RTL is included.
1047 GL2: W0903 GL2: W0904 HP/GL2 error; replot buffer overflow 1. Reduce the size of rendering data.
The memory is full. Data storage buffers have run short. 2. Replace with HP RTL data for
manipulation with On The Fly*.

printer.
6-5
Chapter 6
Code
1048 GL2: W0904 GL2: W0903 HP/GL2 error; polygon buffer overflow 1. Reduce the size of rendering data.
The memory is full. The size of drawing data exceeds the 2. Replace with HP RTL data for
processing capacity. manipulation with On The Fly*.

printer.
1049 Before borderless When print data with borderless printing Open the platen shutter.
printing, move the specification has been received, platen
blue platen switch. shutter was closed.
1050 Blue platen switch Cleaning of platen shutter is necessary. Clean the platen shutter.
is dirty. Please
clean the switch. When reading the platen shutter in
multisensor, borderless printing data has
been received in unstable output condition.
1051 Paper Too Small Paper mismatch (size) Continued printing allowed.
Size clip warning Check driver settings.
With [Warning Indication] selected for Replace with appropriate paper.
[Paper Mismatch Detection] in the menu
settings, the size of paper loaded is smaller
than that of specified from driver.
1052 Borderless printng Borderless printing not available Replace with appropriate paper.
not possible. Check (unsupported size)
supported paper.
With [Warning Indication] selected for
[Paper Mismatch Detection] in the menu
settings, borderless printing data is
received, but roll paper not supporting
borderless printing has been loaded.
1053 Paper position not Borderless printing not available (physical) Reload/ replace the roll paper.
suitable for With [Warning Indication] selected for
borderless printing. [Paper Mismatch Detection] in the menu
settings, borderless printing data is
received, but roll paper loaded is more than
1mm off the predefined position for the
pre-ejection opening at the counter-HP
side.
1053 Borderless printng Reload/ replace the roll paper.
not possible. Check Check the borderless spacer.
pap. pos. or spacer
1054 PaprWidth Mismatch Paper mismatch (size) Continued printing allowed.
With [Warning Indication] selected for Check driver settings.
[Paper Mismatch Detection] in the menu Replace with appropriate paper.
settings, the width of roll paper loaded and
that of specified by data do not match.
1056 Move the blue The multisensor detected that the platen Move the platen shutter relevant to the
to platen switch No.XX shutter used for pre-ejection was closed. message to the right, to open it.
1062 to the right. Detection timing:
-At paper loading
-At start of first printing (after upper cover
is opened and closed, or recovery from
sleep mode, or the power is turned on with
paper loaded)
The following list shows the last 2 digits of

error codes and the corresponding
messages.
56:No.2, 57:No.3, 58:No.459:No.5,
5A:No.6, 5B:No.75C:No.8,
5D:No.9, 5E:No.105F:No.11, 60:No.12,
61:No.13, 62:No.14
1100 Prepare for MTCart Full Soon Maintenance cartridge near-full (continued Prepare a maintenance cartridge.
maint cart usage allowed)
replacement. Near-full has been detected from the dot
count and the usage period (drying time).
<Maintenance cartridge detection timings>

The presence of a maintenance cartridge is
detected at the following timings:
1. Before printing/during printing (twice
per second)/at the end of printing/ between
pages
2. Before a recovery operation/during a
recovery operation (twice per second)/
before opening of the ink supply valve
3. When the cartridge is removed and
inserted following the occurrence of an
error or warning.
1101 Replace part soon. Mist Full Soon Mist count near-full Check the parts counter and replace the
Waste ink near-full has been detected from target unit or Refresh Service Kit.
the dot count. Initialize the parts counter for the
target unit after the replacement.
6-6
Chapter 6
Code
1400 No ink left. Ink tank empty (continued use allowed) 1. Replace the tank.
to Press OK and The ink tank has run out of ink, but a 2. Failure of remaining ink detection
140C replace ink tank. certain volume of ink is reserved in the system.
Ink tank is empty. subtank. (The reserved volume of ink is put (Replace the supply unit /check the
Replace the ink to use after the remaining ink falls below bundled wires.)
tank. the pin check level.)
Displayed only on models having a
subtank.
(XX: Display applicable colors)
Last 2 digits: 00:Bk, 01:Y, 02:M, 03:C,
04:PM, 05:PC, 06:MBk1, 07:MBk2,
08:GY, 09:PGY, 0A:R, 0B:B, 0C:G
1410 No ink tank Ink tank not installed (continued use 1. Mount the tank.
to loaded. allowed) 2. Failure of remaining ink detection
141C Check ink tank. The ink tank is not installed but a sufficient system.
volume of ink is left in the subtank. (Replace the supply unit /check the
Displayed only on models having a bundled wires.)
subtank.
This occurs in cases such as when the ink
tank cover is opened during printing, and
the ink tank is removed. (XX: Displays
applicable colors)
Last 2 digits: 10:Bk, 11:Y, 12:M, 13:C,
14:PM, 15:PC, 16:MBk1, 17:MBk2,
18:GY, 19:PGY, 1A:R, 1B:B, 1C:G
200A Paper size not Paper Paper size detection failure
detected. Press Load/Eject Please Reload Cannot detect the paper width (poorly
and reload the Size Undetected positioned paper).
paper.
Paper size not
detected. Reload paper.
Paper size not
detected. Press OK and
reload the paper.
200B Paper size not Paper Paper size detection failure
detected. Reload paper. Please Reload Paper is invalidly positioned on the platen.
Size Undetected
200C Paper size not Paper Paper size detection failure
detected. Please Reload Cannot detect the leading edge of the
Press Load/Eject Size Undetected paper.
and reload the The leading edge of paper has been located
paper. by coarse detection but not by a second
Paper size not round of fine detection (up to 300 mm)
detected. (semi-transparent paper).
Reload paper. (This is the message when the release lever
operation is not necessary.)
Paper size not Papr Size Paper size detection failure
detected. Undetected Cannot detect the leading edge of the
Lift the release Press Online Key paper.
lever and reload and Reload The leading edge of paper has been located
the paper. by coarse detection but not by a second
round of fine detection (up to 300 mm)
(semi-transparent paper).
200D Paper size not Paper Paper size detection failure 1. Check to see if roll paper are not
detected. Please Reload Cannot detect the trailing edge of the paper. loaded in the cut sheet mode.
Press Load/Eject Size Undetected -Cannot detect the trailing edge of the cut 2. Load cut sheet.
and reload the sheet loaded after they have been fed 50
paper. mm.
Leading edge -Cannot locate the trailing edge of the
detection error. paper that has been found by coarse
Lift the release detection.
lever and align
leading edge
with orange line.
Paper size not
detected.
Lift the release
lever and reload
the paper.
Paper size not
detected.
Reload paper.
200E This paper Paper Size Paper is too small 1. Check paper conditions (soiling,
cannot be used. Please Check The width and length of paper detected are tear-offs, residual paper chips, residual
Check supported Paper Too Small shorter than the supported size (1.5% trimming cuts, folds)/size.
paper sizes. margin). 2. Has the paper been fed successfully
This paper Paper Size (without slippage under a load or any
cannot be used. Please Check influence)?
Check supported Paper Too Small 3. Has the LF adjustment value set
paper sizes. Press Online Key correctly?
Load/Eject: Change Paper 4. Hasn't the loaded paper shrunk to
below its margin in the particular
environment?
6-7
Chapter 6
Code
200F This paper Paper Size Paper mismatch (size) 1. Check paper conditions (soiling,
cannot be used. Please Check Paper is too large tear-offs, residual paper chips, residual
Check supported Paper Too Large -The width and length of paper detected are trimming cuts, folds)/size.
paper sizes. longer than the supported size (1.5% 2. Has the paper been fed successfully
This paper Paper Too Large margin). (without slippage under a load or any
cannot be used. Please Check -Cannot detect the leading edge of paper influence)?
Check supported Press Online Key even when the paper has been fed by 1300 3. Has the LF adjustment value set
paper sizes. and Reload mm for roll paper and by the size correctly?
Load/Eject: Change Paper mentioned above for cut sheet. 4. Hasn't the loaded paper shrunk to
-Cannot detect the width of paper even below its margin in the particular
when the paper is fed by the size mentioned environment?
above.
2010 Paper loaded askew. Paper Askew Skew (skewed right) Reload the paper.
Press Load/Eject Please Reload
and reload the Paper Skew Paper is determined skewed as its edge is
paper. read by the multisensor.
Paper loaded askew. Paper Loaded
Reload the paper. Crooked
Press Online Key
and Reload
Paper loaded askew. Paper loaded
Lift the askew.
release lever. Remove paper
Paper loaded askew.
Lift the release
lever and reload
the paper.
Paper loaded askew.
Press OK and
reload the paper.
Paper loaded askew
Lift the release lever.
2015 Cannot cut paper. <When small LCD 1> Cutting failure/jam detected due to a
Press Load/Eject Cutting Error cutting failure
and reload the Please Cut Papr An idle cutter unit or a cutter blade that is
paper. too blunt to cut sheet has been detected by
Cannot cut paper. <When small LCD 2> the paper leading edge detection sequence.
Reload the paper. Press (upper arrow) Key
to Release Paper
Cannot cut paper.
Lift the release
lever and reload
the paper.
Paper cutting
failed. Lift the
release lever.
2016 No sheets. Sheets Paper loosened out of position while Reload the paper.
Press Load/Eject Please Load printing
and reload the Sheet Not Loaded The trailing edge of paper has been
paper. detected at least 20 mm shorter than the
No sheets. length of cut forms detected.
Lift the release
lever and reload the sheets.
The paper is too
small.
Check paper size.
Sheet removed.
Lift the release
lever.
Paper jam. Paper Jam Jam while picking up, ejecting or printing 1. Open and close the release lever to
Press Load/Eject and reload Press (upper arrow) Key on paper reload the paper.
the (A sequence of removing jams with the 2. Remove the paper once and then
paper. pinch roller released is required) refeed it.
Paper jam. Paper Jam Virtually all recovery errors that could
Manually rewind roll Press (upper arrow) Key occur in connection with paper pickup are
all the way. Paper Eject Err handled.
Paper jam. Remove Paper

Manually rewind roll
all the way
and press OK.
Cannot feed paper
Lift the release
lever and reload paper.
Cannot feed paper.
Reload the paper.
Cannot feed paper.
Press Load/Eject
and reload the
paper.
6-8
Chapter 6
Code
2017 Paper size not detected. Paper Paper (right) side detection error
Lift the release Please Reload 1. Multisensor error on light quantity
lever and reload Size Undetected adjustment
the paper. Press (upper arrow) Key 2. The read reference paper edge is 5 mm or
more apart from its theoretical position.
Paper size is undetected. Papr Size 3. Cannot locate the edge of reference
Reload paper. Undetected paper.
Paper size not Press Online Key

detected. and Reload
Press Load/Eject
and reload the
paper.
Paper size not
detected. Lift the
release lever.
Could not detect
paper size. Push
release lever back, then pull
out the
cut sheet.
Could not detect
paper size.
Press OK, then Insert roll
paper straight into feed
slot..
2018 Paper size not detected. Papr Size Paper (left) side detection error
Lift the release Undetected The non-reference edge of paper has been
lever and reload Press Online Key located by coarse detection but not by a
the paper. and Reload second round of fine detection.
Paper size not detected.
Reload paper.
Paper size not detected. Paper
Press Load/Eject Please Reload
and reload the Size Undetected
paper. Press (upper arrow) Key
Paper size not detected.
Lift release lever.
Could not detect
paper size. Push
release lever back, then pull
out the
cut sheet.
Could not detect
paper size.
Press OK, then insert roll
paper
straight into feed
slot.
2019 Cannot cut paper. Cutting failure/jam detected due to a
Lift the release cutting failure
lever and reload An idle cutter unit or a cutter blade that is
the paper. too blunt to cut sheet has been detected by
Cannot cut paper. the paper leading edge detection sequence.
Reload the paper. Or, cutter unit home position detection was
failed.
Paper cutting
failed. Lift the
release lever.
Paper cutting
failed. Remove the paper
after cutting at the
top of feed slot. Push the
release
lever back.
201A Paper not aligned When loading cut sheet, paper (right) side The error is cleared by releasing the
with right guide. detection was failed. release lever. After that, load paper to
Press OK and the correct position.
then reload the
roll paper.
Paper not aligned
with right guide. Push the
release
lever back, then
reload the paper.
201B Roll paper is not When loading roll paper, paper (right) side Paper is ejected automatically, and by
securely in contact detection was failed. pressing the [OK] button the error is
with roll holder. cleared. After that, load paper to the
Press OK, then correct position.
re-attach the roll
paper.
6-9
Chapter 6
Code
201C Paper jam While printing, paper width was detected By releasing the release lever, move to
Push the release to have fluctuated beyond the predefined the loading sequence, and load paper
lever back. value. to the correct position.
Failure of detecting right edge of the paper
(cut paper, in printing).
201D Paper jam While printing, paper width was detected 1. Cut the paper near the feed slot, and
Remove the paper to have fluctuated beyond the predefined remove the paper.
after cutting at the value. 2. Release the release lever, and load
top of feed slot. Push the Failure of detecting right edge of the paper the paper to the correct position.
release (cut paper, in printing).
lever back.
201E Media Type not Media Check Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Check the cassette pick-up setting/
Stop: Stop Printing
2405 Borderless printng Roll Paper Chk Invalid paper loading position (borderless Reload the roll paper.
not possible. Check Width/Spcr printing) Check spacers
Lift the release Borderless Prtng The position at which paper is loaded is
lever and reload Not Possible unfit for borderless printing.
the paper. Data with a borderless print specification
has been received while the left or right
Online: Print edge of roll paper was off the center of the
Bordless Printing borderless print idle ejection port at the
not possible. Lift completion of roll paper pickup.
release lever and
reload the paper.
Bordless Printing
not possible. Lift
release lever and
reload the paper
Online: Not bordrlss
Stop: Stop Printing
Paper position not
suitable for
borderless printing
Borderless printng
not possible. Check
roll position.
Online: Print
Load/Eject: Change Paper
Borderless printng
not possible. Check
roll width and
spacers.
Online: Print
Load/Eject: Change Paper
2406 Borderless printng Check Supported Borderless print data not printable (logic) Reset the driver and RIP.
not possible. Check paper Paper. Borderless print data was received at the
size setting. No Borderless w/ start of printing and one or more of the
Online: Print This Roll Paper following requirements are met at the same
Load/Eject: Change Paper time:
Borderless printng -A feeder slot other than one for roll paper
not possible. Check has been specified in the data.
supported paper. -A paper type that does not support
borderless printing has been set on the data.
-Banner printing has been specified on the
data at the same time.
-A paper size that does not support
borderless printing has been specified in a
job for which paper had already been fed.
2407 Borderless printng It occurs when all of the following Reset /replace the roll paper.
not possible. Paper conditions are met at start of printing. Confirm and explain usage
stretched or shrank. environment.
Confirm usage cond. -Borderless printing data has been
of the paper. received.
-Roll paper has been loaded, and its paper
width and edge position recognized at
loading are within the supported range of
borderless printing.
-As a result of right/left side edge detection
after start of print processing, it was
detected as beyond the supported range of
borderless printing.
2408 Borderless printng At the start of borderless printing, roll Replace with appropriate paper.
not possible. Check paper whose size doesn't support
supported paper. borderless printing has been loaded.
Bordless Printing
not possible. Lift
release lever and
reload the paper.
6-10
Chapter 6
Code
2409 Paper position is not Invalid paper loading position (suspended Reload/ replace the roll paper.
suitable for job/ borderless printing) Check roll paper.
borderless printing. All of the following conditions were met. 1) Select "Normal printing. (No
Check paper position. -Borderless printing data has been borderless printing)" and enforce
Print to normal printing. received. printing.
Stop printing. -Roll paper whose paper loading position is Borderless print setting is ignored.
not suitable for borderless printing has Print with default margin.
been loaded. Default margin depends on selected
-The right or left edge of roll paper is more feeding trays and media type.
than 1mm off the prescribed position of the 2) Select "Stop printing" or press "stop
pre-ejection opening. button"to stop printing.
240A Borderless printing is Borderless printing is not possible 3) Select "replace printing" or release
not possible. Check (suspended job/ unsupported size). All of releasing lever.
supported paper. the following conditions are met.
Check paper position. -Borderless printing data has been
Print to normal printing. received.
Stop printing. -Roll paper not supporting borderless
printing has been loaded.
2500 Ink tank is empty. No Ink Left Ink tank empty (continued use not allowed) 1. Replace the tank.
to Press OK and (lower arrow) The ink tank has run out of ink. (The 2. If the problem persists after the tank
250C replace ink tank. reserved volume of ink is put to use after has been replaced, the remaining ink
No ink left. the remaining ink falls below the pin check detection system is at fault (replace the
Replace ink tank. level.) supply unit or check the bundled
(In the small LCD, the lower arrow points wires).
to the color in question.)
The last 2 digits signify applicable colors.

00:Bk, 01:Y, 02:M, 03:C, 04:PM, 05:PC,
06:MBk1,
07:MBk2, 08:GY, 09:PGY, 0A:R, 0B:B,
0C:G
2510 Ink level is Online Key Remaining ink level unknown (continued Replace the ink tank.
to unknown. Press To Print use allowed)
251C Check ink level. Ink Lvl Unknown The level of ink remaining in the tank is
Press Online to start Press Online detected when the tank cover is closed.
printing. Consumption has exceeded the original ink
capacity (mismatch detected).
Refill ink may have been used.
(In the small LCD, the lower arrow points

10:Bk, 11:Y, 12:M, 13:C, 14:PM, 15:PC,
16:MBk1,
17:MBk2, 18:GY, 19:PGY, 1A:R, 1B:B,
1C:G
2520 No ink tank Ink Tank Ink tank not installed (continued use not 1. Remove and then reinstall the tank.
to loaded. Check XX allowed) 2. Replace the tank.
252C Press OK and No Ink Tank On a model that is furnished with a 3. Failure of remaining ink detection
check ink tank. Check Ink Tank subtank, this error is indicated if the system.
No ink tank subtank has run out of ink and the state of (Replace the supply unit /check the
loaded. an ink tank not being installed is detected. bundled wires.)
Check ink tank.
20:Bk, 21:Y, 22:M, 23:C, 24:PM, 25:PC,
26:MBk1,
27:MBk2, 28:GY, 29:PGY, 2A:R, 2B:B,
2C:G
2540 Ink tank error. Ink Tank Ink tank ID error 1. Replace the tank.
to Press OK and Replace BK The type of ink tank is wrong. 2. Failure of remaining ink detection
254C replace ink tank. Ink Tank Error system.
Wrong ink tank. Repl. Ink Tank The last 2 digits signify applicable colors. (Replace the supply unit /check the
Replace ink tank. 40:Bk, 41:Y, 42:M, 43:C, 44:PM, 45:PC, bundled wires.)
46:MBk1,
Wrong ink tank. 47:MBk2, 48:GY, 49:PGY, 4A:R, 4B:B,
Press OK and 4C:G
replace ink tank.
2560 Ink tank error. Ink Tank Ink tank EEPROM error 1. Replace the tank.
to Press OK and Replace BK There is an error in tank EEPROM. 2. Failure of remaining ink detection
256C replace ink tank. Ink Tank Error system.
Repl. Ink Tank The last 2 digits signify applicable colors. (Replace the supply unit /check the
60:Bk, 61:Y, 62:M, 63:C, 64:PM, 65:PC, bundled wires.)
66:MBk1, 67:MBk2, 68:GY, 69:PGY,
6A:R, 6B:B, 6C:G
6-11
Chapter 6
Code
2570 Ink insufficient. Ink tank short on ink 1. Replace the tank.
to Press OK and A suction operation was attempted, but 2. Failure of remaining ink detection
257C replace ink tank. there is not enough ink left in the tank for system.
the operation (iPF8000 series, iPF9000 (Replace the supply unit /check the
series). bundled wires.)
Reference)
About 5 mL to 40 mL of ink may have been
left in the tank when this warning occurs.
70:Bk, 71:Y, 72:M, 73:C, 74:PM, 75:PC,
76:MBk1, 77:MBk2, 78:GY, 79:PGY,
7A:R, 7B:B, 7C:G
2580 Ink insufficient. Not Enough Ink Ink tank short on ink 1. Replace the ink.
to Press OK and (lower arrow) A suction operation was attempted, but 2. Failure of remaining ink detection
258C replace ink tank. Replace ink tank there is not enough ink left in the tank for system.
Ink insufficient. orOnline to prnt the operation. (Replace the supply unit /check the
Replace ink tank. (In the small LCD, the lower arrow points bundled wires.)
Reference)
80:Bk, 81:Y, 82:M, 83:C, 84:PM, 85:PC,
86:MBk1, 87:MBk2, 88:GY, 89:PGY,
8A:R, 8B:B, 8C:G
2590 Ink insufficient. Not Enough Ink Ink tank short on ink 1. Replace the ink.
to Press OK and (lower arrow) A print operation was attempted, but there 2. Failure of remaining ink detection
259C replace ink tank. Replace ink tank is not enough ink left in the tank for the system.
(*1) Ink insufficient. orOnline to prnt operation. (Replace the supply unit /check the
Replace ink tank. (In the small LCD, the lower arrow points bundled wires.)
Reference)
90:Bk, 91:Y, 92:M, 93:C, 94:PM, 95:PC,
96:MBk1, 97:MBk2, 98:GY, 99:PGY,
9A:R, 9B:B, 9C:G
(*1) 259C: 03810208-259C
259C Ink insufficient. Ink insufficientPress (lower Ink insufficient in inktank. 1. Replace inktank
(*2) Press OK and arrow) key. The amount of ink left in the inktank is 2. Failure of detecting the ink amount
to replace ink tank. Replace inktank or start insufficient for printing. (In the small LCD, leftintheinktank.
25A8 Ink insufficient. printing online. the lower arrow points to the (Replace the supply unit /check the
Press OK and correspondence color.) bundled wires.)
replace ink tank.
Reference)
There are the cases that about 5ml to 40ml
ink is left in a inktank at warning occurs.
9C:Bk,9D:C,9E:M,9F:Y,A0:PC,A1:PM,A
2:MBk1,A3:MBk2,
A4:GY,A5:PGY,A6:R,A7:G,A8:B
(*2) 259C: 03810104-259C
25B7 Close the ink tank The remaining ink falls below the pin Close the ink tank cover.
cover. Unable to detect ink check level while ink tank cover is open.
level correctly. Note) It does not recover if the cover is
Unable to detect ink level open when replacing the ink tank with
correctly. a valid one.
If removing the ink tank with lower ink

remains (LIR) than Supply Pin in this
situation, an error is detected.
Also when keeping printing in this
situation, if empty subtank
corresponding to the ink tank with LIR
is detected, the error shifts from ink
tank with LIR to empty subtank.
260E Hardware error. Power On Gap detection failure 1. Check to see if the multisensor
03130031-260E Again Carriage gap calibration has not been reference plate (white patch for batch
Gap Detect Err carried out, or gap detection is disabled by correction) is not soiled and perform
Turn off printer, corrupt calibration data. GAP CALIB (if soiled, adjust the part
wait, then after replacing it).
turn on again. 2. Replace the multisensor and
perform GAP CALIB.
3. Replace the carriage unit and
perform GAP CALIB.
260F Gap error. Power On Gap reference plane error Check the multisensor reference plate
Again Request to replace an abnormal reference (for soiling and faulty mounting).
Turn off printer. Gap Error plane sheet (only in Service mode).
2618 Hardware error. Vh voltage error
03130031-2618
Turn off printer,

wait, then
turn on again.
6-12
Chapter 6
Code
2800 No printhead Printhead Printhead [X] non-existing 1. Check the status of the printhead
Install printhead. Please Check mounted.
No Printhead [X]: Double-head model : The R-head does 2. Mount the long flexible cable and
Check Printhead not exist. check the status of the cable being
Single-head model: The head does not exit. locked.
2801 Printhead error Printhead Printhead [X] DI correction failure Replace the printhead.
Open top cover and Please Replace
replace the Printhead Error [X]: Double-head model: R head DI
printhead. Replace Printhd correction failure
Single-head model: Head DI correction
failure
2802 Printhead error Printhead An invalid printhead has been mounted in Replace with a valid printhead.
Open top cover and Please Replace [X]. (An error has occurred but the
replace the Printhead Error printhead itself is not damaged, so
printhead. Replace Printhd [X]: Double-head model: Invalid head communication has been maintained
mounted on the R-side properly.)
Single-head model: Invalid head mounted
2803 Printhead error Printhead Printhead [X] EEPROM error Replace the printhead.
Open top cover and Please Replace
replace the Printhead Error [X]: Double-head model: R head
printhead. Replace Printhd EEPROM error
Single-head model: Head EEPROM error
2804 PHeads: wrong pos. Printhead Printheads mounted in L/R opposite Replace with a valid printhead. (An
Open top cover and Check Printhead positions error has occurred but the printhead
check the L/R Heads Revrsd L printhead is mounted on R side. itself is not damaged, so
printhead positions. Check Printheads communication has been maintained
properly.)
The L/R printheads cannot be
interchanged.
2805 Printhead error. The specified time has been passed in 1. Acclimate to room temperature.
lower printhead temperature than the 2. Replace the printhead.
Open top cover and replace specified temperature. 3. Replace the main controller PCB.
the printhead. 4. Replace the CR board.
2807 PHeads: wrong pos. Printhead Printhead mounted in L/R opposite Replace with a valid printhead. (An
Open top cover and Check Printhead positions. error has occurred but the printhead
check the L/R Heads Revrsd R printhead is mounted on L side. itself is not damaged, so
printhead positions. Check Printheads communication has been maintained
properly.)
The L/R printheads cannot be
interchanged.
2808 No left printhead Printhead Left Printhead L non-existing 1. Check the status of the printhead
Install left Chk L Printhead mounted.
printhead. No Left Printhd 2. Mount the long flexible cable and
Chk L Printhead check the status of the cable being
locked.
2809 Left printhead Printhead Left Printhead L DI correction failure Replace the printhead.
error Replace Printhd
Open top cover and Left Printhd Err
replace the left Replace Printhd
printhead.
280A Left printhead Printhead Left Invalid printhead L has been mounted. Replace with a valid printhead.
error Replace Printhd (An error has occurred but the
Open top cover and Left Printhd Err printhead itself is not damaged, so
replace the left Replace Printhd communication has been maintained
printhead. properly.)
280B Left printhead Printhead Left Printhead L EEPROM error Replace the printhead.
error Replace Printhd
Open top cover and Left Printhd Err
replace the left Replace Printhd
printhead.
280C PHead needs Printhead (R) Printhead R non-ejection warning (Check 1. Check image quality. (Unless there
280D cleaning. Check Nozzles printhead) Printing paused/ continued are problems with the image quality,
280E Press Online to clear error. Online Key printing allowed there is no need to replace the
The printhead Press To Print printhead.)
requires cleaning. The level of error is decided as shown in 2. Replace the printhead.
the table below, based on the number of
The printhead non-ejecting nozzles per color (per chip)
requires cleaning. and the number of nozzles unable to back
Online=Print up.
Stop=Stop Printing
Execute printhead Depending on the firmware version, the
cleaning. If this specifications vary as shown in the table
message is still below.
displayed, replace
the printhead.
1. Initial firmware
No. of nozzles impossible to back up

Less than 30 30 or over
6-13
Chapter 6
No. of non-ejecting more than 0, less than --- Check printout

nozzles 100
1 color (per chip) more than 100, less --- Check head
than 200
200 or over Check head Check head
2. Running change firmware

The specifications have been changed from the versions shown below.
iPF500/600/5000/700: Ver.1.33, iPF510/610/710/8000/9000: Ver.1.36
iPF8100/9100/8000S/9000S: Ver.1.37, iPF810/820/6000S: Ver.1.03
iPF605/6200: Ver.1.02, iPF5100/6100: Ver.1.38, iPF720:Ver.1.10
You can choose A:(default setting) or B:(if you want to use automatic stop) from Service mode.
A: (default setting) No. of non-ejecting more than 0, less than ---

nozzles 320
1 color (per chip) 320 or over Head replacement
B: (If you want to use No. of nozzles impossible to back up
automatic stop) less than 30 30 or over
nozzles 100
1 color (per chip) more than 100, less --- Check printhead
than 320
320 or over Replace printhead Replace printhead
3. iPF650/750 series, iPF6300/6350/8300 and later model

You can choose A:(default setting) or B:(if you want to use automatic stop) from User mode.
A (Default setting) No. of non-ejecting more than 0, less than ---

nozzles 320
1 color (per chip) 320 or over Head replacement
B (if you want to use No. of nozzles impossible to back up
automatic stop) less than 30 30 or over
nozzles 100
1 color (per chip) more than 100, less --- Check printhead
than 320
320 or over Replace printhead Replace printhead
Error code Applicable printhead

Check printout 1010 LR or single-head
model
1012 R printhead
1013 L printhead
Check printhead 280C LR or single-head
model
280D R printhead
280E L printhead
Replace printhead 2827 LR or single-head
model
2828 R printhead
2829 L printhead
Code
2811 Printhead Printhead Replace Printhd Incompatible printhead version Replace with a valid printhead.
error Printhd Err (An error has occurred but the
Open top cover and Replace Printhd printhead itself is not damaged, so
replace the left communication has been maintained
Wrong printhead.
Open top cover and

replace the
printhead.
2812 Right printhead Printhead Right Incompatible printhead R version Replace with a valid printhead.
Open top cover and Right Printhd Err printhead itself is not damaged, so
replace the right Replace Printhd communication has been maintained
2813 Left printhead Printhead Left Incompatible printhead L version Replace with a valid printhead.
Open top cover and Left Printhd Err printhead itself is not damaged, so
replace the left Replace Printhd communication has been maintained
6-14
Chapter 6
Code
2816 Maintenance Maint Cartridge Maintenance cartridge EEPROM error Replace the maintenance cartridge.
cartridge problem. Replace Cart Communication is enabled but the
Maint Cart Error information is corrupted.
Replace Replace Cart
the maintenance <Maintenance cartridge detection timings>
cartridge. The presence of a maintenance cartridge is
Maintenance detected at the following timings:
cartridge problem. 1. Before printing/during printing (twice
Hold base of maint per second)/at the end of printing/ between
cart firmly. Keep it pages
level during removal 2. Before a recovery operation/during a
error or warning.
2817 Maintenance Maint Cartridge Maintenance cartridge ID error Replace the maintenance cartridge.
cartridge problem. Replace Cart A maintenance cartridge for another model (The maintenance cartridge was
Maint Cart Error has been mounted. capable of normal communication
Replace Replace Cart when the error occurred.)
Wrong maintenance detected at the following timings:
cartridge. 1. Before printing/during printing (twice
Hold base of maint per second)/at the end of printing/ between
cart firmly. Keep it pages
level during removal 2. Before a recovery operation/during a
error or warning.
2818 No maintenance Maint Cartridge Maintenance cartridge not found Remove and reinstall, or replace the
cartridge. Load Cartridge Cannot communicate, or cannot detect a maintenance cartridge.
No Maint Cart maintenance cartridge.
Check Load Cartridge
Insert new maint detected at the following timings:
cart and push in 1. Before printing/during printing (twice
fully per second)/at the end of printing/ between
pages
error or warning.
2819 Maintenance Maint Cartridge Maintenance cartridge full Replace the maintenance cartridge.
cartridge full. Replace Cart Maintenance cartridge full is detected from
Maint Cart Error the dot count and the usage period (drying Reference) The absorber may appear
Replace Replace Cart time). whitish or weigh light, depending on
the maintenance the usage conditions.
cartridge. <Maintenance cartridge detection timings>
Maintenance The presence of a maintenance cartridge is
cartridge full. detected at the following timings:
Hold base of maint 1. Before printing/during printing (twice
cart firmly. Keep it per second)/at the end of printing/ between
level during removal pages
error or warning.
281A Prepare for MTCart Full Soon Maintenance cartridge near-full (continued Prepare a maintenance cartridge.
maint cart usage allowed)
replacement. Near-full has been detected from the dot
count and the usage period (drying time).
<Maintenance cartridge detection timings>

The presence of a maintenance cartridge is
detected at the following timings:
pages
error or warning.
6-15
Chapter 6
Code
281B No MaintenanceCartridge Maint Cartridge The maintenance cartridge before cleaning Replace the maintenance cartridge.
capacity. Replace Cart does not have an enough capacity The maintenance cartridge can be put
Replacethe Maint Cart Error (reusable). to reuse after the end of cleaning.
maintenancecartridge. Replace Cart Near-full has been detected from the dot
No MaintenanceCartridge count and the usage period (drying time). Reference) The absorber may appear
capacity. whitish or weigh light, depending on
Hold base of maint <Maintenance cartridge detection timings> the usage conditions.
cart firmly. Keep it The presence of a maintenance cartridge is
level during removal detected at the following timings:
pages
error or warning.
2820 Cannot adjust Online Key Head registration unadjustable Check the nozzle check pattern
printhead. and recalibrate The adjustment value has gone out of
Printhd Adj Err bounds during automatic head adjustment.
Press Online to Please Readjust
clear the error
and readjust
printhead.
2821 Cannot adjust Online Key LF unadjustable 1. Adjustment is not possible with
band. and recalibrate A detected value has gone out of bounds transparent/semi-transparent paper.
Band Adj Error while performing automatic band Replace with paper having similar
Press Online to Please Readjust adjustment. substrate and perform automatic band
clear the error adjustment or manual adjustment.
and readjust 2. Make detailed band adjustment
the band. (automatic).
Cannot adjust 3. Check the nozzle check pattern.
paper feed. 4. Initialize the system settings/paper
preferences and then add additional
Press OK to clear paper and perform automatic band
the error and adjustment (detailed). If the paper
readjust printhead. preferences are initialized, all the
paper setting would be reset to their
factory defaults.
2822 Cannot adjust OnlineKey: Press Eccentricity uncorrectable (which does not 1. Check the paper type: Replace with
eccentric. To Clear Error occur when in User mode) photo glossy paper (UF120).
Eccent Adj Error A detected value has gone out of bounds 2. Check the paper for soiling, tear and
Press Online to while making adjustment. other defects.
clear the error. Having run LF tuning, update the
Cannot adjust additional paper.
eccentric.
2823 Hardware error. Power On Head check error
03010000-2823 Again
Invalid Head Chk
Turn off printer,
wait, then
turn on again.
2824 Cannot adjust OnlineKey: Press Optical axis unadjustable (which does not Check the paper (paper type check).
optic axis. To Clear Error occur when in User mode)
Optic Axis Adj An adjustment pattern has not been printed.
Press Online to Error The optical axis deviates from the correct
clear the error. position by -/+3 mm or more.
Cannot adjust
optic axis.
2825 This type of media Paper type not compatible with HP-GL/2 Check the paper.
is not compatible has been specified.
with HP-GL/2.
2826 LFNG XXX XXX XXX When executing LF unevenness auto Check the paper.
XXX diagnostic processing, the multisensor read Check the multisensor.
press OK key value has gone outside the predefined
(XXXX is a measured scope (Service mode only).
value.)
6-16
Chapter 6
Code
2827 Execute printhead Printhead non-discharge error 1. Execute cleaning.

2828 cleaning. If this (Replace printhead/ continued printing not 2. Replace printhead.
2829 message is still allowed)
displayed, replace
Printhead. At start of printing the number of non-
Execute printhead ejecting nozzles is more than 320 per color
cleaning. If this (1 chip).
message is still 2827: Both L and R, or single printhead
displayed, replace model
Printhead. 2828: R printhead
[Stop: Stop Printing 2829: L printhead
Execute printhead * For the detailed head non-ejection errors,

cleaning. If this see section 280C.
message is still (If Setting of SERVICE MODE >
displayed, replace SETTING >HEAD WARNING is off, the
printhead . error code is 280E.)
Printing stopped.
[OK]
282A CR MOTOR TUNING Carriage motor identification processing Error is cleared by OK button.
ERROR :PRESS OK (rotation adjustment) failed (for Service 1. Check installation of carriage or
mode) carriage belt.
2. Clean the carriage main rail (Do not
oil it.)
3. Replace the carriage motor.
282B CR VIBRATION When processing carriage motor Error is cleared by OK button.
ERROR :PRESS OK identification (rotation adjustment), 1. Check installation of carriage or
carriage vibration has been detected (for carriage belt.
Service mode). 2. Clean the carriage main rail (Do not
oil it.)
3. Replace the carriage motor.
282D Left printhead Printhead error detected (L head only). After restarting, replace the printhead
error. Displayed when an abnormal temperature L.
rise of printhead has been detected to
Turn off printer, prompt you to restart.
wait, then
turn on again.
282E !Printhead error Temperature rising detected by particular 1. Replace the printhead.
Turn off printer, ink pre-injection before printing was 2. Replace the main controller PCB.
wait, then judged abnormal.
turn on again.
2830 Left printhead Printhead error detected (L head only). Replace the printhead L.
error. Displayed when restarting after detection
of error 282D to prompt you to replace
Open top cover and printhead L.
replace the left
printhead.
2832 Hardware error VHT leak detection error of right printhead iPF6300/6400 Series
03130031-2832 or of a single printhead, in case of VHT iPF8300/8400/9400
Turn off printer, exceeds rated value or falls below the rated Series
wait, then value. Replace right or left
turn on again. printhead.
2833 Hardware error VHT leak detection error of left printhead,
03130031-2833 in case of VHT exceeds rated value or falls
Turn off printer, below the rated value.
wait, then
turn on again.
2834 !Unknown printhead. Open Printhead contact failure is detected after 1. Remove and reinstall the printhead.
top cover and re-install the 2. Replace the printhead.
printhead. printhead installation. 3. Replace the carriage unit.
4. Replace the main controller PCB.
2901 Mail box The available size of the permanent area of Reorganize data.
nearly full. the hard disk space has fallen to less than 1
Delete unwanted data GB.
The mail box is
nearly full. Delete
unwanted jobs.
2902 Mail box full. The hard disk has run out of free space, Reorganize data.
Now printing disabling copy printing or error recovery.
without saving data.
2905 Mail box full. A job save has been executed when the Reorganize data.
Delete unwanted data available size of the permanent area of the
on your computer hard disk space was lost.
to resume printing. Cancel the job.
Press Stop
to cancel printing.
The mail box
is full.
Delete unwanted data
from your computer
to continue.
6-17
Chapter 6
Code
2906 Mail box full. The 101st job has been received when 100 Reorganize data.
Cannot save. Delete jobs are already saved in the permanent
unwanted data on area of the hard disk space.
your computer to
resume printing.
Press Stop to cancel
printing.
Too many jobs for
mail box.
Delete unwanted data
from your computer
to continue.
2907 Mail box full. 100 jobs are already saved in the Reorganize data.
Delete unwanted data permanent area of the hard disk space
Maximum jobs (Warning).
stored. Delete
unwanted data.
2908 Hard disk error. HDD format error 1. Format as instructed by the on-panel
message.
Press OK to reformat 2. Replace the HDD.
Hard disk error.
Press OK to format
HDD and restart the
printer (Takes 40
min). This deletes
all HDD data.
(cannot be canceled)
Hard disk error.
Will format HDD and
restart the printer
(Takes 40 min). This
deletes all HDD data
(cannot be canceled)
2909 File read error. HDD file error Restart the printer.
(The file in error is deleted, but the
Turn off printer, printer will recover normally when it is
wait a while, and restarted.)
turn it on again.
Invalid files
will be deleted.
290A Hardware error. HDD not connected. Connect the HDD/ Check the harness.
03130031-290A HDD was not detected at startup. Replace the HDD.
Turn off printer,
wait, then
turn on again.
2918 Power On Cassette detection sensor detection failure 1. Check to see if the cassette itself is
Again (cassette presence/absence sensor) properly loaded.
Cassette Sensor No cassette has been detected during 2. Check and replace the sensor (I/O
Detection Error cassette pickup. mode).
291A Roll sensor Power On Roll sensor detection failure 1. Check the roll unit, and remove,
cannot detect. Again Could not detect the roll unit. install or replace the roll unit.
Roll Sensor 2. Check I/O mode (roll unit
Turn on printer Detection Error detection).
again.
291B Hardware error. Power On Lift shift timeout 1. Switch off the printer, then back on.
03130031-291B Again A lift operation has been executed, but no 2. The carriage cannot travel to the lift
Lift Motion sensor has been detected or a sensor has drive position.
Turn off printer, Timeout remained detected. 3. The lift drive cam is not engaged.
wait, then 4. Faulty lift drive sensor
turn on again. 5. Faulty lift drive motor
291D Hardware error. Power On Spur cam sensor detection failure Check the spur cam sensor in I/O
03130031-291D Again mode.
Hardware Err 1 -If OK, check the lifter drive system.
Turn off printer, 03130031-291D -If NG, replace the sensor.
wait, then
turn on again.
6-18
Chapter 6
Code
2920 Media Take-up Cannot take up paper 1. Check to see if the media take-up
error. An error check has been made on paper unit is switched on with the lock lever
after the paper had been fed 1850 mm, but down.
Check the paper. the media take-up unit was not driven at all 2. Check the connection between the
Press Online to in that interval (up to about 3700 mm main unit and the media take-up unit.
clear error. [when run immediately after the start of 3. Check to see if the wait roller is
Media Take-up detection]). properly set.
error. 4. Check to see if the media take-up
detection sensor is shielded by paper
Check the paper. when it is presented.
5. Faulty media take-up detection
sensor
6. Faulty Media take-up motor
Media take-up unit Media take-up unit use has been set to [Do Press the [Online] button to set the
ready. not use] at the start of printing when the media take-up unit use setting to force
media take-up unit is active. [Use] and print.
Online: Print The media take-up unit settings are
Stop: Stop Printing checked only when executing external
printing.
2921 Rewinding error. Continued rewinding error 1. Check to see if any obstacle is
Check for jam at The media take-up unit has continued placed at the media take-up paper
indicated position. rewinding for 10 seconds, with the media detection sensor position.
Press Online to take-up paper detection sensor turned on, at 2. Faulty media take-up paper
clear error. printer power-on and at the start of detection sensor
Rewinding error. printing. 3. Faulty media take-up button
Check for jam at 4. Faulty media take-up motor
indicated position.
2930 Cutting Mode not Stacker is not ready. Continue or stop the print. If the
Automatic. Remove - The power supply is not supplied to the preparation of the stacker isn't
stacker and print stacker. performed, the error occurs again.
again or cancel and - The distance between the stacker and
change settings. printer is not appropriate.
- The stacker is not joined.
Print again - Stacker initial error
Cancel
2931 Cutting Mode not When the stacker is usable condition, the Print again after separating the
Automatic. Remove printing has been started at the setting of distance between the stacker and
stacker and print cut-off or cutline print or eject or manual printer enoughly, or cancel print.
again or cancel and mode.
change settings.
Print again
Cancel
2E00 Load Roll Media Paper mismatch (roll paper) Load roll paper.
No roll paper have been fed when a job
with a roll paper specification is received.
2E01 Roll printing Roll Selected Paper mismatch (roll paper) Load roll paper.
is selected. Load Roll Roll Paper have not been fed when an
internal print job having a roll paper
Press Load/Eject specification started (during internal
and load a roll. printing).
Roll printing
is selected.
2E02 Sheet printing Front paper feed Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Load cut sheet.
is selected. slot is selected. No cassette paper has been loaded when
Press Load/Eject Press Load/Eject and received.
and load sheets. load a sheet.
Manual printing
is selected.
Top paper feed
slot is selected.
Press OK and
load a sheet.
Top paper feed
slot is selected.
Press Load/Eject and

load a sheet.
Front paper feed
slot is selected.
Press OK and
load a sheet.
Front paper feed
slot is selected.

load a sheet.
6-19
Chapter 6
Code
2E03 Load Papr in Cas Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Feed paper as instructed by the on-
Press Online. Not cut sheet have been loaded in cassettes screen guidance.
when data having a cassette specification is
received.
2E04 Manual(Front) Load Front Tray Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Feed paper manually from the front as
(Paper type) No manually fed paper has been fed when instructed by the on-screen guidance.
(Paper size) a job having a front paper feed
Load Paper specification is received.
Stop Printing
2E05 Manual(Top) Load Top Tray Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Feed paper manually from the top as
(Paper type) No manually fed paper has been fed when instructed by the on-screen guidance.
(Paper size) a job having a top paper feed specification
Load Paper is received.
Stop Printing
Sheet printing Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Load cut sheet.
is selected. Not cut sheet have been loaded in cassettes
when data having a cassette specification is
received.(When paper type/ size is not
determined)
2E08 Wrong paper size. PaprSiz Mismatch Paper mismatch (size) (roll paper) Check the paper that is actually loaded
Check paper size setting on Prnt:PressOnline The width of data and that of the actually on the printer and the paper size setting
computer. Loaded Papr Diff loaded paper do not match. of the driver.
From Spfd Size
Online: Print
Stop: Stop Printing
Wrong paper size. Driver: Chk Papr
Check paper size setting in Size Setting
driver. Loaded Papr Diff
From Spfd Size
Online: Print
Stop: Stop Printing
PaprWidth Mismatch
2E09 Insufficient paper for job Roll Paper Short on roll paper Replace the roll paper.
Online: Print Please Replace All of the following conditions have been
Stop: Stop Printing Paper Level Low met at the start of printing:
Load/Eject: Change Paper Replace Paper -[ON] has been selected for [Remaining
Roll Paper Detection].
-Among the paper size settings coded in the
print data, the paper length exceeds the
remaining length of roll paper.
2E0A Roll printing is Sheets Loaded Paper mismatch (roll paper) Check the paper that is actually loaded
selected, but sheets are Press (lower arrow) To Eject Print data having a roll paper print on the paper and the paper feed setting
loaded. Roll Selected specification has been received at the of the driver.
Load Roll completion of manual feed paper pickup.
remove the sheets.
Roll printing is
selected, but manual
paper is loaded.
Roll printing is
selected, but sheets are
loaded.
Press OK,
remove the sheets,
and load a roll.
Roll printing is
selected, but sheets
are loaded.
OK:Eject Sheets
Stop:Stop Printing
Roll printing is
selected, but sheets
are loaded.
2E0B Cassette printing Sheets Loaded Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Check the paper that is actually loaded
is selected. Press (lower arrow) To Eject Print data having a cassette print on the paper and the paper feed setting
Cassette Selectd specification has been received at the of the driver.
Press Load/Eject and Load Papr in Cas completion of manual feed paper pickup.
remove manually
loaded sheets.
6-20
Chapter 6
Code
2E0C Manual printing Tray Selected Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Check the paper that is actually loaded
is selected, but a roll is Press OK 1. Print data having a manual feed print on the paper and the paper feed setting
loaded. specification has been received at the of the driver.
completion of roll paper pickup.
Press Load/Eject and 2. Print data having a manual feed print
remove the roll. specification has been received when there
Sheet printing is roll paper printout.
is selected, but 3. Cut sheet data has been received when
a roll is loaded. the media take-up unit is in use.
Stop Printing
Sheet printing
is selected, but
a roll is loaded.
2E0E No Roll Feed Unit. Roll P Unit Roll paper unit not installed 1. Check the roll unit, and remove,
Please Check The unit has received print data having a install or replace the roll unit.
Turn printer off Power On roll paper print specification when it had 2. Check I/O mode (roll unit
and install roll Again started without a roll unit being connected detection).
feed unit. to it.
2E0F Top cover is open. Top Cover The top cover is abnormally open. Check the cover.
Please Close Check the sensor (I/O mode).
Turn off printer, Top Cover Open
wait a while, and Close Top Cover
turn it on again.
2E10 Ink tank cover Ink Tank Cover Ink tank cover error open (continued use Close the ink tank cover.
is open. Close Please allowed) Check the sensor (I/O mode).
Tank Cover Open The ink tank cover opened while
Turn off printer, Close Please performing any operation, such as printing
wait a while, and and suctioning.
turn it on again.
2E11 Carriage Cover is open. Carriage cover open error Close the carriage cover.
A carriage cover open has been detected. Check the sensor (I/O mode).
2E12 Rel lever is in Faulty release lever Push down the release lever.
wrong position. The state of the release lever up (released) Check the sensor.
Turn off printer, has been detected.
wait, then
turn on again.
2E14 Wrong paper size. PaprSiz Mismatch Paper mismatch (size or width) Check the paper that is actually loaded
Check paper size setting on Prnt:PressOnline The paper size specified for the [Print to on the printer and the paper size setting
computer. Loaded Papr Diff meet the paper width] setting of the driver of the driver.
From Spfd Size on receiving print data and the width of the
Online: Print roll paper actually fed did not match.
Stop: Stop Printing
Wrong paper size. Driver: Chk Papr
Check paper size Size Setting
setting in driver. Loaded Papr Diff
From Spfd Size
Online: Print
Stop: Stop Printing
6-21
Chapter 6
Code
2E15 Wrong paper type. Paper mismatch Paper mismatch (type) (on adjustment) Equalize the paper types for the first
Press (lower arrow) To The second and subsequent sheets of paper and second sheets with each other in
Stop: Stop Printing Replace have been fed as a paper type different adjustment printing.
Load/Eject: (Paper Type) from the first sheet when LF adjustment
Change Paper (Paper Size) was made with cut sheet.
Wrong paper type. Loaded Paper
Check Type
Replace paper Switch Paper
in cassette. In Cassette
Wrong paper type. Loaded Paper
Lift the release Check Type
lever and reload Press (lower arrow) Key
the paper. and Reload
Stop: Stop Printing

Wrong paper type.
Lift the release
lever and reload
the paper.
Wrong paper type.
Lift the release
lever and reload
the paper.
Paper mismatch
Make sure media type
and paper size match
for the adjustment
print.
Wrong paper type. Driver: Chk Papr Paper mismatch (type) Check the paper that is actually loaded
Check paper type Type Setting At the start of printing, paper type specified on the printer and the driver paper type
setting in driver. Chk Paper Type in the job and the type of paper actually setting.
Press Online loaded do not match, and [Stop] has been
Online: Print selected for [Paper Mismatch Detection].
Stop: Stop Printing
Wrong paper type. PaprTyp Mismatch
This type of media Prnt:PressOnline
is not compatible
with HP-GL/2.
Wrong paper feed Paper Feed Slot Paper mismatch (type) Check the feeder slot/cassette pick-up
slot for this paper SpcfdPapr NotFit A paper type that cannot be fed from the setting.
type. Press (lower arrow) Key specified feeder slot has been specified.
and Reload
Press Load/Eject
and reload the
paper.
Wrong paper feed
slot for this paper
type.
2E16 Wrong paper type. Paper Mismatch Paper mismatch (type) Check the paper that is actually loaded
Check paper type setting on Prnt:PressOnline The data type defined in the data and the on the printer and the driver paper type
computer. Check Paper type of actually loaded paper do not match. setting.
Press Online Following the transmission of data in the
Online: Print GARO format, all of the following
Stop: Stop Printing conditions have been met at the start of
Wrong paper type printing:
and size. Check -The paper type that has been set in the job
paper type and size and the type of actually fed paper do not
setting on computer. match.
Online: Print -[Stop] has been selected for [Paper
Stop: Stop Printing Mismatch Detection].
Wrong paper type

and size. Check
paper type and size
setting in driver.
Online: Print
Stop: Stop Printing
2E17 No cassette Cassette Cassette not installed 1. Check to see if the cassette itself is
detected. Undetected properly loaded.
Check the cassette. Check Cassette 2. Check and replace sensor (I/O
Press Online mode).
2E18 Cannot load. Remove paper Paper not fed as far as the platen
Press Load/Eject Cannot Feed
and reload the Press (upper arrow) Key
paper.
2E19 Cannot load. Remove paper Feeding error Refeed the paper.
Press Load/Eject Cannot Feed LF out of synchronization for cut sheet
paper.
2E1A Cannot load. Remove paper Feeding error Refeed the paper.
paper.
6-22
Chapter 6
Code
2E1B The roll is empty. Roll Paper No roll paper available (trailing edge of roll 1. Replace the roll paper.
Load/Eject: Change Paper Please Replace paper detected) 2. Check paper sensor R (I/O mode).
The roll is empty. Paper Not Loaded -Trailing edge of paper has been detected 3. Is the paper fed successfully (under
Lift the release Press (upper arrow) Key by paper sensor in a roll paper operation. a negative load or any other
lever and replace -LF out of synchronization on roll paper. influence)?
the roll. (Detected the spool no longer rotating.)
The roll is empty.

The roll is empty.
Lift the release
lever and replace
the roll.
Out of roll paper.
Push the release
lever back, then
replace the roll.
2E1C Paper jam. Paper Jam Jam while ejecting paper 1. Open and close the release lever to
Press Load/Eject Press (upper arrow) Key (A sequence of removing jams with the reload the paper.
and reload the pinch roller released is required) 2. Remove the paper once
paper. A jam has been detected while ejecting
paper.
2E1D Cannot load. Remove paper Feeding error Refeed the paper.
paper.
2E1F Cannot print Paper Mismatch Paper mismatch (size) Check the paper that is actually loaded
as specified. ReplcPap:Press (lower The second and subsequent sheets of paper on the printer and the paper size setting
Press Load/Eject arrow) have been fed as a paper size different from of the driver.
and replace paper with A2/ the first sheet when adjustment was made
16.6"x23.4" with cut sheet.
(vertical) or larger
Cannot print as specified. Need A3 Vertical The paper size setting in effect at the start
Press Load/Eject and or Larger of an internal print session has fallen below
replace roll with 10 in. wide Press (lower arrow) Key the minimum size specified for that internal
or larger roll. and Reload print session.
Cannot print as specified. [XXX x YYY]: Required minimum size

Lift the release lever and
replace paper with [ XXX ] The second and subsequent sheets of paper
(vertical) or have been fed as a paper size different from
larger. the first sheet when adjustment was made
Cannot print with cut sheet.
as specified. [XXX x YYY]: Required minimum size
Lift the release
lever and replace
roll with 10 in.
wide or larger roll
Cannot print
as specified.
Replace paper with
[XXX] (vertical)
or larger.
The paper is too
small. Replace paper
with [XXX] (vertical) or
larger.
The paper is too
small. Replace roll
with 10 in. wide or
larger roll.
Cannot print as specified.
replace paper with [XXX]
(vertical) or larger.
Cannot print as specified.
replace roll with 10 in. wide
or larger roll.
2E20 Wrong paper type. Paper mismatch (type) (on adjustment) Equalize the paper types for the first
Lift the release The second and subsequent sheets of paper and second sheets with each other in
lever and reload have been fed as a paper type different adjustment printing.
the paper. from the first sheet when LF adjustment
was made from a cassette.
Stop: Stop Printing
Wrong paper.
Lift the release
lever and replace
the paper.
Paper mismatch
Make sure media type
and paper size match
for the adjustment
print.
6-23
Chapter 6
Code
2E21 Hardware error. Power On IEEE1394 interface error 1. Restart the printer.
03130000-2E21 Again Any error has been detected while 2. Remove and reinsert the IEEE1394
Turn off printer, IEEE 1394 Error initializing IEEE1394 at startup. board and then restart the printer.
wait, then Restart Printer 3. Replace the IEEE1394 board.
turn on again.
2E22 Media Type not Media Check Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Check the cassette pick-up setting/
Stop: Stop Printing

2E23 Hardware error. Power On Cutter unit failure 1. Remove paper slip (foreign matter)
03130031-2E23 Again At startup or completion of paper jam attached to the cutter home position
Turn off printer, Hardware Err 1 handling, when attempting to get the cutter sensor.
wait, then 03130031-2E23 which is in other position than HP back to 2. Check the cutter driving circuit and
turn on again. HP, the home position sensor timed out the cutter unit.
without response. When FU3902 blows out on PF510/
5100/610,
-Replace the main controller PCB
When FU2802 blows out on iPF6300
series/ 6400 series
-Replace the main controller PCB.
2E24 Roll feed unit err Power On Faulty roll paper unit Check the roll cam sensor (I/O mode).
Turn off printer and check Again Failed to detect the cam in the roll unit
roll feed unit Roll Feed Unit while no paper was loaded.
Error
2E25 Cannot detect papr Can't DetectPapr Jam while picking up, ejecting or printing
Remove paper and press on paper (JAM2)
Load/Eject. Remove Paper
Press Online
Cannot feed paper. Remove paper
Remove paper and press Press Online
Load/Eject.
Cannot detect papr After loading of roll paper or cut sheet was
Remove paper and loaded successfully, Paper detection
press OK. sensor/ Media sensor sensor detected no
paper (JAM2).
2E27 Cannot load. Remove paper Feeding error (nip release required)
Press Load/Eject Cannot Feed LF out of synchronization (feed motor
and reload the Press (upper arrow) Key won't rotate) has been detected.
paper.
Cannot feed paper
Lift the release
lever and reload
paper.
Cannot feed paper.
Reload the paper.
Paper jam. Paper Jam Jam while picking up, ejecting or printing 1. Open and close the release lever to
Press (upper arrow) Key on paper reload the paper.
Press Load/Eject (A sequence of removing jams with the 2. Remove the paper once and then
and reload the pinch roller released is required)(JAM1) refeed it.
paper. Virtually all recovery errors that could
Paper jam. Lift occur in connection with paper pickup are
the release lever. handled.
Paper jam.
Push the release
lever back.
Paper jam.
all the way.
Paper jam.
all the way
and press OK.
2E30 The paper is Paper mismatch (size) Continued printing allowed.
too small. With [Pause] selected for [Paper Mismatch Check driver setting
Detection] in the menu setting, paper size Replace with appropriate paper.
for the paper loaded was smaller than the
size specified by data.
2E31 Insufficient paper All of the following conditions have been Replace the roll paper.
for job met at the start of external printing:
-[ON] has been selected for [Remaining
-Automatic roll feed to another roll paper
slot which is not the current feeding path,
out of the 2 slots the printer has, is not
available.
6-24
Chapter 6
Code
2E32 Insufficient paper All of the following conditions have been Replace the roll paper.
for job met at the start of external printing:
-[ON] has been selected for [Remaining
-Automatic roll feed to another roll paper
slot which is not the current feeding path,
out of the 2 slots the printer has, is not
available.
2E33 Roll Paper Paper mismatch (roll paper) Load roll paper.
(Paper type) No roll paper has been fed when a job with 1. Select "load a roll" and follow
(Paper size) a roll paper specification is received. instruction on the panel.
Load Roll Paper 2. Select "stop printing," or stop
Stop Printing printing by pressing stop button.
Roll 1(Upper) Paper mismatch (roll paper) 3. Release the release lever and load
(Paper type) No roll paper has been fed when a job with the paper.
(Paper size) a roll paper specification is received.
Press Load/Eject When paper has not been loaded on either
and load a roll. upper or lower slot, and the feeding slot is
set to [Automatic] in the job setting, an
error of upper roll occurs.
2E34 Roll 2 (Lower) Paper mismatch (roll paper) Load roll paper.
(Paper type) No roll paper has been fed when a job with
(Paper size) a roll paper specification is received.
Press Load/Eject When no paper has been loaded on either
error of upper roll (2E33) occurs.
Roll 2 (Lower) Paper mismatch (roll paper)
is selected. No roll paper has been fed when a job with
a roll paper specification is received.
Press Load/Eject When no paper has been loaded on either
error of upper roll (2E33) occurs.
* This is a message that appears when
paper type/ size specification does not exist
due to HPGL format etc.
2E35 Roll printing Paper mismatch (roll paper) Load roll paper.
is selected. No roll paper has been fed when
Roll printing performing internal printing.
is selected.
Press Load/Eject
and load a roll.
2E36 Roll printing Paper mismatch (roll paper) (lower) Load roll paper.
is selected. No roll paper was fed when internal
printing with the specified roll paper
Press Load/Eject (lower) was started.
and load a roll.
2E37 Roll printing Paper mismatch (roll paper) (Upper) Load roll paper.
is selected. No roll paper has been fed when a job with 1. Select "load a roll" and follow
roll paper specification is received. instruction on the panel.
Roll 1 (Upper) Paper mismatch (roll paper) 2. Select "stop printing," or stop
is selected. No roll paper was fed when the job printing by pressing stop button.
specified with upper roll paper was 3. Release the release lever and load
Press Load/Eject received. the paper. (This step 3 is only for 800/
and load a roll. 8000/9000 series.)
2E38 Roll 2 (Lower) Paper mismatch (roll paper)(Lower) Load roll paper.
is selected. No roll paper has been fed when a job with
lower roll paper specification is received.
Press Load/Eject
and load a roll.
2E39 The Roll 2 (Lower) is No roll paper available (trailing edge of roll 1. Replace the roll paper
empty. paper detected) -Check paper sensor R (I/O mode).
Lift the release -Detected that cut sheet sized paper has 2. Is the paper fed successfully (under
lever and replace been fed at the roll paper feeding slot. a negative load or any other
the roll. -The trailing edge of paper was detected by influence)?
The roll (XX) is empty. the Paper detection sensor/ Media sensor
Press OK. sensor during operation in which roll paper
was used.
-The spool stopped rotating during paper
loading or printing
(XX: Upper roll paper/ Lower roll paper)
2E3A Roll1 jammed. Manually During upper roll paper feeding operation, Manually rewind the paper and reload.
rewind the the paper was fed with the roll feed sensor
roll all the way detecting the paper, but the paper detection
and press OK. sensor/ media sensor sensor could not
Roll1 (Uppr) jammed. detect the paper and the operation timed
Manually rewind the out.
roll all the way
and press OK.
6-25
Chapter 6
Code
2E3B Roll 2 (Lwr) jammed. During lower roll paper feeding operation, Manually rewind the paper and reload.
Manually rewind the the paper was fed with the roll feed sensor
roll all the way detecting the paper, but the paper detection
and press OK. sensor/ media sensor sensor could not
detect the paper and the operation timed
out.
2E3C Paper jam. Lift During operations with cut sheet, the state Reload the paper.
the release lever. of the paper detection sensor/ media sensor
sensor has become invalid.
2E3D Roll 1 (upper) jam During operations with upper roll paper, Reload the paper.
Lift the release the paper was fed with the roll paper
lever. detection sensor and the roll feeding sensor
detecting the paper, but the state of the
paper detection sensor/ media sensor
sensor became invalid.
2E3E Roll 2 (lower) jam During operations with lower roll paper, Reload the paper.
Lift the release the paper was fed with the roll paper
lever. detection sensor and the roll feeding sensor
detecting the paper, but the state of the
2E3F Paper jam. Lift When either upper or lower roll paper is in Reload the paper.
the release lever. operation, the states of the roll paper
detection sensor, roll feeding sensor, and
2E40 Cannot print as Print data having lower roll paper Remove the printout of upper roll, and
selected. Another specification has been received while print again.
roll is in use. upper roll printout remains.
[Stop]: Stop printing
2E41 Cannot print as Print data having upper roll paper Remove the printout of lower roll, and
selected. Another specification has been received while print again.
roll is in use. lower roll printout remains.
[Stop]: Stop printing
2E42 MediaType Mismatch Paper mismatch (type/ restart printing of Continued printing allowed.
suspended job) Replace with appropriate paper.
It occurs when all of the following
conditions are met:
-[Stop] selected for [Paper Mismatch
Detection] in menu settings.
-[Change Paper] button was pressed for
suspended jobs from host.
-The paper type that has been set in the job
and the type of actually fed paper do not
match.
2E45 MediaType Mismatch Paper mismatch (type/ restart printing of Continued printing allowed.
suspended job) Check the driver settings.
It occurs when all of the following Replace with appropriate paper.
conditions are met:
-[Stop] selected for [Paper Mismatch
Detection] in menu settings.
-The paper width that has been set with
data and the paper width of actually fed
paper do not match.
2E47 Cutter Position Error Cut Failure Check around the cutter unit.
The cutter is not at home position when
restart from jam. Also paper feeding was
detected.
2F11 CR error Power On An operation order has been issued while
Again the carriage suffered a hardware error.
Call for Service. CR Error
2F12 LF error Power On LF error 1. Replace the feed roller encoder
Again -An operation order has been received sensor.
Call for Service. LF Error while the LF suffered a hardware error. 2. Replace the feed motor.
-The target position could not be reached <Supplement>
within a predicted operation time +3 -If the carriage travels heavily near the
seconds during an LF operation. stop position, a mechanical load error
-The sensor could not be detected during an may be suspected.
LF operation involving sensor detection. -If any other symptom is observed, a
feeding sensor may be at fault.
2F13 Hardware error. Power On A/D converter external trigger output stop
03130031-2F13 Again (Hardware error 1)
Turn off printer, Hardware Err 1
wait, then 03130031-2F13
turn on again.
2F14 Hardware error. Power On ASIC register not writable (Hardware error Replace the main controller PCB.
03130031-2F14 Again 2)
Turn off printer, Hardware Err 2 Could not write to the ASIC register on the
wait, then main controller PCB.
turn on again.
6-26
Chapter 6
Code
2F16 Hardware error. Power On Mist fan error 1. Check the bundled wires in the mist
03130031-2F16 Again The rotation of the mist fan is not fan drive circuit.
Turn off printer, Mist Fan Error detectable. 2. Replace the mist fan unit.
wait, then 3. Replace the main controller PCB.
turn on again.
2F17 Hardware error. Power On Platen fan lock detection error 1. Check the bundled wires in the
03130031-2F17 Again The lock signal has been supplied platen suction fan drive circuit.
Turn off printer, Platen Fan Lock continuously for 3 seconds or longer, 10 2. Replace the platen suction fan unit.
wait, then Power On seconds after the platen fan started rotating. 3. Replace the main controller PCB.
turn on again. Again
Platen Fan Err
2F1F Hardware error. Power On Purge sensor error (recovery purge motor
03130031-2F1F Again HP detection error)
Turn off printer, Purge Motor The recovery system has been driven but
wait, then Sensor Error no sensor interrupt occurs.
turn on again. The recovery system has been driven to
close the cap, but the cap has not been
capped successfully.
2F20 Hardware error. Power On Cap motor cam positioning error
03130031-2F20 Again The recovery system has been driven but
Motor Cam Pos no sensor interrupt occurs.
Turn off printer, Error The recovery system has been driven to
wait, then close the cap, but the cap has not been
turn on again. capped successfully.
2F21 Rel lever is in Pinch roller open detected with the pinch 1. Restart with the pinch roller closed.
wrong position. roller locked. 2. Check the sensor in I/O DISPLAY
in Service mode (Check the pinch
Turn off printer, roller pressure release detection SW/
wait, then the release lever lock sensor.)
turn on again.
2F22 Hardware error. Power On Pump shift timeout <Supplement>
03130031-2F22 Again The target position could not be reached -If the carriage travels heavily towards
Turn off printer, Pump Motion within a predicted operation time +3 the stop position: A mechanical load
wait, then Timeout seconds during pump operation or no error may be suspected.
turn on again. sensor has been detected during a pump -Otherwise: The sensor in the purge
operation involving sensor detection. unit may be at fault.
2F23 Hardware error. Power On Purge motor error <Supplement>
03130031-2F23 Again A PWM duty of 100% has lasted for 200 -If the motor could not be run at all or
Turn off printer, Pump Motion msec in a pump operation. has resulted in an error after moving by
wait, then Error a slight distance:
turn on again. A. A mechanical load error may be
suspected.
B. The motor or drive circuit may be at
fault.
-If the carriage has run more or less out
of control and resulted in an error:
A. The encoder sensor may be at fault.
2F24 Cannot cut paper. Cutting Error Cutter shift timeout
Lift the release Please Cut Papr The cutter failed to reach the home position
lever and reload Press (upper arrow) Key in time during a cutting operation
the paper. to Release Paper
2F24 Hardware error. Power On Cutter shift timeout error
03130031-2F24 Again No sensor has been detected during a cutter
Turn off printer, Cutter Timeout operation involving sensor detection.
wait, then
turn on again.
2F25 Hardware error. Power On Carriage motor HP not detectable Check the carriage HP sensor in I/O
03130031-2F25 Again Detected only for the wide format. mode.
Turn off printer, CR Position Err For the narrow format, the carriage motor <Supplement>
wait, then Restart Printer HP can be detected when the carriage hits -If the motor could not be run at all:
turn on again. the wall in a full scan following the A. A mechanical load error may be
detection of the HP. suspected.
fault.
-If the carriage has resulted in an error
after moving at a constant speed:
A. The carriage HP sensor may be at
fault.
A. The encoder sensor may be at fault.
2F26 Hardware error. Power On Carriage operation disabled <Supplement>
03130031-2F26 Again -A PWM duty of 100% has lasted for 200 -If the motor could not be run at all or
Turn off printer, Carriage Motion msec in a carriage operation has resulted in an error after moving by
wait, then Error -A collision has been detected in a carriage a slight distance:
turn on again. operation (with the speed predicted from A. A mechanical load error may be
the PWM output value having a deviation suspected.
of 25 ips or more from the actual speed). B. The motor or drive circuit may be at
fault.
A. encoder sensor may be at fault.
6-27
Chapter 6
Code
2F27 Hardware error. Power On Carriage shift timeout <Supplement>

03130031-2F27 Again The target position could not be reached -If the carriage travels heavily towards
Turn off printer, Carriage Timeout within a predicted operation time +3 the stop position, a mechanical load
wait, then Restart Printer seconds during carriage operation. error may be suspected.
turn on again.
2F28 Hardware error. Power On Lift shift timeout 1. Switch off the printer, then back on.
03130031-2F28 Again A lift operation has been executed, but no 2. The carriage cannot travel to the lift
Turn off printer, Lift Motion sensor has been detected or a sensor has drive position.
wait, then Timeout remained detected. 3. The lift drive cam is not engaged.
turn on again. 4. Faulty lift drive sensor
5. Faulty lift drive motor
2F29 Hardware error. Power On LF feeding motor timeout (cut sheet) 1. Replace the feed roller encoder
03030000-2F29 Again -The target position could not be reached sensor.
Turn off printer, LF Feed Timeout within a predicted operation time +3 2. Replace the feed motor.
wait, then Restart Printer seconds during an LF operation. <Supplement>
turn on again. -The sensor could not be detected during an -If the carriage travels heavily near the
LF operation involving sensor detection. stop position, a mechanical load error
may be suspected.
-If any other symptom is observed, a
feeding sensor may be at fault.
2F2A Hardware error. Power On Cannot detect the LF home position 1. Check the sensor (I/O mode check).
03130031-2F2A Again The LF home position could not be 2. Replace the feed roller encoder
Turn off printer, LF Position Err detected on LF homing during sensor.
wait, then Restart Printer initialization. 3. Replace the encoder film.
turn on again. 4. Replace the feed motor/belt/ adjust
the belt tension.
5. Replace the long flexible cable.
<Supplement>
-If the motor could not be run at all:
A. A mechanical load error may be
suspected.
fault.
-If the carriage has resulted in an error
after moving at a constant speed: The
feed roller HP sensor may be at fault.
of control and resulted in an error, the
encoder sensor may be at fault.
When FU2802 blows out on iPF6300/
6400 series
2F2B Hardware error. Power On LF operation failure (LF operation 1. Replace the feed roller encoder
03130031-2F2B Again disabled) sensor.
Turn off printer, LF Motion A pump duty of 100% has lasted for 200 2. Replace the feed motor.
wait, then Error msec during LF operation. <Supplement>
turn on again. -If the motor could not be run at all or
has resulted in an error after moving by
a slight distance:
A. A mechanical load error may be
suspected.
fault.
of control and resulted in an error, the
encoder sensor may be at fault.
When FU2802 blows out on iPF6300/
6400 Series
2F2C Hardware error. Power On Cassette shift timeout <Supplement>
03130031-2F2C Again -The target position could not be reached -If the carriage travels heavily near the
Turn off printer, Hardware Err 1 within a predicted operation time + 3 stop position, a mechanical load error
wait, then 03130031-2F2C seconds during cassette operation. may be suspected.
turn on again. -No sensor has been detected during a -Otherwise, the cassette unit sensor
pump operation involving sensor detection. may be at fault.
2F2D Cassette not Power On Cassette operation disabled 1. Check the cassette motor and the
working. Again A PWM duty of 100% has lasted for 200 drive circuit.
Turn off printer, Cassette Motion msec in a cassette operation. 2. Check the cassette encoder sensor.
wait, then Error
turn on again.
2F2E Hardware error. Power On Roll shift timeout
03130031-2F2E Again No sensor has been detected during a roll
Turn off printer, Roll Motion operation involving sensor detection.
wait, then Timeout
turn on again.
6-28
Chapter 6
Code
2F2F Hardware error. Power On Non-ejection detection error 1. Check whether any foreign matter
03800500-2F2F Again As a result of nozzle checking made by the such as paper slip exists on the head
Turn off printer, Eject. Detect head management sensor unit: management sensor optical axis.
wait, then Err 1. All 640 nozzles in a nozzle line are non- 2. Light interception due to ink
turn on again. discharging. accumulation.-> Remove the ink/
2. At least 50 nozzles have been found Replace the unit.
mismatched in a nozzle line of 640 nozzles 3. Check the head management
since the last session of detection. sensor's connector connection
4. If Service mode nozzle check
pattern printing is no problem, replace
the head management sensor unit.
Reference 1) As for the detection

condition 1. above, in the iPF650/750,
iPF6300/6350, and iPF8300 series or
later, the error codes are broken up into
2F40,2F41,2F42,2F43,2F44, and 2F47
depending on the non-ejection
conditions.
Reference 2) Error
2F2F,2F40,2F41,2F42,2F43,2F44,
and 2F47 are detected in the following
order.
1. Determines signal level (2F47) of
head management sensor
2. Determines complete non-ejection
of all colors (2F40)
3. Determines multiple mismatches
(2F2F)
of a single color (2F41)
of one line (2F42)
of 640 nozzles (2F43)
7. Determines non-ejection of more
than 320 nozzles (2F44)
Reference 3) The amount of change

(between non-ejecting and ejecting
nozzle counts) from the last session of
nozzle checking is defined as the
amount of mismatch.
2F30 Hardware error. Power On Non-ejection detecting position error
03800500-2F30 Again No detectable region has been found during
Turn off printer, Eject. Detect non-ejection position adjustment.
wait, then Err
turn on again.
2F32 Multi-sensor error Power On Faulty multisensor 1. Retry the adjustment with the effect
Turn off printer, Again Light quantity adjustment of multisensor of outside light, such as that of the
wait a while, then Multi-sensor Err failed. afternoon sun, being removed.
turn it on again. Or, outside light entered during 2. Check the position at which the
multisensor light quantity adjustment. multisensor is installed.
3. Replace the multisensor.
2F33 Use another paper. Paper Type Unadjustable because of transparent paper Change to appropriate paper.
Press Online to Please Change Paper are unidentifiable on automatic
clear the error. Can't Adj Paper adjustment (transparent/semi-transparent
Chg Paper Type paper).
2F34 Cannot calibrate. Press OK Color calibration error 1. Check to see if the loaded paper
Press OK and try and recalibrate The adjustment value has gone out of permit calibration.
calibration again. Calibration Err bounds during calibration. 2. Check calibrated printed matter for
Cannot calibrate. Recalibrate soiling and other defects.
Try calibration 3. Check the nozzle pattern
again.
2F35 Calibration Calibration Faulty multisensor (on calibration) 1. Check the parts counter in service
There is a problem multi-sensor err A failure to calibrate has been detected mode and replace the multisensor unit.
with the Press OK from the parts counter. 2. Initialize the counter for the
multi-sensor. to cancel replacement unit mounted. (It is
Press OK to cancel recommended to estimate the usage
calibration. status of other units coming to the end
Calibration of their service life and replace them as
There is a problem needed.)
with the
multi-sensor.
Cancel calibration.
2F37 ERROR E173-2F37 ERROR E173-2F37 Linear scale error
Call for service. Call For Service No signal is available from the carriage
encoder when the printhead is driven.
2F38 Top cover is open. Ink Tank Cover The top cover is abnormally open. Check the cover.
Turn off printer, Close Please Check the sensor (I/O mode).
wait a while, and Tank Cover Open
turn it on again. Close Please
6-29
Chapter 6
Code
2F3A Hardware error. Power On Ink Supply Valve Open/Closed motor 1. Replace the ink supply unit.
03130031-2F3A Again timeout error 2. Replace the main controller PCB.
Turn off printer, Valve Motor Err
wait, then
turn on again.
2F3B Hardware error. Power On CS communication error 1. Remove and insert the ink tank, or
03130031-2F3B Again An irrecoverable communication error has replace the ink tank.
Turn off printer, Hardware Err 1 occurred communicating between the CS 2. Check bundled wires in the ink tank
wait, then 03130031-2F3B chip mounted on the ink tank and the main unit and the main controller PCB.
turn on again. unit. 3. Replace the main controller PCB.
2F3C Hardware error. LF nip sensor error. Check the lift cam sensor/ pressure
03130031-2F3C When executing nip automatic operation, release switch (I/O mode)
Turn off printer, one of the following conditions is met.
wait, then -The sensor detected nip closed after the
turn on again. nip completed opening operation.
-The sensor detected nip open after the nip
completed closing operation.
2F3D Hardware error. HP pre-ejection pump motor overload error Replace the HP maintenance jet tray
03130031-2F3D unit.
Turn off printer,wait, then
turn on again.
2F3E Hardware error. HP pre-ejection pump motor shift timeout Replace the HP maintenance jet tray
03130031-2F3E unit.
Turn off printer,wait, then
turn on again.
2F3F Hardware error. An error other than overload error or shift Replace the HP maintenance jet tray
03130031-2F3F timeout error has been detected for the HP unit.
Turn off printer,wait, then pre-ejection pump motor.
turn on again.
2F40 Hardware error. When the result of non-ejection detection is
03800500-2F40 as follows.
Turn off printer,wait, then When non-ejection has been detected for
turn on again. all nozzles of all colors
-The error code assuming a problem in the
supply system/ purge system/ main
controller PCB (electric).
03800500-2F41 as follows:
Turn off printer,wait, then Complete non-ejection of nozzles in 1
turn on again. to 5 chip(s).
(A line EVEN/ A line ODD/ B line
EVEN/ B line ODD
Total of 2560 nozzles x 1 to 5 chip(s)
complete non-ejection)
-Error code assuming a problem in the ink
supply system/ purge system.
Turn off printer,wait, then Complete non-ejection of one line in
turn on again. 1chip.
(In either A line or B line, a complete non-
ejection of 1280 nozzles)
-Error code assuming broken flexible cable
or contact failure (heat enable line).
Turn off printer,wait, then Complete non-ejection (640 nozzles) of
turn on again. EVEN line or ODD line.
-Error code assuming broken flexible cable
or contact failure (data line).
Turn off printer,wait, then More than half of 640 nozzles in EVEN
turn on again. line or ODD line have non-ejection (more
than 320 nozzles).
-Error code assuming a head failure such as
broken heater board of head.
2F46 Hardware error. Only for iPF750 series The shutter HP sensor did not respond at Check the platen shutter HP sensor (I/
03130031-2F46 startup and at switching of platen shutter at O Display). Check/ replace the platen
Turn off printer,wait, then printing. shutter drive unit or sensor
turn on again.
6-30
Chapter 6
Code
2F47 Hardware error. Only for iPF750 series The optical axis of the head management 1. Check whether any foreign matter
3800500-2F47 sensor unit has been intercepted for some such as paper slip exists on the head
Turn off printer,wait, then reasons. management sensor optical axis.
turn on again. 2. Light interception due to ink
The amount of LED luminescence and the accumulation.-> Remove the ink/
level of detection signal of diode light Replace the unit.
receiving sensitivity has gone beyond the 3. Check connection of the head
predefined range. (determines the level of management sensor's connector.
APCCHK)(It's not a problem of printhead 4. Main controller PCB (Check the
or ink supply system.) fuse/ Replace the PCB.)
5. A large amount of ink mist has been
attached to optical element.
6. Replace the head management
sensor.
2F48 Hardware error. VHT (heater drive drive power supply for iPF6300 series
03130031-2F48 printhead) error 1. Replace the printhead.
Turn off printer, wait, then VHT has gone below or above the rating. 2. Replace the main controller PCB.
turn on again. iPF8300 series
1. Replace the printhead.
2. Replace the CR relay board.
3. Check/ replace the long flexible
cable.
2F49 Hardware error. Printhead short-circuited detected. iPF6300 series
2F50 03130031-xxxx Prior to VH power on, it has been detected 1. Replace the printhead
2F51 Turn off printer, wait, then that the printhead had been damaged due to 2. Replace the main controller PCB.
turn on again. paper jam etc, and ink went inside the iPF8300 series
terminal area causing near short-circuit. 1. Replace the printhead
2F49: L side printhead 2. Replace the CR relay board
2F50: R side printhead 3. Check/ replace the long flexible
2F51: LR both printhead cable.
2F4A Hardware error. iPF6300/830 or newer main controller PCB error. Replace the main controller PCB.
03130031-2F4A
Turn off printer, wait, then
turn on again.
2F4D Hardware error. Left printhead only. VHT leak detection error of left printhead, For iPF6400 series,
03130031-2F4D in case of VHT exceeds rated value or falls 1. Replace the printhead.
Turn off printer, wait, then Possible to occur on below the rated value. 2. Replace the main controller PCB.
turn on again. iPFX400 or newer models. For iPF8400/9400 series,
2F4E Hardware error. Right printhead or a single VHT leak detection error of right 1. Replace the printhead.
03130031-2F4E printhead printhead, in case of VHT exceeds rated 2. Replace the CR relay board.
Turn off printer, wait, then value or falls below the rated value. 3. Check and replace the long flexible
turn on again. Possible to occur on cable printed circuit.
iPFX400 or newer models. 4. Replace the main controller PCB.
2F4F Hardware error. Possible to occur on VHT leak detection error of right and left
03130031-2F4F iPFX400 or newer models. printhead or a single printhead, in case of
Turn off printer, wait, then VHT exceeds rated value or falls below the
turn on again. rated value.
2F52 Hardware error. Detected that a carriage unit of a legacy Replace with an appropriate carriage
03130031-2F52 model has been mounted (iPF8300/6300/ unit.
Turn off printer, wait, then 6350 only). 1. Replace with an appropriate carriage
turn on again. unit.
2. Replace the printhead.
2F53 Hardware error. Supply valve motor error of the left ink iPF8400/9400 Series
03130031-2F53. tank. 1. Replace the left ink tank unit.
Turn off printer,wait, then Drove supply valve motor. The movement 2. Replace the main controller PCB.
turn on again. was not detected.
2F54 Hardware error. Supply valve motor error of the right ink iPF8400/9400 Series
03130031-2F54. tank. 1. Replace the right ink tank unit.
Turn off printer,wait, then Drove supply valve motor. The movement 2. Replace the main controller PCB.
turn on again. was not detected.
2F60 !Spectrophotometer Unit Spectrophotometer unit won't return 1. Install spectrophotometer unit.
not connected. signals. 2. Replace signal line.
Turn off power and attach 3. Replace connection.
Spectrophotometer Unit. 4. Replace spectrophotometer unit
PCB.
2F61 Hardware error UART communication error. 1. Replace signal line.
038A0002-2F61 (Data transfer volume in consistency, 2. Replace connection.
Turn off printer, wait a checksum error etc.) 3. Replace spectrophotometer unit
while, then turn it on again. PCB
2F62 Hardware error When transmitting specified pulses to 1. Replace spectrophotometer unit
038A0002-2F62 spectrophotometer carriage motor, the PCB.
Turn off printer, wait a spectrophotometer carriage unit won't 2. Replace lines around
while, then turn it on again. respond to spectrophotometer carriage HP spectrophotometer carriage unit.
sensor. 3. Replace spectrophotometer carriage
motor.
6-31
Chapter 6
Code
2F63 Hardware error The spectrophotometer up-down unit 1. Replace spectrophotometer up-
038A0002-2F63 upper detection sensor won't respond when down unit motor.
Turn off printer, wait a a predefined pulse is sent to the 2. Replace spectrophotometer up-
while, then turn it on again. spectrophotometer up-down unit motor. down unit upper detection sensor.
3. Re-install delivery guide.
4. Replace the spectrophotometer unit
PCB.
2F65 Hardware error When a predefined pulse is sent to the 1. Replace spectrophotometer up-
038A0002-2F65 spectrophotometer up-down unit motor, down unit motor.
Turn off printer, wait a the spectrophotometer up-down unit lower 2. Replace spectrophotometer up-
while, then turn it on again. detection sensor in spectrophotometer unit down unit lower detection sensor.
won't respond. 3. Re-install delivery guide.
PCB.
2F66 Hardware error Media dry fan won't return signals. 1. Replace fan
038A0002-2F66 2. Replace signal lines
Turn off printer, wait a 3. Replace the spectrophotometer unit
while, then turn it on again. PCB.
2F67 Hardware error Embedded FlashROM read/ write error Replace the spectrophotometer unit
038A0002-2F67 PCB.
Turn off printer, wait a
while, then turn it on again.
2F68 Hardware error Spectrophotometer EEPROM read/write Replace the spectrophotometer unit
038A0002-2F68 error PCB.
2F69 Hardware error Write/read error at RAM check Replace the spectrophotometer unit
038A0002-2F69 PCB.
2F6A Hardware error Firmware update failed. 1. Update firmware again
038A0002-2F6A 2. Replace the spectrophotometer unit
Turn off printer, wait a PCB.
2F6B Hardware error Initialization after power on of CPU at Replace the spectrophotometer unit
038A0002-2F6B spectrophotometer unit side failed. PCB.
2F6C Hardware error. Failed self-testing. Replace the spectrophotometer unit
03130031-2F6C. PCB.
Turn off printer, wait, then
turn on again.
2F70 Hardware error. Indication at ink priming error in both For iPF6400 Series,
03130031-2F70. subtanks. 1. Replace both of the inktank units.
Turn off printer, wait, then 2. Replace the main controller PCB.
turn on again.
2F71 Hardware error. Call for Service. Indication at ink priming error in the left For iPF6400 Series,
03130031-2F71. HW1 error subtank. 1. Replace the left inktank unit.
Turn off printer, wait, then 03130031-2F71 2. Replace the main controller PCB.
turn on again.
2F72 Hardware error. Call for Service. Indication at ink priming error in the right For iPF6400 Series,
03130031-2F72. HW1 error subtank. 1. Replace the right subtank
Turn off printer, wait, then 03130031-2F72 2. Replace the main controller PCB.
turn on again.
2F80 !Spectrophotometer sensor Spectrophotometer sensor won't return 1. Install Spectrophotometer sensor.
is not mounted. Please check signals. 2. Check cables.
if the sensor is mounted 3. Replace spectrophotometer sensor.
properly and press OK. 4. Replace the spectrophotometer unit
PCB.
2F81 ! Spectrophotometer After white calibration, the 1. Clean white tile.
Unit Calibration white tile spectrophotometer sensor returned a value 2. Mount white tile.
error. other than predetermined value. 3. Replace spectrophotometer sensor.
Clean the tile then mount it
and press OK.
2F82 ! Delivery guide of SP unit While the spectrophotometer up-down unit 1. Mount delivery guide.
is not mounted. Check if the upper detection sensor and 2. Replace the spectrophotometer unit
guide is mounted properly spectrophotometer top cover open/closed PCB.
and press OK. detection sensor are detecting, the interlock 3. Replace spectrophotometer up-
switch remains OFF. down unit upper detection sensor.
2F83 !Backing plate error in the No signal retuned from backing plate. 1. Clean the backing plate.
spectrophotometer unit. The signal from the backing plate is 2. Replace the spectrophotometer unit
Clean the backing plate. beyond threshold. PCB.
Install the backing plate to 3. Replace the spectrophotometer
the unit. Then press [OK]. sensor.
2F85 ! SP unit up and down cover Spectrophotometer top cover open/closed 1. Close spectrophotometer top cover.
is open. detection sensor won't respond. 2. Replace spectrophotometer top
Close it and press OK cover open/closed detection sensor.
PCB.
6-32
Chapter 6
Code
2F86 ! SP unit cover is open. Spectrophotometer cover open/closed 1. Close spectrophotometer cover.
Close it and then press OK. detection sensorwon't respond. 2. Replace cover sensor.
PCB.
2F87 ! Colorimetric readout error. When executing color measuring, the 1. Operate paper feed adjustment.
Please press OK and execute spectrophotometer sensor returned a value 2. Change the patch size to large.
color measuring again. other than predetermined value was 3. Printer support (In case of printing
returned. failure).
4. Replace spectrophotometer sensor
2F88 ! Colorimetric readout error. When reading the positioning bar, a value 1. Operate paper feed adjustment.
Please press OK and execute other than predetermined value was 2. Printer support (In case of printing
color measuring again. returned. failure).
3. Replace spectrophotometer sensor.
2F89 ! Colorimetric readout error. 1) No shifting amount detected from the 1. Operate paper feed adjustment.
Please press OK and execute positioning bar reading value. 2. Printer support (In case of printing
color measuring again 2) Position shifting exceeded the threshold failure).
value. 3. Replace spectrophotometer sensor
3) Skew exceeded the threshold value.
2F90 Detected 3V of abnormal power out from
the printhead.
(Latch up current flows at head logic and
temporarily the print head falls into
abnormal state ; it is possible to recover by
power on and off.)
2FA0 !It is recommended to clean Inform the calibration timing of the Calibrate the spectrophotometer
the white calibration board spectrophotometer sensor. sensor.
to prevent it from possible
dirt.
4001 ERROR E146-4001 ERROR E146-4001 Borderless/flow pre-ejection/mist recovery Check the parts counter and replace the
Call for service. Call For Service count full target unit or Refresh Service Kit.
Initialize the parts counter for the
401A ERROR E602-401A HDD failure 1. Restart in service mode.
Call for service. Failed to read and write to and from the 2. Remove and install HDD
HDD. 3. Replace HDD. Switch on service
mode after the replacement.
401B ERROR E602-401B Poor HDD connection 1. Restart in service mode.
Call for service. The HDD and the HDD controller are not 2. Remove and install HDD
indefinable. 3. Replace HDD. Switch on service4.
Replace HDD controller or the main
controller PCB. Restart after the
replacement.
401C ERROR E198-401C ERROR E198-401C Faulty RTC 1. Restart the printer in service mode.
Call for service. Call For Service Any error other than the two errors 2. Replace the main controller PCB.
mentioned below has been detected while
initializing the RTC at startup.
401D ERROR E198-401D ERROR E198-401D RTC low battery error 1. Restart the printer in service mode.
Call for service. Call For Service A battery error has been detected while 2. Check the RTC battery.
initializing the RTC at startup. 3. Replace the main controller PCB.
401E ERROR E198-401E ERROR E198-401E RTC clock stop 1. Restart the printer in service mode.
Call for service. Call For Service The RTC has been detected idle while 2. Replace the main controller PCB.
initializing the RTC at startup.
4027 Hardware error. Power On Lift shift timeout error 1. Switch off the printer, then back on.
03130031-4027 Again A lift operation has been executed, but no 2. The carriage cannot travel to the lift
Turn off printer, Lift Motion sensor has been detected or a sensor has drive position.
wait, then Timeout remained detected. 3. The lift drive cam is not engaged.
turn on again. 4. Faulty lift drive sensor
5. Faulty lift drive motor
4034 ERROR E196-4034 ERROR E196-4034 Multisensor unit version error Replace the multisensor unit.
Call for service. Call For Service A different version of multisensor is
installed.
This would not occur in an ordinary user
environment.
4037 ERROR E173-4037 ERROR E173-4037 Linear scale error
Call for service. Call For Service No signal is available from the carriage
encoder when the printhead is driven.
403E ERROR E161-403E ERROR E161-403E Head abnormal temperature rise (printhead
Call for service. Call For Service 1 (R), or A model)
Either of the two Di sensors maintained for
each printhead chip (color-specific) has
been detected at 120 degrees C or higher or
-10 degrees C or lower.
403F ERROR E161-403F ERROR E161-403F Head abnormal temperature rise (printhead
Call for service. Call For Service 2 (L))
Either of the two Di sensors maintained for
each printhead chip (color-specific) has
been detected at 120 degrees C or higher or
-10 degrees C or lower.
6-33
Chapter 6
Code
4040 ERROR E196-4040 ERROR E196-4040 Checksum error 1. Start in download mode to upgrade
Call for service. Call For Service The checksum of a file transmitted on the firmware.
execution of the firmware update is 2. Restart the printer in service mode to
unmatched. clear the error.
4041 ERROR E196-4041 ERROR E196-4041 Flash erase error 1. Start in download mode to upgrade
Call for service. Call For Service Failed to erase flash ROM on execution of the firmware.
the firmware update. 2. Restart the printer in service mode to
clear the error.
4042 ERROR E196-4042 ERROR E196-4042 Flash write error 1. Start in download mode to upgrade
Call for service. Call For Service Failed to write flash ROM on execution of the firmware.
the firmware update. 2. Restart the printer in service mode to
clear the error.
4042 Unknown file. MIT data transfer failure 1. Execute "Initialize Paper Type"
Check file format. Failed to write MIT data on its from the system settings. (Note: All
Turn off printer, transmission. paper information will be reset to its
wait a while, then factory defaults and additional Paper
turn it on again. deleted.)
2. Upgrade the firmware in download
mode.
4043 ERROR E196-4043 ERROR E196-4043 Firmware update failure error 1. Start in download mode to upgrade
Call for service. Call For Service Failed to allocate a work area on RAM on the firmware.
firmware update. 2. Restart the printer in service mode to
clear the error.
4044 ERROR E196-4044 ERROR E196-4044 EEPROM size error 1. Start in download mode to upgrade
Call for service. Call For Service Size information about the firmware data the firmware.
transmitted on firmware update and the 2. Restart the printer in service mode to
size of actually transmitted data do not clear the error.
match. 3. Check the firmware transfer
environment (IF changes, PC).
4045 ERROR E196-4045 ERROR E196-4045 Engine EEPROM write error 1. Start in download mode to upgrade
Call for service. Call For Service An EEPROM read/write failure has been the firmware.
detected in the engine portion of the 2. Restart the printer in service mode to
firmware. clear the error.
4046 ERROR E141-4046 ERROR E141-4046 Recovery part revolutions reaching 50,000 Check the parts counter and replace
Call for service. Call For Service cycles or more required parts.
Recovery part operations have reached a (Replacement of the parts coming to
predetermined count. the end of their useful lives is
recommended.)
Initialize the counter for the
replacement unit mounted.
The iPF5000/500/600 have a counter
problem fixed. Identify the firmware
version and start in download mode to
upgrade the firmware to Ver.1.13 or
later from any earlier release.
4047 ERROR E144-4047 ERROR E144-4047 Carriage count error Check the parts counter and replace the
Call for service. Call For Service Supply part operations have reached a target unit or Refresh Service Kit.
predetermined count. Initialize the parts counter for the
4048 ERROR E144-4048 ERROR E144-4048 Non-discharging nozzles on initial filling
Call for service. Call For Service An unallowable number of non-
discharging nozzles have been detected at
the completion of initial filling.
4049 Unknown file. Cannot update Wrong transfer ROM data model 1. Restart the printer in service mode to
Check file format. firmware Files for a different model have been clear the error (this error won't occur
Turn off printer, Power On transferred on firmware update. when FUT is used).
wait a while, then Again 2. Start in download mode to upgrade
turn it on again. the firmware.
404A ERROR E194-404A ERROR E194-404A Non-ejection count error Check the parts counter and replace the
Call for service. Call For Service A non-ejection part operation counter has target unit or Refresh Service Kit.
reached a specified limit. Initialize the parts counter for the
404B ERROR E199-404B ERROR E199-404B Temperature/humidity sensor error 1. Restart the printer in service mode to
Call for service. Call For Service When temperature 0 and humidity 0% are clear the error.
detected, the detection mechanism is 2. Identify the firmware version and
considered failed and an error message is update the firmware to the last release
displayed. if it is earlier than Ver.1.31 (firmware
defect).
3. Remove and reinsert the
temperature/humidity sensor PCB
connector
4. Replace the temperature/humidity
sensor PCB.
6-34
Chapter 6
Code
404C ERROR E196-404C ERROR E196-404C Serial number information mismatch 1. Check to see if the correct PCB is
Call For Service A mismatch has been detected between the mounted, since a PCB of the wrong
Call for service. serial number information stored in the model may have been mistakenly
EEPROM on the main controller PCB and mounted during servicing.
that stored in the EEPROM on the MTC 2. Invoke service mode to implement
relay PCB at startup. PCB replacement.
404D ERROR E196-404D ERROR E196-404D Machine ID information mismatch 1. Check to see if the correct PCB is
Call For Service A mismatch has been detected between the mounted, since a PCB of the wrong
Call for service. model ID information stored in the model may have been mistakenly
EEPROM on the main controller PCB and mounted during servicing.
that stored in the EEPROM on the MTC 2. Invoke service mode to implement
relay PCB at startup. PCB replacement.
404E ERROR E196-404E ERROR E196-404E An EEPROM read/ write error has been 1. Start in download mode to upgrade
Call for service. Call for service. detected in the controller portion of the the firmware.
firmware. 2. Start in service mode to clear the
error.
404F ERROR E144-404F Pump revolutions full Clear the counter in service mode after
Call for service. The number of HP pre-ejection pump having replaced the HP pre-ejection
revolution has reached the defined value. tray unit.
4050 Error E161-4050 Error! Non-ejection detection error
Call for service. For E161-4050 The timing of "ink priming sequence" is
iPF6000, Call for service. fallowing.
03800500-4050. -At installation of a new model printer
-At reinstallation after the second
transportation.
-At replacement of the printhead
405A Error E602-405A Incorrect capacity HDD model is Replace HDD
Call for service. connected.
405B Error E602-405B Mismatched HDD model is connected. Replace HDD
Call for service.
4061 !The paper loaded askew. Postion ditection of askew loaded paper.
Remove the paper.
6.3 Service Software
6.3.1 L Printer Service Tool

0031-2633
a) Function of L Printer Service Tool

This tool has the following function.
- Updating the firmware of printer
- Color check of multi sensor
- Displaying the printer information
Connection method with the computer:

USB, Network
6-35
Chapter 6
b) Screen description
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
F-6-1
[1] Main menu
Choose the menu to execute.
[2] Main menu button
Choose the menu to execute between the [Information] and the [Firmware] and the [Files].
[3] Sub menu button
The sub menu button is displayed according to the menu chosen by main menu or main menu button.
[4] Printer information area
The information of the printer connected with computer is shown according to the chose menu.
[5] Message area
The message of executed menu is shown. And the message is saved as the text file when choosing the "[Service]-[Save Message]" of the main menu.
c) Operation
1) Showing the information of the printer
The data of PRINT INF or status print is shown.
(1) Choose the [Information] of the main menu button or the "[Service]-[Information]" of the main menu.
F-6-2
(2) Choose the printer from the list shown to the printer information area.
6-36
Chapter 6
MEMO:
- The list is refreshed when choosing the [Refresh] of the sub menu button or the "[View]-[Refresh]" of the main menu.
- The printer is searched according to the setting of the [Specify Search Range] dialogue box after choosing the "[View]-[Specify Search Range]" of the main menu
to display the dialogue box. The five IP addresses at the maximum can register when searching by the IP address.
F-6-3
(3)-1 Choose the [Display PRINT INF] of the sub menu button or the "[Information]-[Display PRINT INF]" of the main menu when showing the PRINT INF.
- The data of PRINT INF is shown by the appointed application software.
(3)-2 Choose the [Display Status Print] of the sub menu button or the "[Information]-[Display Status Print]" of the main menu when showing the Status Print.
- The data of Status Print is shown by the appointed application software.
(3)-3 Choose the [Color Check] of the sub menu button or the "[Information]-[Color Check]" of the main menu when executing the color check.
- This mode judges the OK or NG by checking the color check data that measured by the multi sensor.
- Before executing the color check, need the following media to set to the printer.
Roll media of more than 10 inch width, or cut sheet of more than A4-size.
Paper type: Glossy Photo Paper 170gsm
- When executing the color check, the paper type that selected by the dialogue box must match with the paper type that set to the printer so that the check can
execute correctly.
MEMO:
- The application software used to show the data and the folder used to store the files can change by the "[Service]-[Setup]" of the main menu.
[1]
[2]
F-6-4
[1] This menu can change the folder used to store the file.
[2] This menu can change the application software (NotePad or WordPad) used to show the data.
- The printer name can add by the "[Service]-[Add Printer]" of the main menu.
F-6-5
6-37
Chapter 6
2) Updating the firmware of the printer

The firmware of printer can update according to the following procedure.
(1) Choose the [Firmware] of the main menu button or the "[Service]-[Firmware]" of the main menu.
F-6-6
(2) Choose the printer to update from the list of the printer shown to the printer information area.
MEMO:
- The printer list is refreshed when choosing the [Refresh] of the sub menu button or the "[View]-[Refresh]" of the main menu.
- The printer is searched according to the setting of the [Specify Search Range] dialogue box after choosing the "[View]-[Specify Search Range]" of the main menu
to display the dialogue box. The five IP addresses at the maximum can register when searching by the IP address.
F-6-7
(3) Choose the [Specify Firmware] of the sub menu button or the "[Firmware]-[Specify Firmware]" of the main menu.
Specify the folder stored the file by the [Specify Firmware Folder] of the [Specify Firmware] dialogue box or specify the file (.jdl file) by the [Specify Firmware
File] of the dialogue box.
F-6-8
(4) Make sure that the printer is the online mode or the download mode.
The firmware of the printer is updated when choosing the [Transfer Firmware] of the sub menu button or the "[Firmware]-[Transfer Firmware]" of the main menu.
MEMO:
The Printer becomes the force transfer mode when choosing the "[Firmware]-[Force Transfer Mode]" of the main menu. Thereby, you can choose the [Transfer
Firmware] without concerning the status of the printer. And when transferring an incorrect file, as it may destroy the printer firmware, please take extra care.
6-38
Chapter 6
3) Managing the information of the printer

The list of the PRINT INF or the status print gotten according to the procedure of "1) Showing the information of the printer" can manage.
(1) Choose the [Files] of the main menu button or the "[Service]-[Files]" of the main menu.
- The list of the PRINT INF or the status print gotten so far is shown in the printer information area.
F-6-9
(2) Choose the [Display] of the sub menu button or the "[Files]-[Display]" of the main menu after selecting the list that want to show in the printer information area.
The multiple selection from the lists is possible.
- The data of the selected PRINT INF or status print is shown.
MEMO:
- The user information can set to the list after choosing the [Input User Information] of the sub menu button or the "[Files]-[Input User Information]" of the main
menu. The input of max 511 characters is possible.
- In case of deleting the list, choose the "[Files]-[Delete Files]" of main menu after selecting the list which want to delete from the printer information area.
6-39
Chapter 6
6.4 Firmware Update Tool
6.4.1 imagePROGRAF Firmware Update Tool

0031-2634
a) Function of imagePROGRAF Firmware Update Tool

This tool has the following function.
- Updating the firmware of printer
Connection method with the computer:

USB, Network
b) Operation
1) Make sure that the printer is the online mode.
2) Exit all other running programs.
3) Start the imagePROGRAF Firmware Update Tool.
4) According to the internet connection state of the computer, specify in the [Update Method Selection] dialogue box as shown in the followings.
4)-1 In case the computer is connected to the internet, select the [Connect to the internet to get the latest information], and then click [Next].
F-6-10
4)-2 In case the computer is not connected to the internet, select the [Specify the Firmware] and specify the firmware data that downloaded manually, and then click
the [Next].
F-6-11
5) The [Update Possible] is displayed in the [Status] field of the printers that a newer firmware is available.
F-6-12
MEMO:
The overwriting the same firmware version or the firmware downgrade can not execute.
6) Click the printer to update the firmware of to select it, and then click the [Start Update] icon.
F-6-13
6-40
Chapter 6
7) Click [Yes] in the [Update Confirmation] dialogue box.
F-6-14
8) The firmware data is transferred to the printer.
9) After the firmware data transference has completed, the [Finish Update] dialogue box is displayed. Click the [OK].
- When the firmware has been overwritten, the printer restarts.
F-6-15
6-41
6.5 Service Tools
6.5.1 Tool List

0023-2570
T-6-1
General-purpose tools Application

Long phillips scerewdriver Inserting and removing screw
Phillips scerewdriver Inserting and removing screw
Flat-head screwdriver Removing the E-ring
Needle-nose pliers Inserting and removing the spring parts
Hex key wrench Inserting and removing hexagonal screws
Flat brush Applying grease
T-6-2
Special-purpose tools Application

Cover Switch Tool Pressing the cover switch
(QY9-0103)
Grease FLOIL G-5000H Applying to specified locations
(FY9-6022)
EU-1 Soaking or applying to specified locations
(FY9-6028)
Syringe Draining ink manually
(CK-0541)
Lint free paper Wiping off ink
(CK-0336)
Rubber gloves Preventing ink stains
(QC1-5547)
Penlight Assisting the manual cappings
(CK-0327)
Chapter 7 SERVICE MODE
Contents
Contents
7.1 Service Mode .................................................................................................................................................................7-1

7.1.1 Service Mode Operation .............................................................................................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.2 Map of the Service Mode............................................................................................................................................................. 7-2
7.1.3 Details of Service Mode............................................................................................................................................................. 7-10
7.1.4 e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote........................................................................................................................................ 7-28
7.1.5 Viewing PRINT INF.................................................................................................................................................................. 7-38
7.2 Special Mode................................................................................................................................................................7-53
7.2.1 Special Modes for Servicing ...................................................................................................................................................... 7-53
Chapter 7
7.1 Service Mode
7.1.1 Service Mode Operation

0023-2922
a) How to enter the Service mode

Enter service mode according to the following procedure:
1) Turn off the printer power.

2) Turn on the power while pressing the [Load] key and [Navigate] key.
* Keep pressing the above keys until "Initializing" is displayed.
3) "S" appears at the top right of the display.
4) Press the key or key to choose the [Set./Adj. Menu] and press the [OK] key.
"SERVICE MODE" appears in the menu list and the MESSAGE LED flashes.
5) Press the key or key to choose "SERVICE MODE" and press the [OK] key.
* Service mode is added to the [Set./Adj. Menu]. Service mode can be entered even when an error occurs (an error message is displayed) by turning off the power
once and then pressing the above keys.
b) How to exit the Service mode

Turn off the printer.
c) Key operation in the service mode

- Selecting menus and parameters: or key
- Going to the next lower-level menu: key
- Going to the previous higher-level menu: key
- Determining a selected menu or parameter:[OK] key
7-1
Chapter 7
7.1.2 Map of the Service Mode

0032-0613
The hierarchy of menus and parameters in the Service Mode is as shown below.
DISPLAY PRINT INF YES/NO : Select YES to print
SYSTEM S/N
TYPE
LF TYPE
TMP
RH
SIZE LF
SIZE LF
SIZE CR
SIZE CR
AFTER INST
HEAD S/N
LOT
INK C
---
BK
WARNING 01
---
20
ERROR 01
---
20
JAM 01
---
05
INK CHECK 000000
I/O DISPLAY I/O DISPLAY 1
I/O DISPLAY 2
I/O DISPLAY 3
7-2
Chapter 7
ADJUST PRINT PATTERN NOZZLE 1 : Press the [OK] button to
execute
OPTICAL AXIS : Press the [OK] button to
execute
LF TUNING
LF TUNING 2
HEAD ADJ. MANUAL HEAD ADJ DETAIL : Press the [OK] button to
execute
BASIC : Press the [OK] button to
execute
ADJ. SETTING A A-1 : Adjustment value entry
---
A-24 : Adjustment value entry
---
F F-1 : Adjustment value entry
SAVE SETTINGS YES/NO
RESET SETTINGS YES/NO
NOZZLE CHK POS. YES/NO
GAP CALIB. YES/NO
CHANGE LF TYPE 0/1
CR REG EXECUTE YES/NO
RESET YES/NO
CR MOTOR COG YES/NO
MARGIN ADJ TOP MARGIN ADJ -5.0 to 5.0
BTM MARGIN ADJ -5.0 to 5.0
PRINT PATTERN YES/NO
7-3
Chapter 7
FUNCTION CR UNLOCK YES/NO
CR LOCK YES/NO
PG CHECK YES/NO
CR AUTO SCAN YES/NO
CR SCAN COUNT 1 : Press the [OK] button to
set
---
30 : Press the [OK] button to
set
CR SCAN SIZE 1 : Press the [OK] button to
set
---
set
CR SCAN SPEED 1 : Press the [OK] button to
set
---
set
STIRRING CHECK YES/NO
OPT SENS OUTPUT YES OUTPUT0
---
OUTPUT6
NO
NOZZLE CHK YES/NO
NOZZLE INF C
---
BK
MEMORY CHK DDR YES/NO
EEP YES/NO
HEAD CNT CHK YES/NO
CR ERR CHK YES/NO
HEAD CHK temp : Display the value.
AD Di0 : Display the value.
AD Di1 : Display the value.
AD Vh : Display the value.
REPLACE CUTTER YES/NO
7-4
Chapter 7
COUNTER PRINTER LIFE TTL
LIFE ROLL
LIFE CUTSHEET
LIFE A
---
LIFE F
POWER ON
W-INK
CUTTER
WIPE
SLEEP ON
CARRIAGE PRINT
DRIVE
CR COUNT
CR DIST.
PRINT COUNT
PURGE CLN-A-1
CLN-A-2
CLN-A-3
CLN-A-6
CLN-A-7
CLN-A-10
CLN-A-11
CLN-A-15
CLN-A-16
CLN-A-17
CLN-A-TTL
CLN-M-1
CLN-M-4
CLN-M-5
CLN-M-6
CLN-M-TTL
CLEAR CLR-INK CONSUME
CLR-MTC EXC.
CLR-HEAD EXC.
CLR CR-1 EXC.
CLR CR-2 EXC.
CLR CR-3 EXC.
CLR CR-4 EXC.
CLR CR-5 EXC.
CLR SP-1 EXC.
CLR PG-1 EXC.
CLR HMa-1 EXC.
CLR MT-1 EXC.
CLR PL-1 EXC.
CLR Mi-1 EXC.
CLR CT-1 EXC.
CLR WF-1 EXC.
CLR WF-2 EXC.
CLR-FACTORY CNT.
7-5
Chapter 7
COUNTER EXCHANGE MTC EXC.
HEAD EXC.
BOARD EXC.(M/B)
CR-1 EXC.
CR-2 EXC.
CR-3 EXC.
CR-4 EXC.
CR-5 EXC.
SP-1 EXC.
PG-1 EXC.
HMa-1 EXC.
MT-1 EXC.
PL-1 EXC.
Mi-1 EXC.
CT-1 EXC.
WF-1 EXC.
WF-2 EXC.
DETAIL-CNT MOVE PRINTER
N-INK CHK(C)
---
N-INK CHK(BK)
MEDIACONFIG-CNT
INK-USE1 INK-USE1(C)
---
INK-USE1(BK)
INK-USE1(TTL)
N-INK-USE1(C)
---
N-INK-USE1(BK)
N-INK-USE1(TTL)
INK-USE2 INK-USE2(C)
---
INK-USE2(BK)
INK-USE2(TTL)
N-INK-USE2(C)
---
N-INK-USE2(BK)
N-INK-USE2(TTL)
INK-EXC INK-EXC(C)
---
INK-EXC(BK)
INK-EXC(TTL)
N-INK-EXC(C)
---
N-INK-EXC(BK)
N-INK-EXC(TTL)
7-6
Chapter 7
COUNTER MEDIA 1 NAME
TTL
TTL
ROLL
ROLL
CUTSHEET
CUTSHEET
---
MEDIA 7 NAME
TTL
TTL
ROLL
ROLL
CUTSHEET
CUTSHEET
MEDIA OTHER NAME
TTL
TTL
ROLL
ROLL
CUTSHEET
CUTSHEET
MEDIASIZE1 ROLL P-SQ 24-36
P-SQ 24-36
P-SQ 17-24
P-SQ 17-24
P-SQ -17
P-SQ -17
P-CNT 24-36
P-CNT 17-24
P-CNT -17
MEDIASIZE2 ROLL D-SQ 24-36
D-SQ 24-36
D-SQ 17-24
D-SQ 17-24
D-SQ -17
D-SQ -17
D-CNT 24-36
D-CNT 17-24
D-CNT -17
7-7
Chapter 7
COUNTER MEDIASIZE1 CUT P-SQ 24-36
P-SQ 24-36
P-SQ 17-24
P-SQ 17-24
P-SQ -17
P-SQ -17
P-CNT 24-36
P-CNT 17-24
P-CNT -17
MEDIASIZE2 CUT D-SQ 24-36
D-SQ 24-36
D-SQ 17-24
D-SQ 17-24
D-SQ -17
D-SQ -17
D-CNT 24-36
D-CNT 17-24
D-CNT -17
HEAD DOT CNT. 1 C
---
BK
TTL
HEAD DOT CNT. 2 C
---
BK
TTL
PARTS CNT. COUNTER CR-1 OK/W1/W2/E
1:00
2:00
3:00
4:00
---
COUNTER WF-2 OK/W1/W2/E
1:00
2:00
3:00
4:00
7-8
Chapter 7
SETTING Pth ON/OFF
RTC DATE yyyy/mm/dd
TIME hh:mm
PV AUTO JUDGE ON/OFF
NETWORK CERTIFICATE CA-CERTIFICATE VALIDITY yyyy/mm/dd
E-RDS E-RDS SWITCH ON/OFF
UGW-ADDRESS https://XXX
UGW-PORT XXXXX
COM-TEST YES
COM-LOG
HEAD DOT INF ON/OFF
TSC TTL PRINT AREA ON/OFF
INK CONSUMED ON/OFF
DUTY CNT ON/OFF
DISPLAY DECIMAL TTL PRINT AREA ON/OFF
INK CONSUMED ON/OFF
DUTY CNT ON/OFF
UNIT TTL PRINT AREA LENGTH UNIT
A4
LETTER
DUTY CNT LENGTH UNIT
A4
LETTER
INITIALIZE WARNIG : Press the [OK] button to
clear
ERROR : Press the [OK] button to
clear
JAM : Press the [OK] button to
clear
ADJUST : Press the [OK] button to
clear
W-INK : Press the [OK] button to
clear
CARRIAGE : Press the [OK] button to
clear
PURGE : Press the [OK] button to
clear
INK-USE CNT : Press the [OK] button to
clear
W-INK-CHG CNT : Press the [OK] button to
clear
HEAD-CHG CNT : Press the [OK] button to
clear
PARTS-CHG CNT PARTS CR ALL : Press the [OK] button to
clear
---
PARTS WF-2 : Press the [OK] button to
clear
PARTS COUNTER PARTS CR ALL : Press the [OK] button to
clear
---
PARTS WF-2 : Press the [OK] button to
clear
USER SETTEING YES/NO
CA-KEY YES/NO
ERDS-DAT YES/NO
JOB LOG : Press the [OK] button to
clear
7-9
Chapter 7
7.1.3 Details of Service Mode

0032-0617
This section provides details of the Service mode menu.
a) DISPLAY
Displays and prints the printer information.
1) PRINF INF
Prints adjustment values in the User menu, [DISPLAY] and [COUNTER] parameters on A4-size or lager paper.
When roll media is used, the layout is optimized according to the media width.
2) SYSTEM
Displays the printer information shown below.
Display Description Unit

S/N Serial number of printer -
TYPE Type setting on main controller PCB -
* iPF671/670 is represented by 24".
LF TYPE Feed roller type: 0 or 1 -
TMP Ambient temperature centigrade
degrees
RH Ambient humidity %
SIZE LF Detected size of loaded media (feed direction) mm/inch
0 is always detected for the roll media.
SIZE CR Detected size of loaded media (carriage scan direction) mm/inch
AFTER Number of days since initial installation Days
INST.
3) HEAD
Displays the following EEPROM information of the printhead.
Display Description
S/N Serial number of printhead
LOT Lot number of printhead
4) INK
Displays the numbers of days passed since installation of the following ink tanks.

BK Number of days passed since the BK ink tank was installed Days
MBK Number of days passed since the MBK ink tank was installed Days
MBK2 Number of days passed since the MBK2 ink tank was installed Days
C Number of days passed since the C ink tank was installed Days
M Number of days passed since the M ink tank was installed Days
Y Number of days passed since the Y ink tank was installed Days
5) WARNING
Displays the warning history (up to 20 events). The newest event has the smallest history number.
6) ERROR
Displays the error history (up to 20 events). The newest event has the smallest history number.
7-10
Chapter 7
7) JAM
Displays log of jams that have occurred (up to five events). The newest event has the smallest history number.
Indicates the date and time of jam and error code. "0000" is displayed if there is no log.
0 1 M M / D D H H : M M
X X X X - X X X X
F-7-1
Press the key to display detail information.

Press the key or key to navigate among detail information display 1 to 4.
Detail information display 1
J A M 0 1
1 : X X X X X X X X X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
F-7-2
J A M 0 1
2 : X X X X X X X X X
10
F-7-3
J A M 0 1
3 : X X X X
11
F-7-4
J A M 0 1
4 : X X X X X X X X
12
F-7-5
Display Description LCD display contents

1 Jam type 1:Carriage error, 2:Jam, 3:Feed failure (delay), 4:Cut failure, 0:Unknown
2 Media 1:Roll media, 2:Cut sheet, 0:Unknown
3 Jam timing 1:Feed, 2:Print, 3:Eject, 0:Unknown
4 Media width detection 1:ON, 2:OFF, 0:Unknown
5 Head height SL:1.0mm, L:1.3mm, M1:1.8mm, M2:2.0mm, M3:2.2mm, 0:Unknown
6 Platen shutter position 1:Fully close, 2:HP side only open, 3:1/4 open, 4:1/2 open, 5:3/4 open, 6:Fully open, 0:Unknown
7 Cut mode setting 1:User cut, 2:Eject cut, 3:Auto cut, 0:Unknown
8 Environment Display Media Information Tool's environment settings A to F according to Temperature/Humidity
Detection Sensor, 0:Unknown
9 Borderless printing setting 1:Bordered printing, 2:Borderless printing, 0:Unknown
10 Print mode Display print mode, 0:Unknown
11 Media siz Display media size, 0:Unknown
12 Media name Display media name, 0:Unknown
8) INK CHECK
Displays the number of times the remaining ink level detection function was turned off, to accommodate refilled ink cartridges in the order of C, M, Y, MBK, MBK2
and BK.
0: Never
1: Executed at least once
7-11
Chapter 7
b) I/O DISPLAY
The status of each sensor and switch is shown in the display.
Sensor and switch status is shown in the display.

ON: 1
OFF or not used: 0
Screen 1
I / O D I S P L A Y 1 (Upper row)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Lower row)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 (Display position)
F-7-6
Screen 2
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Lower row)
F-7-7
Screen 3
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Lower row)
F-7-8
7-12
Chapter 7
Screen 1, Screen 2 and Screen 3 are selectable with the and keys.
These screens display the associated sensor status as listed in the table below.
Display position Sensor name LCD display contents

1 Pump cam sensor 0:Sensor ON, 1:Sensor OFF
2 Ink supply valve open/closed detection sensor (R) 0:Sensor OFF, 1:Sensor ON
3 (Not Used) -
4 (Not Used) -
5 (Not Used) -
6 Lift cam sensor 0:Sensor ON, 1:Sensor OFF
7 Feed roller HP sensor 0:Sensor ON, 1:Sensor OFF
8 Upper cover lock switch 0:Cover close, 1:Cover open
9 (Not Used) 0:Cover open, 1:Cover close
10 Ink tank cover switch (R) 0:Cover open, 1:Cover close
11 Ink tank cover switch (L) 0:Cover open, 1:Cover close
12 (Not Used) -
13 (Not Used) -
14 (Not Used) -
15 (Not Used) -
16 (Not Used) -
17 (Not Used) -
18 (Not Used) -
19 (Not Used) -
20 Cutter HP sensor 0:Sensor ON, 1:Sensor OFF
21 Cutter left position sensor 0:Sensor ON, 1:Sensor OFF
22 Carriage HP sensor 0:Sensor ON, 1:Sensor OFF
23 (Not Used) -
24 Paper detection sensor 0:Media loaded, 1:No media
25 (Not Used) -
26 (Not Used) -
27 (Not Used) -
28 (Not Used) -
29 (Not Used) -
30 Ink supply valve open/closed detection sensor (L) 0:Sensor OFF, 1:Sensor ON
31 (Not Used) -
32 (Not Used) -
33 Release lever lock sensor 0:Sensor ON, 1:Sensor OFF
34 Pinch roller pressure release switch 0:Realeased, 1:Pressured
35 Shutter HP sensor 0:Sensor OFF, 1:Sensor ON
36 (Not Used) -
37 (Not Used) -
38 (Not Used) -
39 (Not Used) -
40 (Not Used) -
41 Flexible cable connection detection (J3601 pin no.50) 0:Connect, 1:Disconnect
45 (Not Used) -
46 (Not Used) -
47 (Not Used) -
48 (Not Used) -
7-13
Chapter 7
c) ADJUST
Performs adjustments and prints the adjustment and check patterns necessary for adjusting the printer parts.
1) PRINT PATTERN
Display Description
NOZZLE 1 Prints the nozzle check pattern by single direction/ single pass without using the non-discharging
back up.
It is used to check for the non-discharging nozzles.
- Media size: A4
- Media type: any
OPTICAL AXIS Prints the pattern and adjusts the optical axis of the multi sensor.
For details, refer to "Disassembly/Reassembly" > "Adjustment and Setup Items" > "Procedure
after replacing the carriage unit or multi sensor".
- Media type: photo glossy paper
LF TUNING Carry out automatic correction of eccentricity of the feed roller. For more details, refer to
"Disassembly/Reassembly" > "Adjustment and Setup Items" > "Procedure after Replacing the
Feed Roller or Feed Roller Encoder".
LF TUNING 2 Carry out manual correction of eccentricity of the feed roller. For more details, refer to
"Disassembly/Reassembly" > "Adjustment and Setup Items" > "Procedure after Replacing the
Feed Roller or Feed Roller Encoder".
2) HEAD ADJ.
Set or initialize the registration adjustment values of each printheads.
Display Description
MANUAL HEAD ADJ DETAIL Prints the detail patterns for the manual head adjustment.
After printing, the mode will change to [ADJ. SETTING]. Check the printed patterns and input the set
values.
BASIC Prints the basic patterns for the manual head adjustment.
After printing, the mode will change to [ADJ. SETTING]. Check the printed patterns and input the set
values.
ADJ. SETTING A to F A-1 to F-1 This mode is to input the registration adjustment values.
It is possible to return the values to the former one by printing the status print before changing the value.
SAVE SETTINGS Save the registration adjustment values that has been input.
RESET SETTINGS Initialize the registration adjustment values (to 0).
3) NOZZLE CHK POS.

This mode is for adjusting the optical axis of the head management sensor. For details, refer to "Disassembly/Reassembly" > "Adjustment and Setup Items" > "Pro-
cedure after replacing the head management sensor".
4) GAP CLIB.
This mode measures the gap between the printhead and media by using the multi sensor and corrects the calibration value.
5) CHANGE LF TYPE
Change the type of the feed roller.
0: Old feed roller
1: New feed roller
7-14
Chapter 7
6) CR REG
Executes automatic head adjustment.
Make this adjustment if the registration remains partially misregistered after user-mode head adjustment.
EXECUTE: Execute automatic head adjustment.
RESET: Reset the registration adjustment value (0).
- Applicable media size is A2 (17inch) or larger.

- Applicable media type is photo glossy paper
If an error message appears when performing CR REG, check the following.

Replace the multi sensor if the error reoccurs after checking and performing CR REG again.
<CHECK>
1. Check for non-discharging of the printhead and dirty media, and replace the printhead and/or media if necessary.
2. Perform [Head Cleaning A].
3. Perform [Head Posi. Adj.]-[Auto].
7) CR MOTOR COG
Adjust the carriage motor rotation.
Perform in the following cases:
- When removing/attaching or replacing the carriage or carriage belt.
- When replacing the carriage motor or linear encoder sensor.
- When there is excessive load on the carriage (such as when jamming)
If the following error message appears when performing CR MOTOR COG, check that carriage and carriage belt are installed properly and clean the carriage shaft.
If the error still occurs, replace the carriage motor.
C R V I B R A T I O N
E R R O R
F-7-9
8) MARGIN ADJ
This mode is to perform the fine adjustment of the leading and trailing edge margin.
Display Description
TOP MARGIN ADJ Set the fine adjustment value of leading edge margin.
Range: -5.0 to 5.0mm (in 0.1mm increments)
BTM MARGIN ADJ Set the fine adjustment value of trailing edge margin.
Range: -5.0 to 5.0mm (in 0.1mm increments)
PRINT PATTERN Print the pattern for checking the margin.
After adjusting the margin, make sure of the margin by printing the pattern.
7-15
Chapter 7
d) FUNCTION
1) CR UNLOCK
Unlocks the carriage.
When CR UNLOCK is performed, the carriage lock pin is lowered and the carriage can be moved.
2) CR LOCK
Locks the carriage.
When CR LOCK is performed, the carriage lock pin is raised and the carriage is locked.
3) PG CHECK
Initializes the purge unit.
4) CR AUTO SCAN
The carriage scans.
When CR AUTO SCAN is performed, the carriage scans with the count, width, and speed set with CR SCAN COUNT/CR SCAN SIZE/CR SCAN SPEED.
5) CR SCAN COUNT
Sets the number of scans (1 to 30) to be performed with CR AUTO SCAN.
Default: 1
6) CR SCAN SIZE
Sets the scan width to be performed with CR AUTO SCAN.
1:A4, 2:A3, 3:A2, 4:24inch, 5:36inch
Default: 5
7) CR SCAN SPEED
Sets the speed of the scan to be performed with CR AUTO SCAN.
1:12.5, 2:25, 3:33.3, 4:40, 5:50 (Unit: inch/sec)
Default: 1
MEMO:
The settings made with CR SCAN COUNT, CR SCAN SIZE, CR SCAN SPEED are reset to default when the power is reset.
8) STIRRING CHECK
Agitates the ink tank.
9) OPT SENS OUTPUT

Displays the values (analog value) multi sensor detected from the media.
You can confirm the amount of margin the media has with the values read with the multi sensor and the status of the multi sensor by comparing the values with the
threshold.
Press the key or key to navigate among OUTPUT 0 to 6 windows.

OUTPUT 0
O U T P U T 0
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5
F-7-10
OUTPUT 1
O U T P U T 1
6 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 9 9 9 10 10 10
F-7-11
OUTPUT 2
O U T P U T 2
11 11 11 12 12 12 13 13 13 14 14 14 15 15 15
F-7-12
OUTPUT 3
O U T P U T 3
16 16 16 17 17 17 18 18 18 19 19 19 20 20 20
F-7-13
7-16
Chapter 7
OUTPUT 4
O U T P U T 4
21 21 21 22 22 22 23 23 23 24 24 24 25 25 25
F-7-14
OUTPUT 5
O U T P U T 5
26 26 26 27 27 27 28 28 28 29 29 29 30 30 30
F-7-15
OUTPUT 6
O U T P U T 6
31 31 31 32 32 32 33 33 33 34 34 34 35 35 35
F-7-16
Display
Description
position
1 Media edge (diffuse reflection) media output (including outside light)
2 Media edge (diffuse reflection) outside light output (when LED is OFF)
3 Media edge (diffuse reflection) platen output (excluding outside light)
4 Media edge (diffuse reflection) gain
5 Media edge (diffuse reflection) current value (Unit: X10mA)
6 Media edge (regular reflection) media output (including outside light)
7 Media edge (regular reflection) outside light output (when LED is OFF)
8 Media edge (regular reflection) platen output (excluding outside light)
9 Media edge (regular reflection) gain
10 Media edge (regular reflection) current value (Unit: X10mA)
11 GAP1 media output (including outside light)
12 GAP1 outside light output (when LED is OFF)
13 GAP1 platen output (excluding outside light)
14 GAP1 gain
15 GAP1 current value (Unit: X10mA)
16 GAP2 media output (including outside light)
17 GAP2 outside light output (when LED is OFF)
18 GAP2 platen output (excluding outside light)
19 GAP2 gain
20 GAP2 current value (Unit: X10mA)
21 Density (red) media output (including outside light)
22 Density (red) outside light output (when LED is OFF)
23 Density (red) platen output (excluding outside light)
24 Density (red) gain
25 Density (red) current value (Unit: X10mA)
26 Density (green) media output
27 Density (green) outside light output (including outside light)
28 Density (green) platen output (excluding outside light)
29 Density (green) gain
30 Density (green) current value (Unit: X10mA)
31 Density (blue) media output (including outside light)
32 Density (blue) outside light output (when LED is OFF)
33 Density (blue) platen output (excluding outside light)
34 Density (blue) gain
35 Density (blue) current value (Unit: X10mA)
MEMO:
- Displays all "?" if "GAP CALIB" is not performed.
- If the value exceeds 1000, 999 is displayed.
7-17
Chapter 7
1. Checking "OUTPUT 0" and "OUTPUT 1" when media (excluding clear film) is fed
[Check 1]
Check whether the multi sensor performance has degraded or whether the media is compatible with the multi sensor.
When "Media edge (diffuse reflection) gain" and "Media edge (diffuse reflection) current value" are maximum values and "Media edge (diffuse reflection) media
output" is 186 or less, an error occurs.
Maximum value of "Media edge (diffuse reflection)" gain: 255
Maximum value of "Media edge (diffuse reflection)" current value: 320
When the multi sensor and media are normal, the following values are displayed:
Media edge (diffuse reflection) Media edge (diffuse reflection) Media edge (diffuse reflection)
gain current value media output
Plain paper About 10-35 About 200 About 500-600
Glossy paper About 8-25
Tracing paper About 30-100
[Check 2]
Check whether the multi sensor performance has degraded or whether the media is compatible with the multi sensor.
When the difference between "Media edge (diffuse reflection) gain" and "Media edge (diffuse reflection) platen output" is 100 or less, an error occurs.
When the multi sensor and media are normal, the difference is about 300-600.
[Check 3]
Check the effect of external diffuse light.
When the difference between "Media edge (diffuse reflection) external light output" and "Media edge (diffuse reflection) platen output" is 500 or more, the effect
of diffuse light is judged as being great.
When the effect is normal, the difference is about 50-300.
[Check 4]
Check whether the media is compatible.
When the result of "Media edge (regular reflection) gain"x"Media edge (regular reflection) current value" is five times as large as the result of "Media edge (diffuse
reflection) gain"x"Media edge (diffuse reflection) current value", the media is judged as being incompatible with the multi sensor.
If the media is compatible, the result is about 0.5 to 1.5 times for plain/glossy paper; about 1-3 times for tracing paper.
[Check 5]
Check whether the media is compatible.
When the result of "Media edge (diffuse reflection) gain"x"Media edge (diffuse reflection) current value" is in one of the following, the media may be incompatible
with the multi sensor.
- Nine or more times as large as that of plain paper (normally, 2000-7000)
- Ten or more times as large as that of glossy paper (normally, 1600-5000)
- Three or more times as large as that of tracing paper (normally, 6000-20000)
2. Checking "OUTPUT 0" when clear film is fed
[Check 1]
Check whether the multi sensor performance has degraded or whether the media is compatible.
When the "Media edge (regular reflection) gain" and "Media edge (regular reflection) current value" are maximum values and "Media edge (regular reflection)
media output" is 186 or less, an error occurs.
Maximum value of "media edge (regular reflection)" gain: 255
Maximum value of "media edge (regular reflection)" current value: 320
When the multi sensor and media are normal, the following values are displayed:
Media edge (regular Media edge (regular Media edge (regular

reflection) gain reflection) current value reflection) media output
Clear film About 10-60 About 200 About 500-600
[Check 2]
When the difference between "Media edge (regular reflection) gain" and "Media edge (regular reflection) platen output" is 100 or less, an error occurs.
When the multi sensor and media are normal, the difference is about 250-500.
[Check 3]
Check the effect of external diffuse light.
When the difference between "Media edge (regular reflection) external light output" and "Media edge (regular reflection) platen output" is 500 or more, the effect
of diffuse light is judged as being great.
When the effect is normal, the difference is about 50-300.
3. Checking "OUTPUT 2/OUTPUT 3" and "OUTPUT 4/OUTPUT 5/OUTPUT 6"
[Check 1]
When "GAP gain" and "GAP current value" are maximum values and "GAP media output" is 93 or less, an error occurs.
Maximum value of "GAP gain": 255
Maximum value of "GAP current value": 320
When the multi sensor and media are normal, "GAP gain" is about 30-250; "GAP current value" is about 200.
7-18
Chapter 7
[Check 2]
When "Density gain" and "Density current value" are maximum values and "Density media output" is 168 or less, an error occurs.
Maximum value of "Density gain": 255
Maximum value of "Density current value": 245
When the multi sensor performance and media are normal, "Density gain" is about 5-100; "Density current value" is about 200.
10) NOZZLE CHECK

Checks for non-discharging nozzle with head management sensor.
11) NOZZLE INF

Displays the result of non-discharging nozzle check performed with "NOZZLE CHECK" by nozzle row of each ink color.
- Press the key or key to switch the ink color.
- AE:A-EVEN row, AO:A-ODD row, BE:B-EVEN row, BO:B-ODD row
C A E : O K A O : O K
B E : O K B O : O K
F-7-17
12) MEMORY CHK
Display Description
DDR Checks the DDR-SDRAM mounted on the Main Controller PCB.
EEP Checks the EEPROM.
13) HEAD CNT CHK

Confirms the contact status of the printhead.
14) CR ERR CHK

This mode performs the self diagnosis about the drive state of the carriage unit.
Perform in case the drive state of the carriage unit is abnormal. it can guess the failure cause of the carriage unit as shown in the followings.
- Carriage motor failure
- Linear encoder sensor failure
- Linear scale failure or overload state
* When performing this mode, open and close the upper cover by following the instructions on the screen.
After displaying the following screen, press the [OK] key to start the self diagnosis, and then the diagnosis result is displayed.
If the failure is found, check and replace the corresponding parts or surrounding parts.
C R H P S N S O K
P R E S S O K K E Y
F-7-18
- Normal
C R C H E C K O K
C H E C K E N D
F-7-19
- Carriage motor failure
C R M O T O R E R R
C H E C K E N D
F-7-20
- Linear encoder sensor failure
C R E N C S E N S E R R
C H E C K E N D
F-7-21
- Linear scale failure or overload state
E N C o r O V E R L O A D
C H E C K E N D
F-7-22
7-19
Chapter 7
15) HEAD CHK

Perform in case the printhead is abnormal. It can guess whether the failure cause is the printhead or not.
MEMO:
As the printhead and thermistor are high temperature after printing immediately, perform this mode after 5 minutes or more printing is completed.
Display the value (analogue) detected by the printhead, the thermistor on the carriage PCB, DI sensor (Di0/Di1) and head Vh.
Check whether the detection value is normal or not to judge the abnormal part.
Press the / key to select the item, and then press the key to display the detection value.
- temp
2 5 1 2 6 - 2 7 T 3 0
- 1 5 2 5 1 2 7 t 2 8
Printhead temperature T: Thermistor detection temperature

(centigrade degrees) mounted on the Carriage PCB
chipA chipB chipC (centigrade degrees)
chipD chipE chipF t: Temperature/Humidity detection sensor
detection temperature
(centigrade degrees)
F-7-23
- AD Di0
2 5 5 1 2 7 1 0 2 3 D
1 0 2 3 6 3 1 2 7 0
Head DI sensor (Di0) detection analogue value
F-7-24
- AD Di1
2 5 5 1 2 7 1 0 2 3 D
1 0 2 3 6 3 1 2 7 1
Head DI sensor (Di1) detection analogue value
F-7-25
- AD Vh
1 0 2 3 V
h
Head VH detection analogue value
F-7-26
<CHECK>
Judge the failure part by comparing the temperature of the printhead and the value detected by thermistor on the carriage PCB.
T-7-1
PrintHead temperature Thermistor temperature

Judgement
(Centigrade degree)* (Centigrade degree)*
22 to 28 22 to 28 Normal
21 or less, 29 or more The part except for the printhead may have a failure.
(Carriage PCB, flexible cable, main controller PCB)
21 or less, 29 or more 22 to 28 The printhead may have a failure.
21 or less, 29 or more The printhead or the carriage PCB or the flexible cable
or the main controller PCB may have a failure.
*: Adequate temperature ranges when the surrounding temperature (temperature/humidity sensor detection value) of the printer is 25 degrees centigrade. For ex-
ample, when the surrounding temperature is 30 degrees centigrade, above temperatures rise each 5 degrees centigrade.
e) REPLACE
1) CUTTER
This mode is for replacing the cutter.
f) COUNTER
Displays the life (operation frequency and time) of each unit, print counts for each media type, and else.
The count values can be printed from [PRINT INF].
7-20
Chapter 7
1) PRINTER: Counters related to product life

LIFE TTL Cumulative number of printed media (equivalent of A4) sheets
LIFE ROLL Cumulative number of printed roll media (equivalent of A4) sheets
LIFE CUTSHEET Cumulative number of printed cut sheets (equivalent to A4) sheets
LIFE A-F Cumulative number of printed media for environments A to F sheets
POWER ON Cumulative power-on time (excluding the sleep time) Hours
W-INK Remaining capacity of the maintenance cartridge %
CUTTER Number of cutting operations (count as 1 by moving back and forth) Times
WIPE Number of wiping operations Times
SLEEP ON Cumulative sleep-on time Hours
2) CARRIAGE: Counters related to carriage unit

PRINT Cumulative printing time Hours
DRIVE Cumulative carriage moving time Hours
CR COUNT Cumulative carriage scan count (count as 1 by moving back and forth) Times
CR DIST. Cumulative carriage scan distance (count as 1 by moving 210mm) Times
PRINT COUNT Cumulative print end count (count as 1 by capping) Times
3) PURGE: Counters related to purge unit

CLN-A-1 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 1 (normal suction) operations Times
CLN-A-2 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 2 (ink level adjusting) operations Times
CLN-A-3 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 3 (initial filling) operations Times
CLN-A-6 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 6 (strong normal suction) operations Times
CLN-A-7 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 7 (aging) operations
CLN-A-10 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 10 (ink filling after secondary transportation) operations Times
CLN-A-11 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 11 (ink filling after head replacement) operations Times
CLN-A-15 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 15 (dot count small suction) operations Times
CLN-A-16 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 16 (sedimented ink agitation) operations Times
CLN-A-17 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 17 (small suction) operations Times
CLN-A-TTL Total number of automatic cleaning operations Times
CLN-M-1 Cumulative number of manual cleaning 1 (normal suction) operations Times
CLN-M-4 Cumulative number of manual cleaning 4 (ink draining from head after head replacement) operations Times
CLN-M-5 Cumulative number of manual cleaning 5 (ink draining from head and tube before transportation ) operations Times
CLN-M-6 Cumulative number of manual cleaning 6 (normal strong suction) operations Times
CLN-M-TTL Total number of manual cleaning operations Times
4) CLEAR: Counters related to counter initialization

CLR-INK CONSUME Cumulative count of ink section consumption amount clearing Times
CLR-MTC EXC. Cumulative count of maintenance cartridge replacement count clearing Times
CLR-HEAD EXC. Cumulative count of printhead replacement count clearing Times
CLR-UNIT CR-1 EXC. Cumulative count of unit CR-1(carriage unit bushing) replacement count clearing Times
CLR-UNIT CR-2 EXC. Cumulative count of unit CR-2(fexible cable unit) replacement count clearing Times
CLR-UNIT CR-3 EXC. Cumulative count of unit CR-3(linear encoder sensor/linear scale/shaft cleaner) Times
replacement count clearing
CLR-UNIT CR-4 EXC. Cumulative count of unit CR-4(carriage height changing cam) replacement count Times
clearing
CLR-UNIT CR-5 EXC. Cumulative count of unit CR-5(multi sensor) replacement count clearing Times
CLR-UNIT SP-1 EXC. Cumulative count of unit SP-1(ink tube unit) replacement count clearing Times
CLR-UNIT PG-1 EXC. Cumulative count of unit PG-1(purge unit) replacement count clearing Times
CLR-UNIT HMa-1 EXC. Cumulative count of unit HMa-1(head management sensor) replacement count clearing Times
CLR-UNIT MT-1 EXC. Cumulative count of unit MT-1(carriage motor) replacement count clearing Times
CLR-UNIT PL-1 EXC. Cumulative count of unit PL-1(feed motor) replacement count clearing Times
CLR-UNIT Mi-1 EXC. Cumulative count of unit Mi-1(mist fan/mist exhaust duct) replacement count clearing Times
CLR-UNIT CT-1 EXC. Cumulative count of unit CT-1(cutter) replacement count clearing Times
CLR-UNIT WF-1 EXC. Cumulative count of unit WF-1(ink absorber under the maintenance cartridge unit) Times
CLR-UNIT WF-2 EXC. Cumulative count of unit WF-2(platen exhaust duct) replacement count clearing Times
CLR-FACTORY CNT. For factory Times
7-21
Chapter 7
5) EXCHANGE: Counters related to parts replacement

MTC EXC. Maintenance cartridge replacement count Times
HEAD EXC. Printhead replacement count Times
BOARD EXC.(M/B) Main controller PCB replacement count Times
CR-1 EXC. CR-1(carriage unit bushing) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS CR-1])
CR-2 EXC. CR-2(fexible cable unit) replacement count Times
CR-3 EXC. CR-3(linear encoder sensor/linear scale/shaft cleaner) replacement count Times
CR-4 EXC. CR-4(carriage height changing cam) replacement count Times
CR-5 EXC. CR-5(multi sensor) replacement count Times
SP-1 EXC. SP-1(ink tube unit) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS SP-1])
PG-1 EXC. PG-1(purge unit) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS PG-1])
HMa-1 EXC. HMa-1(head management sensor) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS HMa-1])
MT-1 EXC. MT-1(carriage motor) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS MT-1])
PL-1 EXC. PL-1(feed motor) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS PL-1])
Mi-1 EXC. Mi-1(mist fan/mist exhaust duct) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS Mi-1])
CT-1 EXC. CT-1(cutter) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS CT-1])
WF-1 EXC. WF-1(ink absorber under the maintenance cartridge unit) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS WF-1])
WF-2 EXC. WF-2(platen exhaust duct) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS WF-2])
6) DETAIL-CNT: Other counters

MOVE PRINTER A(B,C,D) A: Number of times "Prep.MovePrinter" on Main menu is Times
executed.
B: Number of times "Limited" (Level1)
C: Number of times "Standard" (Level2)
D: Level of "Prep.MovePrinter" that executed at previous time
N-INKCHK(XX) XX: Ink color Times
Count of turning off the ink remaining level detection for each
color
MEDIACONFIG-CNT Count of media registered by media editor Times
7) INK-USE1: Counters related to ink consumption

INK-USE1(XX) XX: Ink color ml
Cumulative consumption amount of generic ink
INK-USE1(TTL) Total amount of cumulative consumption of generic ink ml
N-INK-USE1(XX) XX: Ink color ml
Cumulative consumption amount of refilled ink
N-INK-USE1(TTL) Total amount of cumulative consumption of refilled ink ml
8) INK-USE2: Counters related to ink consumption

INK-USE2(XX) XX: Ink color ml
Consumption amount of generic ink of the currently installed ink tank.
INK-USE2(TTL) Total consumption amount of generic ink of the currently installed ink tanks ml
N-INK-USE2(XX) XX: Ink color ml
Consumption amount of refilled ink of the currently installed ink tank
N-INK-USE2(TTL) Total consumption amount of refilled ink of the currently installed ink tanks ml
7-22
Chapter 7
9) INK-EXC: Counters related to ink tank replacement

INK-EXC(XX) XX: Ink color ml
Cumulative count of generic ink tank replacement
INK-EXC(TTL) Total amount of cumulative count of generic ink tank replacement ml
N-INK-EXC(XX) XX: Ink color ml
Cumulative count of refilled ink tank replacement
N-INK-EXC(TTL) Total amount of cumulative count of refilled ink tank replacement ml
10) MEDIA x (x: 1 to 7): Counters related to media

One to seven media types are displayed individually in order with large cumulative print area.

NAME Media type -
TTL Total amount of cumulative print area of roll media and cut sheet (metric) Sq.m
TTL Total amount of cumulative print area of roll media and cut sheet (inch) Sq.f
ROLL Cumulative print area of roll media (metric) Sq.m
ROLL Cumulative print area of roll media (inch) Sq.f
CUT SHEET Cumulative print area of cut sheet (metric) Sq.m
CUT SHEET Cumulative print area of cut sheet (inch) Sq.f
11) MEDIA OTHER: Counters related to media

Displays the total amount of cumulative print area of the other media type than the above-mentioned

NAME Media type -
TTL Total amount of cumulative print area of roll media and cut sheet (metric) Sq.m
TTL Total amount of cumulative print area of roll media and cut sheet (inch) Sq.f
ROLL Cumulative print area of roll media (metric) Sq.m
ROLL Cumulative print area of roll media (inch) Sq.f
CUT SHEET Cumulative print area of cut sheet (metric) Sq.m
CUT SHEET Cumulative print area of cut sheet (inch) Sq.f
12) MEDIASIZE1 ROLL: Counters related to roll media printing

P-SQ 24-36 Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 24 inches but less than 36 inches (physical size) Sq.m/Sq.f
P-SQ -17 Cumulative print area of paper less than 17 inches (physical size) Sq.m/Sq.f
P-CNT 24-36 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper equal to or larger than 24 inches but less than 36 inches sheets
(physical size)
(physical size)
P-CNT -17 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper less than 17 inches (physical size) sheets
13) MEDIASIZE2 ROLL: Counters related to roll media printing

D-SQ 24-36 Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 24 inches but less than 36 inches (data size) Sq.m/Sq.f
D-SQ -17 Cumulative print area of paper less than 17 inches (data size) Sq.m/Sq.f
D-CNT 24-36 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper equal to or larger than 24 inches but less than 36 inches sheets
(data size)
(data size)
D-CNT -17 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper less than 17 inches (data size) sheets
14) MEDIASIZE1 CUT: Counters related to cut sheet printing

P-SQ -17 Cumulative print area of paper less than 17 inches (physical size) Sq.m/Sq.f
(physical size)
(physical size)
P-CNT -17 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper less than 17 inches (physical size) sheets
7-23
Chapter 7
15) MEDIASIZE2 CUT: Counters related to cut sheet printing

D-SQ -17 Cumulative print area of paper less than 17 inches (data size) Sq.m/Sq.f
(data size)
(data size)
D-CNT -17 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper less than 17 inches (data size) sheets
16) HEAD DOT CNT.1: Counter related to dot count

XX XX: Ink color (x 1,000,000) dots
Dot counts of each colors of the currently installed printhead
TTL Total dot counts of each colors of the currently installed printhead (x 1,000,000) dots
17) HEAD DOT CNT.2: Counter related to dot count

XX XX: Ink color (x 1,000,000) dots
Cumulative dot counts of each colors
TTL Total cumulative dot counts of each colors (x 1,000,000) dots
7-24
Chapter 7
18) PARTS CNT. : Counter related to consumable parts
C O U N T E R C R - 1
a a b b b b b
F-7-27
The displays are selectable with the and keys.

Counter of the consumable part (current)
1 : x x x x x
F-7-28
Life of the consumable part
2 : x x x x x
F-7-29
Use rate until part replacement
3 : x x x %
F-7-30
Counter of the consumable part (accumulate)
4 : x x x x x
F-7-31

COUNTER xx-x: Unit number of consumable parts Days
xx-x (For detail, refer to "Maintenance and Inspection" > "Consumable Parts")
Display the status (aa) and the days passed since the counter (bbbb) resetting.
- Status
OK: Use rate (until part replacement) of all consumable parts included in each unit
are below 90%.
W1: Use rate (until part replacement) of either of the consumable parts included in
each unit has reached 90% or more.
W2: Use rate (until part replacement) of either of the consumable parts included in
each unit has reached 100%, but no need to stop the printer.
E : Use rate (until part replacement) of either of the consumable parts included in
each unit has reached 100%, and the printer needs to be stopped.
1: Unit number of consumable parts
Counter of the consumable part (current)
2: Life of the consumable part
3: Use rate until part replacement %
4: Counter of the consumable part (accumulate)
7-25
Chapter 7
g) SETTING
Make various settings.
1) Pth
Turn on or off the head pulse rank control function.
Default: OFF
2) RTC
Set RTC (real time clock) after replacing the lithium battery on the main controller PCB.
Display Description
DATE yyyy/mm/dd Set date
TIME hh:mm Set time
3) PV AUTO JUDGE
Sets ink saver mode.
Default: OFF
4) NETWORK
See "e-maintenance/imageWARE Remote" for detail.
5) E-RDS
See "e-maintenance/imageWARE Remote" for detail.
6) HEAD DOT INF
Select whether to display the message as the result of non-discharging nozzle detection or not.
Default: ON
Number of non-discharging
ON OFF
nozzle (nozzle/2,560-nozzles)
0-99 Displays a message to check the -
printing.
100-319 Displays a message to check the head. -
320 or more Displays a message to replace the head.
7) TSC
Make indication settings about TSC.
T-7-2
Display Description
TTL PRINT AREA Select whether to display the total printing area or not (Default:
ON)
INK CONSUMED Select whether to display the amount of ink consumption or not
(Default: OFF)
DUTY CNT Select whether to display the Duty counter or not (Default: ON)
DISPLAY DECIMAL TTL PRINT AREA Select whether to display the decimal fraction of total printing
area or not (Default: ON)
INK CONSUMED Select whether to display the decimal fraction of amount of ink
consumption or not (Default: ON)
DUTY CNT Select whether to display the decimal fraction of Duty counter or
not (Default: ON)
UNIT TTL PRINT AREA Set the unit of total printing area
Setting value: LENGTH UNIT* (default)/A4/LETTER
*: The setting is in accord with [Lenght Unit] in the Main menu.
DUTY CNT Set the unit of Duty counter
Setting value: LENGTH UNIT*/A4 (default)/LETTER
*: The setting is in accord with [Lenght Unit] in the Main menu.
7-26
Chapter 7
h) INITIALIZE
Clear the [DISPLAY] histories, [ADJUST] settings, [COUNTER] values, and other parameters.
Display Description
WARNING Initialize the history of WARNING.
(All displayed contents of [DISPLAY] > [WARNING] will be initialized.)
ERROR Initialize the history of ERROR.
(All displayed contents of [DISPLAY] > [ERROR] will be initialized.)
JAM Initialize the history of JAM.
(All displayed contents of [DISPLAY] > [JAM] will be initialized.)
ADJUST Initialize the value of band adjustment (by user) and head adjustment.
The automatically adjusted value will not be initialized.
W-INK Initialize the remaining capacity (%) of the maitenance cartridge.
(Clear [COUNTER] > [PRINTER] > [W-INK])
CARRIAGE Initialize the counter related to carriage unit.
(Clear [COUNTER] > [CARRIAGE])
PURGE Initialize the counter related to purge unit.
(Clear [COUNTER] > [PURGE])
INK-USE CNT Initialize the consumption amount of ink.
(Clear [COUNTER] > [INK-USE2], and count up [COUNTER] > [CLEAR] > [CLR-INK
CONSUME])
W-INK-CHG CNT Initialize the maintenance cartridge replacement frequency.
(Clear [COUNTER] > [EXCHANGE] > [MTC EXC.], and count up [COUNTER] > [CLEAR]
> [CLR-MTC EXC.])
HEAD-CHG CNT Initialize the printhead replacement frequency.
(Clear [COUNTER] > [EXCHANGE] > [HEAD EXC.], and count up [COUNTER] >
[CLEAR] > [CLR-HEAD EXC.])
PARTS-CHG PARTS xx-x xx-x: Unit number of consumable parts
CNT (For details, refer to "Maintenance and Inspection" > "Consumable Parts")
Initialize the consumable part replacement frequency.
(Clear [COUNTER] > [EXCHANGE] > [xx-x EXC], and count up [COUNTER] > [CLEAR]
> [CLR xx-x EXC.])
PARTS PARTS xx-x xx-x: Unit number of consumable parts
COUNTER (For details, refer to "Maintenance and Inspection" > "Consumable Parts")
Initialize the counter amount of the consumable parts.
(Clear [COUNTER] > [PARTS CNT.] > [COUNTER xx-x])
* After replacing the consumable part, be sure to execute this menu.
USER SETTING Initializes the user menu.
Same as executing the following mode in the user menu.
-[Set./Adj. Menu]-[System Setup]-[Reset PaprSetngs]
-[Set./Adj. Menu]-[Interface Setup]-[Return Defaults]
CA-KEY See "e-maintenance/imageWARE Remote" for detail.
ERDS-DAT See "e-maintenance/imageWARE Remote" for detail.
JOB LOG Initialize the history of JOB LOG.
7-27
Chapter 7
7.1.4 e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote

0023-1100
1. Overview
The e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote system allows a customer's device information and status to be monitored via the Internet on a server called the UGW
(Universal Gateway) Server.
The following device information/ statuses can be monitored.

- Service mode counters
- Parts counters
- Mode counters
- Firmware information
- Service call errors log
- Jam log
- Alarm log
- Alert change statuses (Toner/ ink low/ out, etc.)
Device monitor information above is sent by the e-RDS (embedded Remote Diagnostic System), which is embedded in the devices.
Further, as the above is all customer information, https SOAP protocol is used for communication between the UGW and the device, providing enhanced security
(SSL client communication)
UGW
e-RDS
F-7-32
2. Feature and benefits
Device (e-RDS) embedded with network module can realize a front-end processing of the e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote system without attaching an extra
hardware equipment.
The e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote system can be implemented without imposing a burden on the users.
3. Settings procedures
3.1 Advance preparations
To monitor the device with e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote, the following settings are required.
1) Advance confirmation
Check with the UGW administrator whether the printer to be connected to the e-Maintenance/imageWARE remotely has been registered in the UGW.
2) Advance preparations
Interview the user's system administrator in advance to find out the following information about the network.
Information item -1
IP address setting methods
Check whether automatic setting or manual setting is to be used, and confirm the information below.
- Automatic setting: (DHCP, RARP, BOOTP) (ON/OFF selection)
or
- Manual setting: IP address, subnet mask and gateway address to be set
Information item -2
Is there a DNS server in use?
If there is a DNS server in use, find out the following.
- Primary DNS server address
- Secondary DNS server address (optional)
Information item -3
Is there a proxy server?
If there is a proxy server in use, find out the following.
- Proxy server address
- Port number connected to proxy server
Information item -4
Is proxy server authentication required?
If proxy server authentication is required, find out the following.
- User name and password required for proxy authentication
3) Network settings
Make the network settings based on the information obtained in "2) Advance preparations."
Network settings are made in user mode. Therefore, it is assumed that the user has already set it. However, there are a few cautions as described below, and if
necessary, there may be cases in which the service technicians do it after obtaining an approval from user.
Caution point -1
Proxy server settings
Proxy server settings cannot be made in "Remote UI". Enter from the operation panel menu. In addition, the operation panel menu items for proxy server only appear
when e-RDS functions are enabled. Therefore, when you make proxy server settings, turn the "E-RDS SWITCH" setting to "ON" as described in later sections
beforehand.
Caution point -2
Validate the settings (restart the printer)
7-28
Chapter 7
The server address settings are activated only after you restart the printer. Make sure you always restart the printer after changing server address settings.
(1) How to enter Proxy server address
[1]
Server Address [a]
http://_
: Select [2]
Stop : Delete
Navi : a -> A -> 1
[OK:Set]
F-7-33
[1] Display to show enter mode

a: Small alphabet letter
A: Capital alphabet letter
1: Numerical character
[2] URL entry field (128 one-byte characters)
- Following symbols exist in each enter mode. (When you press the key, characters on the right hand side will appear.)
[a] Small alphabet letter mode: [Symbol] abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
[A] Capital alphabet letter mode: [Symbol] ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
[1] Numerical character mode: [Symbol] 1234567890
- [Symbol] appears in the following order.
key key
F-7-34
- Within the URL entry field, you can use the or key to select a character, and the or key to move the cursor.
- The Stop key has the Delete function when there is a character at the cursor position. (The character at the position of the cursor is deleted, moving all following
characters one position toward freed place.)
If there is no character at the cursor position, it has the Backspace function. (The character at the left of the cursor is deleted, moving the cursor.)
- When you move the cursor to a position of a character and press the or key, you can insert characters.
(The character at the cursor position is moved to the right, and a new character is inserted.
- You can select the enter mode with the Navi key. (The default setting is small alphabet letter.)
(2) How to enter port number
Port Number
00001
(1-65535)
L / R
UP / DOWN
[ OK : S e t ]
F-7-35
- Possible to set between 1 and 65535 (The default display is 1).
- The top digit can be selected between 0 and 6. Other digits can be selected between 0 and 9.
- When OK key is pressed, and the value is over 65535, it is fixed on 65535.
- When OK key is pressed, and the value is 0, it is fixed on 1.
7-29
Chapter 7
(3) How to enter user name
Proxy User [a]
User Name Canon
: Select [1]
Stop : Delete
Navi : a -> A -> 1
[OK:Set]
F-7-36
[1] Entry filed (24 one-byte characters)
- It is the same as the entering method of proxy server address.
(4) How to enter password
Proxy Password [a]
: Select [1]
Stop : Delete
Navi : a -> A -> 1
[ OK : S e t ]
F-7-37
[1] Entry filed (24 one-byte characters)
- If a password has already been set, when you press the or key at any cursor position, all the "*" will disappear and the first letter will be entered as the first
character.
- Entered characters are visible until you press OK key. Once entering into the menu again, they will be changed to "*".
- Other information is the same as the entering method of proxy server address.
3.2 e-RDS settings

1) Enter the service mode.
- Turn off the printer power.
- Turn on the power while pressing the [Load] key and [Navigate] key.
* Keep pressing the above keys until "Initializing" is displayed.
- "S" appears at the top right of the display.
- Press the or key to choose the [Set./Adj. Menu]and press the [OK] key.
* "SERVICE MODE" appears in the menu list and the MESSAGE LED flashes.
- Press the key or key to choose "SERVICE MODE" and press the [OK] key.
2) Set the following e-RDS setting items No.1-4.

(If the result of the communication test (COM-TEST) is "NG", execute setting items No.5-6 to solve the problem.)
No. Item Type Description

1 E-RDS SWITCH 2 bytes OFF : Disable/ ON : Enable e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system to send device information,
meter data, and error statuses to the UGW.
Default value is OFF (not in use)
2 UGW-ADDRESS 129 bytes The UGW address by default : https://a01---.
(NULL The complete address is not provided in this document for security reason.
included, SJIS
not allowed)
3 UGW-PORT 4 bytes The UGW Port Number by default : 443
Validation : 1-65535
4 COM-TEST To perform Communication test with UGW and set "OK!"/ "NG!" as the result.
5 COM-LOG Detailed communication data log
Switches to display time when error occurred, error code, and error data up to now.
Max 30 loggings retained.
Max 128 characters (not containing NULL) for Error information.
6 ERDS-DAT Initialize e-RDS setting data
7-30
Chapter 7
3.3 Service Mode Menu Tree
DISPLAY
I/O DISPLAY
ADJUST
FUNCTION
REPLACE
COUNTER
SETTEING Pth
RTC
PV AUTO JUDGE
NETWORK CERTIFICATE CA-CERTIFICATE VALIDITY:*1 yyyy/mm/dd
E-RDS E-RDS SWITCH:*1 ON/OFF
UGW-ADDRESS:*1 http://XXX
UGW-PORT:*1 XXXXX
COM-TEST:*1 YES
COM-LOG:*1
HEAD DOT INF
INITIALIZE WARNING
ERROR
JAM
ADJUST
W-INK
CARRIAGE
PURGE
INK-USE CNT
W-INK-CHG CNT
HEAD-CHG CNT
HDD BOX PASS
PARTS-CHG CNT
PARTS COUNTER
USER SETTEING
CA-KEY:*1 YES/NO
ERDS-DAT:*1 YES/NO
JOB LOG YES/NO
* Press key to move to the next menu of the same layer, and press key to move to the menu of one layer deeper.
* The menus shown in '*1' are the e-RDS-related menus.
3.4 e-RDS Related Setting Details

1) e-RDS's Operation Mode [E-RDS SWITCH]
In service mode, referring to the "Service Mode Menu Tree", go to [E-RDS SWITCH] menu using key and key.
(1) Choose between [ON] or [OFF] using the and keys.
E - R D S S W I T C H
O F F
F-7-38
(2) Press [OK] key to determine the operation mode and go back to the previous screen.
E - R D S S W I T C H
= O N
F-7-39
- When the operation mode is determined, "=" will be displayed.
- OFF: When it is set to [OFF], e-RDS is not used. Default value is OFF.
- ON: When it is set to [ON], e-RDS is used.
7-31
Chapter 7
2) UGW Address [UGW-ADDRESS] and UGW port [UGW-PORT]

Usually, the default values set in advance are used for the setting value of [UGW-ADDRESS] and [UGW-PORT]. Unless there is a special instruction, the default
value should not be changed. If it should be changed, the communication with UGW may have an error. If [UGW-ADDRESS] and [UGW-PORT] are changed, the
new setting will be enabled after power OFF/ON.
Therefore, usually, the setup is not necessary.
* If you change under a special instruction, perform the following procedure.
(1) Setting address for UGW
- In service mode, referring to the "Service Mode Menu Tree", go to [UGW-ADDRESS] menu using key and key.
E - R D S
U G W A D D R E S S
F-7-40
- Press key to enter the Setup Mode. (A character indicating the input mode (in the upper right corner of the screen) and the cursor are displayed.)
Enter UGW address (URL).
U G W - A D D R E S S : a
h t t p : / /
F-7-41
Display to indicate an input mode
A: Alphabet capital letter
a: Alphabet small letter
1: Numerical character
- The cursor is shown at the first letter.
- Use and keys to select characters to enter.
- Press [Back] key to cancel what you entered and go back to the previous screen.
- Press [OK] key to determine what you entered and go back to the previous screen.
(2) Setting up the GW Port Number

- In service mode, referring to the "Service Mode Menu Tree", go to [UGW-PORT] menu using key and key.
E - R D S
U G W P O R T
F-7-42
- Press key to enter the Setup Mode. (A cursor is displayed.)

Enter a port number.
U G W - P O R T
0 0 0 0 0
F-7-43
- Use and keys to select characters to enter.

- Press [Back] key to cancel what you entered and go back to the previous screen.
- Press [OK] key to determine what you entered and go back to the previous screen.
* The actual setting value of UGW address [UGW-ADDRESS] and UGW port [UGW-PORT] are categorized as confidential information, so they are not described
in this manual.
3) Communication Test [COM-TEST]

(1) In service mode, referring to the "Service Mode Menu Tree", go to [COM-TEST] menu using key and key.
C O M - T E S T
Y E S
F-7-44
(2) Press [OK] key to start the test. ("=" is displayed at the start of the test.)
C O M - T E S T
= Y E S
F-7-45
(3) During the communication test, "CHECK NOW" is displayed.
C O M - T E S T
C H E C K N O W . .
F-7-46
7-32
Chapter 7
- Once the communication test is started, it cannot be cancelled.(Other operation won't be accepted until the result is obtained.)
(4) If the communication test was successful, "CHECK RSLT:OK" is displayed.
C O M - T E S T
C H E C K R S L T : O K
F-7-47
- Press key to exit this operation mode and go back to the top of [COM-TEST] menu.
(5) If the communication test was failed, "CHECK RSLT:NG" is displayed.
C O M - T E S T
C H E C K R S L T : N G
F-7-48
- Press key to exit this operation mode and go back to the top of [COM-TEST] menu.
- If you cannot obtain the result after 30 seconds from the start of a communication test, the test is considered failed and the same screen will appear.
* When the communication test was successful, it is necessary to take the interval of 5 minutes before performing the next communication test.
4) Communication Log [COM-LOG]

Communication Error Information/Detailed Communication Error Information can be displayed on the screen at the time of a communication error with the Service
Center (including proxy server error). When a communication error occurs, you can refer to this information to study how to deal with the problem.
* For the countermeasure corresponding to each Communication Error Information or Detailed Communication Error Information, see the list of error message in
"4. Troubleshoot".
(1) In service mode, referring to the "Service Mode Menu Tree", go to [COM-LOG] menu using key and key.
E - R D S
C O M - L O G
F-7-49
(2) Press key, and communication error information is displayed. On the upper line of the LCD, a log number (01-30) and an error code are shown; on the
bottom line, an occurrence date and time of the error is shown.
N o : 0 1 X X X X X X X X H
Y Y Y Y / M M / D D H H : M M
F-7-50
- COM-LOG information can be saved up to 30 cases.
- Use Right and Left keys to change logs to display.
- Logs are displayed in the sequence of the time of occurrence. (Log number 1 is the latest log.)
- Press key to exit this operation mode and go back to the top of [COM-LOG] menu.
* If the Communication Error Information is not saved, the screen below will appear.
C O M - L O G
N O L O G
F-7-51
- Press key to exit the communication error information screen and go back to the top of [COM-LOG] menu.
(3) Press key to display the Detailed Communication Error Information (maximum 128 characters).
1st-32nd characters of Detailed Communication Error Information are shown.
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
F-7-52
33rd-64th characters of Detailed Communication Error Information are shown.
F-7-53
7-33
Chapter 7
65th-96th characters of Detailed Communication Error Information are shown.
F-7-54
97th-128th characters of Detailed Communication Error Information are shown.
F-7-55
- Use and keys to move among Screen and Screen. (Detailed Communication Error Information can be made with maximum 128 characters, however, even
if the information is made up with 1 to 96 characters, all Screens are still displayed.)
- Press key to exit the Detailed Communication Error Information screen and go back to the Communication Error Information screen.
* If Detailed Communication Error Information does not exist, the screen below will appear.
N O E R R O R D E T A I L
F-7-56
- Press key to exit the Detailed Communication Error Information screen and go back to the Communication Error Information screen.
5) Initializing the e-RDS setting [ERDS-DAT]

Usually, the setup is not necessary.
Use this procedure when you want to reset the e-RDS settings to the factory default.
(1) In service mode, referring to the "Service Mode Menu Tree", go to [ERDS-DAT] menu using key and key.
E - R D S D A T
N O
F-7-57
(2) Choose between YES/NO using and keys, and press [OK] key to set.
E - R D S D A T
= Y E S
F-7-58
- Press [OK] key, and "=" will appear and the initializing process will begin.
[NO]: Do not initialize the e-RDS setting. Default value is [NO].

[YES]: Initialize the e-RDS setting.
6) Displaying the CA Certificate Information [VALIDITY]

For the secure communication between the device (e-RDS) and the UGW, an authentication technology from a certification authority is used. A license has been
issued from the certification authority. For this reason, the devices are shipped with the CA (Certificate Authority) certificate enabled in advance to prove the license
obtained.
To confirm that this CA certificate is valid or how long it will be valid, you can display the expiration date of the CA certificate information.
(1) In service mode, referring to the "Service Mode Menu Tree", go to [VALIDITY] menu using key and key.
C A - C E R T I F I C A T E
V A L I D I T Y
F-7-59
(2) Press key, and the expiration date of the CA certificate will be displayed.
V A L I D I T Y
Y Y Y Y / M M / D D
F-7-60
7-34
Chapter 7
- Press key to exit the CA certificate expiration date display screen and go back to the top of [VALIDITY] menu.
* If the CA certificate is deleted, the screen below will appear.
V A L I D I T Y
N O T I N S T A L L E D
F-7-61
- Press key to exit the CA certificate expiration date display screen and go back to the top of [VALIDITY] menu.
7) Deleting the CA Certificate [CA-KEY]

For the secure communication between the device (e-RDS) and the UGW, an authentication technology from a certification authority is used. A license has been
issued from the certification authority. For this reason, the devices are shipped with the CA (Certificate Authority) certificate enabled in advance to prove the license
obtained.
The device (e-RDS) uses this CA certificate to communicate with the UGW, thus CA must not be deleted.
* If you delete the CA certificate under a special instruction, perform the following procedure.
(1) In service mode, referring to the "Service Mode Menu Tree", go to [CA-KEY] menu using key and key.
C A - K E Y
N O
F-7-62
(2) Choose between YES/NO using and keys, and press [OK] key to set.
C A - K E Y
= Y E S
F-7-63
- Press [OK] key, and "=" will appear and the initializing process will begin.
[NO]: Do not delete the CA certificate. Default value is [NO].

[YES]: Delete the CA certificate.
7-35
Chapter 7
4. FAQ
No. Question Answer

Q1 Registration information of the device (E-RDS) is once When registration of the device (e-RDS) is deleted from the
deleted from the UGW server, and is re-registered after that. UGW, the status will be changed to the communication test
If a communication test is not not completed because related
carried out, then device information on UGW becomes information has lost from a database. Therefore, device
invalid. information will also become invalid if that condition persists
for seven days without carrying out the communication
test. Hence, to avoid the invalid condition, carry out the
communication test.
Q2 The communication test with the UGW server results NG! The comunication test might become NG in the following
cases.
- 1. Name resolution was failed due to an incorrect host name
or DNS server has been halted.
- 2. Network cable is blocked off. Network cable is broken.
- 3. Proxy server settings are not correct.
Q3 Could you describe the timing of data transmitting from the The schedule of data transmitting, and the start time are
device (e-RDS) to the UGW, and what data size is sent to the determined by settings in the UGW side. The timing is once
UGW? per 16 hours by default, and counter data size is maximum
1400 bytes.
Q4 Can I turn the device power off during the device (e-RDS) While operating the device (e-RDS), the power of the printer
operation? and network equipment such as HUB must be ON. If power
OFF is needed, do not leave it OFF for a long time.
An error such as "Device is busy, try later"could occur if the
power supply of network
equipment is made prolonged OFF.
5. Troubleshooting
No. Condition detected Action

1 The communication test has failed. Check network conditions such as proxy server settings and so on.
- Check the communication log from COM-LOG. -> Execute "Remedy" in the "Error
message list".
- Check whether RGW-ADDRESS or RGW-PORT settings have changed.
7-36
Chapter 7
6. Error message list

Details of the errors and their remedies are as described below.
(The meaning of server indicates the UGW in this section)
No. Error Message Cause Remedy

1 SUSPEND: E-RDS has been booted up (device reboot) with E- Perform the communication test [COMTEST] in service mode.
Communication test is not RDS SWITCH = ON but the
performed communication test had not yet been performed.
2 Event Registration is Failed Event Registration is Failed Processing (event Turn the device OFF/ ON. If the error persists, replace the
processing) within the device has failed. device system software (firmware).
(Upgrade)
3 URL Scheme error (not https) The header of the URL of the registered UGW is Check that the value of UGW-ADR has been entered correctly
not in https format. A "https://" input error. as https://a01---.
4 Server connection error An UGW connection error. Displayed in the event Check the network-related settings according to "No.1:
of a TCP/IP communication fault. Communication test is not performed" in "Troubleshooting".
5 URL server specified is illegal A URL different to that specified by the UGW has Check that the value of UGW-ADR has been entered correctly
been set. An URL address setting error. as https://a01---.
6 Proxy connection error Cannot connect to proxy server. Check proxy server address and re-enter if necessary.
Displayed when unable to connect to proxy server.
7 Proxy authentication error Displayed when the authentication to the proxy Check the user name and password required in order to login
server has failed. to the proxy, and re-enter if necessary.
8 Server certificate error Device's route certificate is unavailable. Reinstall the latest device system software (firmware).
(Upgrade)
9 Server certificate expired The route certificate registered with the device has Check that the device time and date are correctly set. If the
expired. device time and date are correct, upgrade to the latest system
software (firmware).
10 Unknown error Some other kind of communication error has Try again after a period of time. If the same error occurs again,
occurred. check the UGW status with the UGW administrator.
11 SOAP Fault SOAP communication error has occurred. Check that the value of UGW-PORT is 443.
12 Server response error (NULL) A UGW response error (when UGW error code Try again after a period of time. If the same error persists,
processing has failed). check the UGW status with the UGW administrator.
A HTTPS communication error.
13 Server response error A UGW response error. Check an error code (hexadecimal) returned from the UGW,
(Hexadecimal) Displayed when communication with UGW has then retry after a period of time.
[Error detailed in the UGW]:*1 been successful, but an error of some sort has
prevented UGW from responding.
14 Device internal error An internal device error. An error due to the device Switch the device OFF/ ON. Or, replace the device system
side. software. (Upgrade)
15 Server schedule is invalid During the communication test, there has been When the error occurs, report the details to the support
some kind of error in the schedule values passed department. Then, after the UGW side has responded, retry the
from UGW. communication test.
16 Server response time out UGW response time out. If this error occurs when the communication test is being run,
Due to network congestion, etc., the response from wait some time and rerun the test.
UGW does not come within the specified time.
17 Server not found There is a mistake in the UGW URL, and UGW Check that the value of Service mode > E-RDS/RGW-ADR is
cannot be accessed. https://a01---.
18 E-RDS switch is set OFF E-RDS is disabled. Set E-RDS SWITCH = ON, and run COM-TEST in service
mode.
19 Server schedule is not exist Server schedule does not exist. Check the device settings status with the UGW administrator.
Blank schedule data has been received from UGW.
20 Network is not ready, try later Network-related settings have not been made for Make network-related settings properly for the device
the device. (printer).
21 URL error A URL setting error. Check that the value of UGW-ADR is https://a01---.
Non-URL text string entered in URL field.
22 Proxy address resolution error A proxy server address resolution error. Check that the proxy server name is correct.
23 Server certificate verify error The server certificate verification (URL check) Check that the value of UGW-ADR is https://a01---.
error.
24 Server address resolution error UGW address resolution has failed. Check that the value of UGW-ADR is https:// a01---.
*1:[Hexadecimal] indicates an error code returned from the UGW in hexadecimal.
7. Service cautions
After performing the following service actions, it is necessary to perform the resetting of the e-RDS.
Failure to do so will result that the counter transmitting value to the UGW may become unusual.
- System software (firmware) upgrade

- After replacing the main controller board, the following settings in service mode must not be changed unless there are specific instructions to do so. Changing
these values will cause error in communication with the UGW.
(Initial values)
UGW-PORT: 443
UGW-ADDRESS: https://a01---.
7-37
Chapter 7
7.1.5 Viewing PRINT INF

0031-3291
a) PRINT INF item detail

The details of each PRINT INF item displayed when performing [SERVICE MODE] > [DISPLAY] > [PRINTINF] are as follows:
Print item Print content Printed value

SYSTEM S/N Serial number of printer characters/numerals of 8-byte
TYPE Type setting on main controller PCB 24, 36
LF TYPE Feed roller type 0: old type roller
1: new type roller
TMP Ambient temperature Unit: Centigrade degree
RH Ambient humidity Unit: %
SIZE LF Detected size of loaded media (feed direction) mm (0 is always detected for the roll media.)
SIZE CR Detected size of loaded media (carriage scan direction) mm
AFTER INST. Number of days since initial installation Unit: Day(s)
HEAD S/N Serial number of printhead characters/numerals (8 digits)
LOT Lot number of printhead characters/numerals (8 digits)
INK (The ink color is Number of days passed since the ink tank was installed Unit: Days
indicated)
WARNING 01-20 Warning history (up to 20 events) Number: Lowest is the most recent
Date: mm/dd
Time: mm/ss
Code: Last 4 digits
Cumulative number of printed media (equivalent of A4)
ERROR 01-20 Error history (up to 20 events) Number: Lowest is the most recent
Date: mm/dd
Time: mm/ss
Code: Last 4 digits
Cumulative number of printed media (equivalent of A4)
7-38
Chapter 7

JAM 01-05 JAM log (5 records) Number: Lowest is the most recent
Date: mm/dd
Time: mm/ss
Jam code
01 Jam type 1: CR error
2: Jam
3: Feed failure (delay)
4: Cut failure
*: Unknown
02 Media format 1: Roll media
2: Cut sheet
*: Unknown
03 Jam timing 1: Feed
2: Print
3: Eject
*: Unknown
04 Width detection OFF mode 1: ON
2: OFF
*: Unknown
05 Head height 0: SL (1.0mm)
1: L (1.3mm)
2: M1 (1.8mm)
3: M2 (2.0mm)
4: M3 (2.2mm)
5: H (2.6mm)
*: Unknown
06 1: Fully close
2: Only HP side open
3: 1/4 open
4: 1/2 open
5: 3/4 open
6: Fully open
*: Unknown
07 Cut mode 1: User cut
2: Eject cut
3: Auto cut
*: Unknown
08 Media passing environment 0: A(temperature 15 to 25 degrees centigrade/humidity
40 to 60%)
1: B(temperature 25 to 30 degrees centigrade/humidity
40 to 60%)
2: C(temperature 15 to 30 degrees centigrade/humidity
10 to 40%)
3: D(temperature 15 to 30 degrees centigrade/humidity
60 to 80%)
4: E(temperature 15 to 30 degrees centigrade/humidity 0
to 10%, or 15 degrees centigrade or less and 30 degrees
centigrade or more/humidity 0 to 50%[low humidity is
out of guarantee.])
5: F(temperature 15 to 30 degrees centigrade/humidity
80 to 100%, or 15 degrees centigrade or less and 30
degrees centigrade or more/humidity 50 to 100%[high
humidity is out of guarantee.])
*: Unknown
09 Borderless/Bordered 1: Bordered printing
2: Borderless printing
*: Unknown
10 Print mode label No. Display print mode
*: Unknown
11 Media size Display size
*: Unknown
12 Media type Display media name
*: Unknown
INK CHK (The ink color is Refill log 0: Disable remaining ink detection was never set
indicated) Print whether disable remaining ink detection was 1: Disable remaining ink detection was set at least once
previously set
7-39
Chapter 7

COUNTE PRINTER LIFE-TTL Total amount of cumulative number of sheets Unit: sheets (A4-equivalent paper)
R LIFE-ROLL Cumulative number of sheets of roll media Unit: sheets (A4-equivalent paper)
LIFE-CUTSHEET Cumulative number of sheets of cut sheet Unit: sheets (A4-equivalent paper)
LIFE A-F Cumulative number of sheets of each environment Unit: sheets (A4-equivalent paper)
POWER ON Cumulative power-on time Unit: hours
SLEEP ON Cumulative sleep-on time Unit: hours
CUTTER Number of cutting operations Unit: times
WIPE Number of wiping operations Unit: times
W-INK Remaining capacity of the maintenance cartridge Unit: %
PDL Cumulative number of printed media according to PDL GARO: xx sheets
HP-GL/2: xx sheets
CARRIA PRINT Cumulative printing time Unit: hours
GE DRIVE Cumulative carriage moving time Unit: hours
CR-COUNT Cumulative carriage scan count (count as 1 by moving back Unit: times
and forth)
CR-DIST. Cumulative carriage scan distance (count as 1 by moving Unit: times
210mm)
PRINT-COUNT Cumulative print end count (count as 1 by capping) Unit: times
PURGE CLN-A Cumulative number of automatic cleaning operations
1 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 1 (normal Unit: times
suction) operations
2 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 2 (ink level
adjusting) operations
3 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 3 (initial filling)
operations
6 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 6 (strong normal
suction) operations
7 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 7 (aging)
operations
8 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 8 (flashing)
operations
10 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 10 (ink filling
after secondary transportation) operations
11 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 11 (ink filling
after head replacement) operations
15 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 15 (dot count
small suction) operations
16 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 16 (sedimented
ink agitation) operations
17 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 17 (small suction)
operations
TTL Total number of automatic cleaning operations
CLN-M Cumulative number of manual cleaning 1 operations
1 Cumulative number of manual cleaning 1 (normal suction) Unit: times
operations
4 Cumulative number of manual cleaning 4 (ink draining from
head after head replacement) operations
5 Cumulative number of manual cleaning 5 (ink draining from
head and tube before transportation ) operations
6 Cumulative number of manual cleaning 6 (normal strong
suction) operations
TTL Total number of manual cleaning operations
7-40
Chapter 7

COUNTER CLEAR INK Cumulative count of ink section consumption amount Unit: times
CONSUME clearing
MTC EXC. Cumulative count of maintenance cartridge
HEAD EXC. Cumulative count of printhead replacement count
clearing
PARTS CR1 Cumulative count of unit CR-1(carriage unit bushing)
EXC. replacement count clearing
PARTS CR2 Cumulative count of unit CR-2(fexible cable unit)
PARTS CR3 Cumulative count of unit CR-3(linear encoder sensor/
EXC. linear scale/shaft cleaner) replacement count clearing
PARTS CR4 Cumulative count of unit CR-4(carriage height
EXC. changing cam) replacement count clearing
PARTS CR5 Cumulative count of unit CR-5(multi sensor)
PARTS SP1 Cumulative count of unit SP-1(ink tube unit)
PARTS PG1 Cumulative count of unit PG-1(purge unit)
PARTS HMa1 Cumulative count of unit HMa-1(head management
EXC. sensor) replacement count clearing
PARTS MT1 Cumulative count of unit MT-1(carriage motor)
PARTS PL1 Cumulative count of unit PL-1(feed motor)
PARTS Mi1 Cumulative count of unit Mi-1(mist fan/mist exhaust
EXC. duct) replacement count clearing
PARTS CT1 Cumulative count of unit CT-1(cutter) replacement
EXC. count clearing
PARTS WF1 Cumulative count of unit WF-1(ink absorber under
EXC. the maintenance cartridge unit) replacement count
clearing
PARTS WF2 Cumulative count of unit WF-2(platen exhaust duct)
FACTORY For factory
CNT.
7-41
Chapter 7

COUNTER EXCHANGE MTC EXC. Maintenance cartridge replacement count Unit: times
HEAD EXC. Printhead replacement count
BOARD Main controller PCB replacement count
EXC.(M/B)
PARTS CR1 CR-1(carriage unit bushing) replacement count
EXC.
PARTS CR2 CR-2(fexible cable unit) replacement count
EXC.
PARTS CR3 CR-3(linear encoder sensor/linear scale/shaft cleaner)
EXC. replacement count
PARTS CR4 CR-4(carriage height changing cam) replacement
EXC. count
PARTS CR5 CR-5(multi sensor) replacement count
EXC.
PARTS SP1 SP-1(ink tube unit) replacement count
EXC.
PARTS PG1 PG-1(purge unit) replacement count
EXC.
PARTS HMa1 HMa-1(head management sensor) replacement count
EXC.
PARTS MT1 MT-1(carriage motor) replacement count
EXC.
PARTS PL1 PL-1(feed motor) replacement count
EXC.
PARTS Mi1 Mi-1(mist fan/mist exhaust duct) replacement count
EXC.
PARTS CT1 CT-1(cutter) replacement count
EXC.
PARTS WF1 WF-1(ink absorber under the maintenance cartridge
EXC. unit) replacement count
PARTS WF2 WF-2(platen exhaust duct) replacement count
EXC.
DETAIL-CNT MOVE Count of secondary transportation Unit: times
PRINTER
MEDIACONF Count of media registered by media editor
IG-CNT
N-INKCHK Count of turning off the ink remaining level detection
(The ink color for each color
is indicated)
7-42
Chapter 7

COUNTER INK-USE1 INK (The ink Cumulative consumption amount of generic ink Unit: ml
color is
indicated)
TTL Total amount of the cumulative consumption of
generic ink
LINK (The ink Cumulative consumption amount of generic large ink
color is
indicated)
generic large ink
SINK (The ink Cumulative consumption amount of generic small ink
color is
indicated)
generic small ink
NINK (The Cumulative consumption amount of refilled ink
ink color is
indicated)
refilled ink
INK-USE2 INK (The ink Consumption amount of generic ink of the currently Unit: ml
color is installed ink tank.
indicated)
TTL Total consumption amount of generic ink of the
currently installed ink tanks
NINK (The Consumption amount of refilled ink of the currently
ink color is installed ink tank
indicated)
TTL Total consumption amount of refilled ink of the
currently installed ink tanks
INK-EXC INK (The ink Cumulative count of generic ink tank replacement Unit: times
color is
indicated)
TTL Total amount of the cumulative count of generic ink
tank replacement
NINK (The Cumulative count of refilled ink tank replacement
ink color is
indicated)
TTL Total amount of the cumulative count of refilled ink
tank replacement
7-43
Chapter 7

COUNTE MEDIA NAME Media type
R 1-7 TTL Total amount of cumulative print area of roll media and cut Unit: square/meter, square/feet
sheet
ROLL Cumulative print area of roll media
CUTSHEET Cumulative print area of cut sheet
MEDIA NAME OTHER OTHER
OTHER TTL Total amount of cumulative print area of roll media and cut Unit: square/meter, square/feet
sheet
ROLL Cumulative print area of roll media
CUTSHEET Cumulative print area of cut sheet
MEDIA 36-44 Cumulative print area of roll media equal to or larger than 36 Unit: square/meter, square/feet, sheets (equivalent of
SIZE1 inches but less than 44 inches (physical size) A4)
ROLL P- 24-36 Cumulative print area of roll media equal to or larger than 24
SQ/P- inches but less than 36 inches (physical size)
CNT
17-24 Cumulative print area of roll media equal to or larger than 17
inches but less than 24 inches (physical size)
0-17 Cumulative print area of roll media less than 17 inches
(physical size)
MEDIA 36-44 Cumulative print area of roll media equal to or larger than 36 Unit: square/meter, square/feet, sheets (equivalent of
SIZE2 inches but less than 44 inches (data size) A4)
ROLL D- 24-36 Cumulative print area of roll media equal to or larger than 24
SQ/D- inches but less than 36 inches (data size)
CNT
17-24 Cumulative print area of roll media equal to or larger than 17
inches but less than 24 inches (data size)
0-17 Cumulative print area of roll media less than 17 inches (data
size)
MEDIA 36-44 Cumulative print area of cut sheet equal to or larger than 36 Unit: square/meter, square/feet, sheets (equivalent of
SIZE1 inches but less than 44 inches (physical size) A4)
CUT P- 24-36 Cumulative print area of cut sheet equal to or larger than 24
SQ/P- inches but less than 36 inches (physical size)
CNT
17-24 Cumulative print area of cut sheet equal to or larger than 17
inches but less than 24 inches (physical size)
0-17 Cumulative print area of cut sheet less than 17 inches
(physical size)
MEDIA 36-44 Cumulative print area of cut sheet equal to or larger than 36 Unit: square/meter, square/feet, sheets (equivalent of
SIZE2 inches but less than 44 inches (data size) A4)
CUT D- 24-36 Cumulative print area of cut sheet equal to or larger than 24
SQ/D- inches but less than 36 inches (data size)
CNT
17-24 Cumulative print area of cut sheet equal to or larger than 17
inches but less than 24 inches (data size)
0-17 Cumulative print area of cut sheet less than 17 inches (data
size)
HEAD (The ink color is Dot counts of each colors of the currently installed printhead Unit: (x 1,000,000) dots
DOT indicated)
CNT.1 TTL Total dot counts of each colors of the currently installed
printhead
HEAD (The ink color is Cumulative dot counts of each colors Unit: (x 1,000,000) dots
DOT indicated)
CNT.2 TTL Total cumulative dot counts of each colors
7-44
Chapter 7

HEAD INF.1 01 Date & time installed (last 4 times) YY/MM/DD
[Installed head] Display order: Installed date (last) -> Installed date (2nd
to last) -> Installed date (3rd to last) -> Installed date
(initial)
02 Removal date & time (last 3 times) YY/MM/DD
Display order: Last -> 2nd to last -> 3rd to last
03 Main unit serial No. (last 3 times) Display order: Last -> 2nd to last -> 3rd to last
04 CLN_A (auto) count Unit: Times
05 CLN_A (manual) count
06 Cleaning B (auto/left cap) count
07 Cleaning B (auto/right cap) count
08 CLN_B (manual) count
09 Head replacement ink drain count
10 Secondary transport ink drain count
11 Secondary transport ink fill count
12 Ink filling after head replacement count
13 Recovery suction
14 Number of sheets printed Unit: Sheets (A4 equivalent sheets)
15 Error log YY/MM/DD xxxx (last 4 digits)
01: Last, 02: 2nd to last, 03: 3rd to last, ..., 20: 20th to last
16 Refill tank usage log (per chip) A: x, B: x, C: x, D: x, E: x, F: x
17 Firmware version (last 3) XX.XX YY/MM/DD
18 Head highest temperature (per chip) A: xxx, B: xxx, C: xxx, D: xxx, E: xxx, F: xxx
19 Number of non-discharging nozzles (per nozzle row) chip A AA: xxx, AB: xxx, BA: xxx, BB: xxx, CA: xxx, CB:
row A, chip A row B to chip F row A, chip F row B xxx, DA: xxx, DB: xxx, EA: xxx, EB: xxx, FA: xxx, FB:
xxx
20 EEPROM format Ver (oldest version)
21 EEPROM format Ver (latest version)
HEAD INF.2 01 Date & time installed (last 4 times) YY/MM/DD
[Head installed 2nd to Display order: Installed date (last) -> Installed date (2nd
last] to last) -> Installed date (3rd to last) -> Installed date
(initial)
02 Removal date & time (last 3 times) YY/MM/DD
03 Main unit serial No. (last 3 times) Display order: Last -> 2nd to last -> 3rd to last
04 CLN_A (auto) count Unit: Times
05 CLN_A (manual) count
06 Cleaning B (auto/left cap) count
07 Cleaning B (auto/right cap) count
08 CLN_B (manual) count
09 Head replacement ink drain count
10 Secondary transport ink drain count
11 Secondary transport ink fill count
12 Ink filling after head replacement count
13 Recovery suction
14 Number of sheets printed Unit: Sheets (A4 equivalent sheets)
15 Error log YY/MM/DD xxxx (last 4 digits)
01: Last, 02: 2nd to last, 03: 3rd to last, ..., 20: 20th to last
16 Refill tank usage log (per chip) A: x, B: x, C: x, D: x, E: x, F: x
17 Firmware version (last 3) XX.XX YY/MM/DD
18 Head highest temperature (per chip) A: xxx, B: xxx, C: xxx, D: xxx, E: xxx, F: xxx
19 Number of non-discharging nozzles (per nozzle row) chip A AA: xxx, AB: xxx, BA: xxx, BB: xxx, CA: xxx, CB:
row A, chip A row B to chip F row A, chip F row B xxx, DA: xxx, DB: xxx, EA: xxx, EB: xxx, FA: xxx, FB:
xxx
20 EEPROM format Ver (oldest version)
21 EEPROM format Ver (latest version)
7-45
Chapter 7

PARTS CNT. [Value of each parts Status OK/W1/W2/E
counter] Number of days after set Unit: Days
Count
Life threshold
Usage Unit: %
Cumulative count
COGFF CONDITION Cogging FF result 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2: Check required
3: Adjust reruired
PITCHERR-F Pitch deviation in the forward path (FWD) -400 to 400 (1/100000 mm)
PITCHRR-B Pitch deviation of the return path (BWD)
PARAM0-F Parameters 1 REF: Motor error (6 digits)
PHASE: Phase (3 digits)
AMP: Amplitude (3 digits)
RATE: Decay rate (3 digits)
PARAM0-B Parameters 2 REF: Motor error (6 digits)
PARAM1-F Parameters 1 REF: Motor error (6 digits)
PARAM1-B Parameters 2 REF: Motor error (6 digits)
LF/SCALE MEDIA Type of paper that printed "PRINT INF"
ADJUSTMENT VALUE LF-A User LF adjustment value A of the above LF adjustment value (up to 4 decimal places)
MEDIA (standard)
LF-B User LF adjustment value B of the above media
(low pass)
SCALE-A User scale adjustment value A of the above Scale adjustment value (integer)
media (fine scale)
SCALE-B User scale adjustment value B of the above
media (fast scale)
PV AUTO JUDGE Ink reduction mode ON (NORMAL/LOW only when ON)/OFF
*: NORMAL: normal mode, LOW: ink saving
mode
Inrush number of times Inrush number of times (0 to 254)
*: Times that swiched from NORMAL (normal
mode) to LOW (ink saving mode)
MULTI SENSOR UNIT Multi sensor version
DATA Multi sensor data
7-46
Chapter 7

CRREG HRZ A Adjustment value of the horizontal registration A and
HRZ B B and C ink droplet landing position
HRZ C
VRT LATEST CALC POINTS As to the listed value, the number of effective value
from the first
VRT a Adjustment value when performing the vertical
VRT b registration a and b amd c average adjustment value
calculation
VRT c
JOB LOG No Job history (up to 5 events) Number: Lowest is the most recent
M Print mode
HEAD Head height
TEMP&HUM Temperature and humidity
MEDIA TYPE Media type
DATE Date
TIME Time
R Registration condition A: The GAP used for printing and GAP of internal
registration adjustment value is a match.
B: The GAP used for printing and GAP of internal
registration adjustment value is a mismatch.
C: No registration adjustment value
GAP Gap information Distance between head and nedia
JOB NAME Job name
ADJUST LOG No No: Adjustment history (up to 5 events, lowest is the The history of D and E are each most recent one
most recent) only.
D: Advanced registration history
E: Expansion registration history
ADJ. TYPE Adjustment type manual: Manual adjustment
auto(d): Detail
auto(s): Basic
auto(e): Extension
HEAD Head height xx(y,Z)
xx= A: automatic panel setting, H: fixed panel
setting, AE: adjustment error occurred
(automatic), HE: adjustment error occurred
(fixed),
(y,z)=0: SLOW, 1: LO, 2: M1, 3: M2, 4: M3, 5:
H1
y: GAP1
z= GAP2
TEMP&HUM Temperature and humidity
MEDIA TYPE Media type
DATE Date
TIME Time
GAP1 1st kind GAP
GAP2 2nd kind GAP
DUTY UNIT: m2 A(xxx) A: Cumulative print area of Duty A Unit: square/meter, square/feet, sheets (equivalent
B(xxx) B: Cumulative print area of Duty B of A4/LTR)
C: Cumulative print area of Duty C
C(xxx) D: Cumulative print area of Duty D
D(xxx) E: Cumulative print area of Duty E
TTL: Cumulative print area of all Duty
E(xxx)
xxx: Counter number of e-Maintenance/imageWARE
TTL(xxx) Remote
UNIT: sq.f A(xxx)
B(xxx)
C(xxx)
D(xxx)
E(xxx)
TTL(xxx)
UNIT: A4 A(xxx)
Sheet B(xxx)
C(xxx)
D(xxx)
E(xxx)
TTL(xxx)
UNIT: Letter A(xxx)
Sheet B(xxx)
C(xxx)
D(xxx)
E(xxx)
TTL(xxx)
7-47
Chapter 7
b) Layout
PRINT INF layout is shown below.
1/ 5
Canon imagePROGRAF iPFxxx PRINT IN F
Firm:xx.xx Boot:xx.xx MIT(DBF):x.xx MIT(DB):x.xx
S/N:xxxxxxxx Date:yyyy/mm/dd
SYSTEM
S/N:xxxxxxxx TYPE:12 -LF:1 TMP:xx RH:xx SIZE-LF:xxxxx.x -CR:xxxxx.x AFTER INST:xxxx x
HEAD INK
S/N:xxxxxxxx LOT:xxxxxxxx C:xxxxxx M:xxxxxx Y:xxxxxx MBK:xxxxxx MBK2:xxxxxx BK:xxxxxx
WARNING
01:MM/DD HH:MM xxxx 02:MM/DD HH:MM xxxx
ERROR
JAM
01:MM/DD HH:MM xxxx xxxxxxxx
01:x 02:x 03:x 04:x 05:xx 06:x 07:x 08:x
09:x 10:xxx 11:media_sizexxxxxx 12:media_namexxxxxx
01:x 02:x 03:x 04:x 05:xx 06:x 07:x 08:x
01:x 02:x 03:x 04:x 05:xx 06:x 07:x 08:x
01:x 02:x 03:x 04:x 05:xx 06:x 07:x 08:x
x
01:x 02:x 03:x 04:x 05:xx 06:x 07:x 08:x
F-7-64
7-48
Chapter 7
2/5
Canon imagePROGRAF iPFxxx PRINT INF
Firm:xx.xx Boot:xx.xx MIT(DBF):x.xx MIT(DB):x.xx
S/N:xxxxxxxx Date:yyyy/mm/dd
INK CHECK
C:x M:x Y:x MBK:x MBK2:x BK:x
COUNTER
PRINTER
LIFE-TTL:xxxxxx LIFE-ROLL:xxxxxx LIFE-CUTSHEET:xxxxxx
LIFE A:xxxxxx B:xxxxxx C:xxxxxx D:xxxxxx E:xxxxxx F:xxxxxx
POWER-ON:xxxxxx SLEEP-ON:xxxxxx CUTTER:xxxxxx WIPE:xxxxxx W-INK:xxxxxx
PDL: GARO:xxxxxx HP-GL/2:xxxxxx
CARRIAGE
PRINT:xxxxxx DRIVE:xxxxxx CR-COUNT:xxxxxx CR-DIST.:xxxxxx PRINT-COUNT:xxxxxx
PURGE
CLN-A : 1:xxxxx 2:xxxxx 3:xx 6:xxxx 7:xxx 10:xxx 11:xxx 15:xxx 16:xxxxx 17:xxxxx TTL:xxxxxx
CLN-M : 1:xxxxx 4:xxx 5:xx 6:xxxxx TTL:xxxxx
CLEAR
INK CONSUME:xxx MTC EXC.:xxx HEAD EXC.:xxx
PARTS CR1 EXC.:xx PARTS CR2 EXC.:xx PARTS CR3 EXC.:xx PARTS CR4 EXC.:xx PARTS CR5 EXC.:xx
PARTS SP1 EXC.:xx PARTS PG1 EXC.:xx PARTS HMa1 EXC.:xx PARTS MT1 EXC.:xx PARTS PL1 EXC.:xx
PARTS Mi1 EXC.:xx PARTS CT1 EXC.:xx PARTS WF1 EXC.:xx PARTS WF2 EXC.:xx
FACTORY CNT.:xx
EXCHANGE
MTC EXC.:xxx HEAD EXC.:xxx BOARD EXC.(M/B):xx
PARTS CR1 EXC.:xx PARTS CR2 EXC.:xx PARTS CR3 EXC.:xx PARTS CR4 EXC.:xx PARTS CR5 EXC.:xx
PARTS SP1 EXC.:xx PARTS PG1 EXC.:xx PARTS HMa1 EXC.:xx PARTS MT1 EXC.:xx PARTS PL1 EXC.:xx
PARTS Mi1 EXC.:xx PARTS CT1 EXC.:xx PARTS WF1 EXC.:xx PARTS WF2 EXC.:xx
DETAIL-CNT
MOVE PRINTER:xxx MEDIACONFIG-CNT:xxx
N-INKCHK: C:xxxx M:xxxx Y:xxxx MBK:xxxx MBK2:xxxx BK:xxxx
INK-USE1
INK C:xxxxx.xml M:xxxxx.xml Y:xxxxx.xml MBK:xxxxx.xml MBK2:xxxxx.xml BK:xxxxx.xml
TTL:xxxxxx.xml
NINK C:xxxxx.xml M:xxxxx.xml Y:xxxxx.xml MBK:xxxxx.xml MBK2:xxxxx.xml BK:xxxxx.xml
TTL:xxxxxx.xml
INK-USE2
INK C:xxxxx.xml M:xxxxx.xml Y:xxxxx.xml MBK:xxxxx.xml MBK2:xxxxx.xml BK:xxxxx.xml
TTL:xxxxxx.xml
NINK C:xxxxx.xml M:xxxxx.xml Y:xxxxx.xml MBK:xxxxx.xml MBK2:xxxxx.xml BK:xxxxx.xml
TTL:xxxxxx.xml
INK-EXC
INK C:xxxx M:xxxx Y:xxxx MBK:xxxx MBK2:xxxx BK:xxxx
TTL:xxxxx
NINK C:xxxx M:xxxx Y:xxxx MBK:xxxx MBK2:xxxx BK:xxxx
TTL:xxxxx
F-7-65
7-49
Chapter 7
3/5
Firm:xx.xx Boot:xx.xx MIT(DBF):x.xx MIT(DB):x.x x
S/N:xxxxxxxx Date:yyyy/mm/d d
MEDIA 1 MEDIA 2
NAME : xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx NAME : xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx x
TTL : xxxxxxx.x m2 xxxxxxx.x sq.f TTL : xxxxxxx.x m2 xxxxxxx.x sq.f
ROLL : xxxxxxx.x m2 xxxxxxx.x sq.f ROLL : xxxxxxx.x m2 xxxxxxx.x sq.f
CUTSHEET : xxxxxxx.x m2 xxxxxxx.x sq.f CUTSHEET : xxxxxxx.x m2 xxxxxxx.x sq.f
MEDIA 3 MEDIA 4
MEDIA 5 MEDIA 6
MEDIA 7 MEDIA OTHE R
MEDIA SIZE1 ROLL P-SQ/P-CN T

36-44: xxxxxxx.x m2 xxxxxxx.x sq.f 0
MEDIA SIZE2 ROLL D-SQ/D-CN T
MEDIA SIZE1 CUT P-SQ/P-CN T
MEDIA SIZE2 CUT D-SQ/D-CN T
F-7-66
7-50
Chapter 7
4/5
S/N:xxxxxxxx Date:yyyy/mm/d d
HEAD DOT CNT. 1

C:xxxxxxxxx M:xxxxxxxxx Y:xxxxxxxxx MBK:xxxxxxxxx MBK2:xxxxxxxxx BK:xxxxxxxx x
TTL:xxxxxxxxxxxxxx x
HEAD DOT CNT. 2
C:xxxxxxxxx M:xxxxxxxxx Y:xxxxxxxxx MBK:xxxxxxxxx MBK2:xxxxxxxxx BK:xxxxxxxx x
TTL:xxxxxxxxxxxxxx x
HEAD INF. 1
1:YY/MM/DD YY/MM/DD YY/MM/DD YY/MM/DD 2:YY/MM/DD YY/MM/DD YY/MM/D D
3:xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x
4:xxxxx 5:xxxxx 6:xxxxx 7:xxxxx 8:xxx 9:xxx 10:xxx 11:xxx 12:xx x
13:xxxxxxxx 19: 1
14: 1:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxxx 2:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxxx 3:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxx x
4:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxxx 5:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxxx 6:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxx x
19:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxxx 20:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxx x
15:A:x B:x C:x D:x E:x F: x
16:XX.XX YY/MM/DD XX.XX YY/MM/DD XX.XX YY/MM/D D
17:A:xxx B:xxx C:xxx D:xxx E:xxx F:xx x
18:AA:xxx AB:xxx BA:xxx BB:xxx CA:xxx CB:xxx DA:xxx DB:xxx EA:xxx EB:xxx FA:xxx FB:xx x
HEAD INF. 2
1:YY/MM/DD YY/MM/DD YY/MM/DD YY/MM/DD 2:YY/MM/DD YY/MM/DD YY/MM/D D
3:xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x
4:xxxxx 5:xxxxx 6:xxxxx 7:xxxxx 8:xxx 9:xxx 10:xxx 11:xxx 12:xx x
13:xxxxxxxx 19: 1
14: 1:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxxx 2:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxxx 3:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxx x
19:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxxx 20:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxx x
15:A:x B:x C:x D:x E:x F: x
16:XX.XX YY/MM/DD XX.XX YY/MM/DD XX.XX YY/MM/D D
17:A:xxx B:xxx C:xxx D:xxx E:xxx F:xx x
18:AA:xxx AB:xxx BA:xxx BB:xxx CA:xxx CB:xxx DA:xxx DB:xxx EA:xxx EB:xxx FA:xxx FB:xx x
F-7-67
7-51
Chapter 7
5/5
S/N:xxxxxxxx Date:yyyyy/mm/d d
PARTS CNT .
PARTS CR1 : OK 0 0.0 0.0 0% 0. 0
PARTS CR2 : OK 0 0.0 0.0 0% 0. 0
PARTS CR3 : OK 0 0.0 0.0 0% 0. 0
PARTS CR4 : OK 0 0.0 0.0 0% 0. 0
PARTS CR5 : OK 0 0.0 0.0 0% 0. 0
PARTS SP1 : OK 0 0 0 0% 0
PARTS PG1 : OK 0 0 0 0% 0
PARTS HMa1 : OK 0 0 0 0% 0
PARTS MT1 : OK 0 0 0 0% 0
PARTS PL1 : OK 0 0 0 0% 0
PARTS Mi1 : OK 0 0 0 0% 0
PARTS CT1 : OK 0 0 0 0% 0
PARTS WF1 : OK 0 0 0 0% 0
PARTS WF2 : OK 0 0 0 0% 0
COGFF
CONDITION : 0
PARAM0-F : REF: xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx PHASE: xxx xxx xxx xx x
AMP: xxx xxx xxx xxx RATE: xxx xxx xxx xx x
PARAM0-B : REF: xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx PHASE: xxx xxx xxx xx x
AMP: xxx xxx xxx xxx RATE: xxx xxx xxx xx x
LF-A
ROLL LARGE : XXX.XXXX MIDDLE : XXX.XXXX SMALL : XXX.XXXX SMALLER : XXX.XXX X
CUT LARGE : XXX.XXXX MIDDLE : XXX.XXXX SMALL : XXX.XXXX SMALLER : XXX.XXX X
LF-B
ROLL LARGE : XXX.XXXX MIDDLE : XXX.XXXX SMALL : XXX.XXXX SMALLER : XXX.XXX X
CUT LARGE : XXX.XXXX MIDDLE : XXX.XXXX SMALL : XXX.XXXX SMALLER : XXX.XXX X
SCALE-A
ROLL LARGE : XXX MIDDLE : XXX SMALL : XXX SMALLER : XX X
CUT LARGE : XXX MIDDLE : XXX SMALL : XXX SMALLER : XX X
SCALE-B
ROLL LARGE : XXX MIDDLE : XXX SMALL : XXX SMALLER : XX X
CUT LARGE : XXX MIDDLE : XXX SMALL : XXX SMALLER : XX X
PV AUTO JUDGE : ON(NORMAL) , 0
F-7-68
7-52
Chapter 7
7.2 Special Mode
7.2.1 Special Modes for Servicing

0023-3043
This printer supports the following special modes in addition to the service mode:
- PCB replacement mode

- Download mode
- Counter display mode
1. PCB replacement mode
This mode is used when replacing the main PCB or MC relay PCB.
By executing this mode,
- Backup data of the settings and counter values stored in the MC relay PCB are moved to the new main PCB.
- The data such as the settings and counter values are copied to the MC relay PCB.
a) Entering the PCB replacement mode

Follow the same procedure as that for entering the service mode.
(With the [Load] button and [Navigate] button pressed down, turn on the [Power] button.)
When the printer starts up, compare the serial number memorized in the main PCB's EEPROM with that memorized in the MC relay PCB's EEPROM. If they do
not match, or no serial number is memorized in either EEPROM, enter the PCB replacement mode.
b) Procedure
Select "CPU BOARD" or "MC BOARD" using the [ ] and [ ] buttons, and then press the [OK] button to determine it.
- CPU BOARD
Select this after replacing the main PCB.
The data in the MC relay PCB is copied to the main PCB.
- MC BOARD
Select this before replacing the MC relay PCB.
The data in the main controller PCB is copied to the MC relay PCB.
c) Exiting the PCB replacement mode

Turning off the [Power] button of the printer allows you to exit the PCB replacement mode.
For details on how to replace the PCB, see DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly > PCBs.
2. Download mode
Use this mode only when updating the firmware without performing initialization.
This mode can update the firmware even if the printhead and ink tanks have not been installed to the printer.
Reference:
a) Entering the download mode

1) Turning off the [Power] button of the printer.
2) With the [Stop] and [Navigate] buttons pressed down, turn on the [Power] button of the printer.
* Keep pressing the above buttons until "Initializing" appears on the display.
b) Procedure
When "Download Mode/Send Firmware" is shown on the display, transfer the firmware.
When downloading of the firmware is completed, the printer is turned off automatically.
3. Counter display mode

Use this mode to view only printer counter information.
a) Invoking counter display mode

1) Press the [MENU] button to keep [Printer Info] > [System Info] selected.
2) Press the [ ] button whole holding down the [MENU] button + [OK] button to invoke counter display mode.
b) How to view counter display mode
- S/N: Unit serial number
- CNT: Number of copies printed in A4 terms (unit: copies)
7-53
Chapter 7
7-54
Dec 17 2014

Service Manual: iPF680/670/650 Series

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual: iPF680/670/650 Series

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual: iPF680/670/650 Series

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual

COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.

Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or Warning.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).

Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.

Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question.

Provides a description of a service mode.

Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.

The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Chapter 2 TECHNICAL REFERENCE

2.1.3 Print Driving .............................................................................................................................................................2- 3

4.1.1 Service Parts ........................................................................................................................................................... 4- 1

Chapter 7 SERVICE MODE

1.1 Product Overview ..........................................................................................................................................................1-1

1.1 Product Overview

1.1.1 Product Overview

[3] [14] [15] [1] [2] [3] [4]

[12] [11] [10]

[1] Roll media cover [9] Maintenance cartridge

Functional enhancements new to this model include:

1.2.3 Ink Tank

The ink tank is disposable.

The cutter attached to the cutter unit is a round cutter.

1.2.5 Roll Holder

1.2.6 Stand (ST-26)

1.2.7 Stand (ST-27)

- Changing from the regular position to extended position B.

1.3 Product Specifications

1.3.1 Product Specifications

Type Bubble jet large-sized paper printer (stand model)

Width of media allowing borderless printing:

Operation panel LCD (160 X 128 dots), 13 keys, 5 LEDs

1.4 Detailed Specifications

1.4.1 Interface Specifications

Cable side: Series B plug compliant with USB standard

1.5 Names and Functions of Components

[3] [14] [15] [1] [2] [3] [4]

[12] [11] [10]

1.5.3 Top Cover (Inside)

1.5.4 Roll Unit Cover (Inside)

[3] [4] [4] [3]

1.5.6 Ink Tank Cover (Inside)

[Left Ink Tank Unit]

1.5.7 Stand (ST-26)

1.5.8 Stand (ST-27)

1.6 Basic Operation

1.6.1 Operation Panel

[10] Back OK Navigate

[1] [2] [3] [4]

[2] Ink tab

[3] Job tab

b) Setting menu items

*1: Available only if ManageRemainRoll is On.

3. Main menu during printing

4. Main Menu Settings

Setting Item Description/Instructions

Setting Item Description/Instructions